Docstoc

TYPE OF WORK AND PROJECT LOCATION

Document Sample
TYPE OF WORK AND PROJECT LOCATION Powered By Docstoc
					Michigan Department                                                                  Rev. 04/2009
of Transportation

                      TYPE OF WORK AND PROJECT LOCATION

CONTROL SECTION                            JOB NUMBER                      MICHIGAN PROJECT
34043                                  101616A




LOCATION
Located near Saranac, Ionia County, Berlin Township.



TYPE OF WORK
Rest Area reconstruction, parking lot expansion, sitework and utilities.




DESCRIPTION
I-96 Eastbound, Saranac Rest Area.




AGREEMENT(S)                     NO               YES, Agreement Numbers are listed below:




OVERSIGHT                        FHWA             MDOT
                                                               Control Section: 34043
                                                                 Job Number: 101616A


PROGRESS CLAUSE: Work on this project shall not begin before October 4, 2011,
or on the date agreed upon with the Engineer. In no case, shall any work be
commenced prior to receipt of formal notice of award by the department.

All work will be completed by July 1, 2012.

The following conditions, interim and final open to traffic and completion dates shall be
met:

1.     Contractor shall have 12 consecutive calendar days for lane closures on I-96 to
       perform ramp work.

2.     All work, except establishment for slope restoration, shall be completed by May
       23, 2012.

Failure to meet the requirements of the above Interim Completion Dates or Open to
Traffic Dates / Time Frames shall be cause for the assessment of liquidated damages in
accordance with the Special Provision for Liquidated Damages for Failure to Open
All to Traffic, contained within the contract.

Failure to meet the final completion date of this Progress Clause shall be cause for the
assessment of liquidated damages under section 108 of the 2003 Standard
Specifications for Construction.

No extensions of time will be allowed for increases in contract quantities or extra work
unless it can be shown that such increases or extras affect the critical item of work.

No extensions of time will be granted for labor disputes unless it can be shown that
such disputes are industry wide.

The successful bidder(s) for the work covered by this proposal will be required to meet
with the Howard City Transportation Service Center Delivery Engineer to work out a
detailed progress schedule. The schedule for this meeting will be set after the low
bidder is determined.

The low bidder(s) for the work covered by this proposal may be required to meet with
department representatives for a post-construction review meeting. The TSC Manager,
Delivery Engineer, or designated representative, will set the schedule for the meeting.

The named subcontractor(s) for Designated and/or Specialty Items, as shown in the
proposal, is recommended to be at the scheduled meeting if such items materially affect
the work schedule.
                                                                Control Section: 34043
                                                                  Job Number: 101616A

The successful bidder(s) for the work covered by this proposal will be required to submit
a tabulated detailed progress schedule, as well as a CPM network. Submission of the
CPM network shall be a maximum of fifteen (15) days after award of contract.

The Howard City Transportation Service Center Delivery Engineer will arrange the time
and place for the preconstruction meeting.

The Progress Schedule shall include, as a minimum, the controlling work items for the
completion of the project and the planned dates that these work items will be controlling
operations. When specified in the Bidding proposal, the date the project is to be
opened to traffic, as well as the final project completion date shall also be included in
the project schedule.

If the Bidding Proposal specified other controlling dates, these shall also be included in
the Progress Schedule.

Failure on the part of the Contractor to carry out the provisions of the Progress
Schedule, as established, may be considered sufficient cause to prevent bidding future
projects until a satisfactory rate of progress is again established.
                                MICHIGAN
                     DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
                            SPECIAL PROVISION
                                   FOR
                          MAINTAINING TRAFFIC,
                 PERMANENT SIGNING AND PAVEMENT MARKING

HCY:PRB                                    1 of 8             HCY:APPR:JAT:KM:04-14-2011
                                                              CS 34043, JN 101616A

  a. Description. This work shall consist of building replacement, parking expansion, and
     ramp work at the Saranac Rest Area, Berlin Township, Ionia County.

  b. General. Traffic shall be maintained according to the most current edition of the
     Standard Specifications for Construction, including any Supplemental Specifications,
     and as specified herein.

          1. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of 72 hours prior to the
             implementation of any detours, road, ramp or lane closures and major traffic
             shifts. The Contractor shall start work at the time agreed upon with the Engineer.
             Any delay in the start time may result in delaying the project, until another start
             date can be agreed upon with the Engineer. Any delay on a new start date may
             not be reason for an extension of time.

          2. The Contractor shall coordinate his operations with Contractors performing work
             on other projects within or adjacent to the Construction Influence Area (CIA) as
             described below.

          3. MDOT maintenance crews and/or Contract Maintenance Agencies may perform
             maintenance work within or adjacent to the Construction Influence Area (CIA).
             The Maintenance Division of MDOT and/or Contract Maintenance Agency will
             coordinate their operations with the Engineer to minimize the interference to the
             Contractor. No additional payment will be made to the Contractor for the joint
             use of the traffic control items.

  c. Construction Influence Area (CIA)- The CIA shall include the rights-of-way of the
     following roadways and ramps within the approximate limits described below:

          1. On eastbound I-96 from approximately 1 mile west of the Rest Area to 1 mile
             east of the Rest Area.

          2. In addition, the CIA shall include the right-of-way of the Rest Area ramps.

  d. Traffic Restrictions-

          1. No work shall be performed or lane closures allowed during the Memorial Day,
             July 4th, Labor Day, or holiday periods, as defined by the Engineer.

          2. A minimum of (1) lane of traffic on eastbound I-96 shall be maintained at all
             times. Westbound I-96 shall not be impacted.
HCY:PRB                                 2 of 8                              04-14-2011


          3. The outside lane of eastbound I-96 shall be closed once work on the freeway
             shoulder begins and shall remain closed until the shoulder is paved through top
             course. This lane shall be closed a maximum of twelve (12) consecutive
             calendar days.

          4. The Rest Area will be closed as described in the Progress Clause.

          5. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of erection
             or removal of overlays on existing signs.

          6. All work shall be conducted during day light hours only. Night work may be
             permitted, at the discretion of the Engineer. However, any additional cost for
             maintaining traffic shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

          7. When a lane or part of a lane is closed the speed limit shall be set at 60 miles per
             hour (45 mph Where Workers Present) and the R2-1’s shown on the attached
             typicals shall reflect this speed.

          8. Transverse and longitudinal tapers provided at grade changes caused by HMA
             cold milling and/or overlay shall conform to the most current edition of the Work
             Zone Safety and Mobility Manual specifically Subpart K, which is available on the
             Doing Business Support Area under Resources at the www.michigan.gov/mdot
             web site.

          9. No lane closures will be allowed where the Contractor can accomplish the work
             utilizing a shoulder closure. Lane closures will be allowed only in areas and
             situations deemed necessary by the Engineer.

          10. The location and duration of equipment and materials stored in the right of way,
              public or private property shall be as approved by the Engineer.

          11. Sign covers shall be placed over existing regulatory, warning and construction
              signs that are not applicable during construction.

          12. When utilizing a shoulder closure, the Contractor’s personnel and equipment
              shall not occupy any part of the active traffic lane. If this situation cannot be
              avoided, then a lane closure sequence shall be used.

          13. Changes or adjustments in the temporary signs and maintaining traffic typicals
              provided may be necessary to fit field conditions as determined by the Engineer.

  e. Traffic Control Devices-

          1. General
               A. All traffic control devices and their usage shall conform to the most
                   current edition of the Michigan Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices
                   (MMUTCD) specifically part 6, which is available on the Traffic and Safety
                   Support Area web site www.michigan.gov/tands
HCY:PRB                                3 of 8                              04-14-2011

                B. During non-working periods, any work site with uncompleted work shall
                   have advance signs (W20-1 – “Road Work Ahead”) and plastic drums, at
                   specific locations, as directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the
                   Department.

                C. The Contractor shall be required to drive through the Construction
                   Influence Area at a minimum at the beginning and end of each work day
                   to ensure all traffic control devices remain properly installed.

                D. All traffic control devices are to be kept in acceptable condition, as
                   defined by the American Traffic Safety Service Association (ATSSA).

          2. Temporary Signs

                A. Refer to the attached sheet M0020a for device spacing, taper/shift lengths,
                   and buffer zones.

                B. Signing for the beginning and ending of the work zone shall be as shown
                   on attached Figure M0070a.

                C. Signing for the supplemental speed limit signs shall be as shown on
                   attached Figure M0100a.

                D. Signing for shoulder closures shall be as shown on attached Figure
                   M0910a.

                E. Signing for a single lane closure shall be as shown on attached Figure
                   M1040a.

                F. Signing for closing the exit ramp shall be as shown on attached Typical.

               G. (1) “Closed” (SF-1) sign is included in the quantities to be placed over the
                  “1 Mile” wording on the Rest Area 1 Mile sign.

                H. (1) “58” (SF-2) sign is included in the quantities to be placed over the “34”
                   on the “rest area 1 mile, next area 34 miles” sign located on eastbound
                   I-96 near mile marker 24 (8th Avenue) in Ottawa County.

                 I. Ground driven sign supports for temporary signs shall be as shown on
                    attached Special Detail WZD-100-A.

                J. Temporary traffic control devices shall be as shown on attached Special
                   Detail WZD-125-E.

                K. All temporary signs shall be mounted at a 5 foot minimum bottom height
                   in uncurbed areas and 7 foot minimum bottom height in curbed or
                   pedestrian areas.

                L. All temporary signs shall be faced with fluorescent prismatic retro-
                   reflective sheeting.
HCY:PRB                                4 of 8                              04-14-2011

                M. All temporary signs that will be in place for more than (3) days shall be
                   mounted on driven posts, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

                N. Portable Changeable Message Signs (PCMS)

                       1. (1) PCMS shall be used during the life of this project. The PCMS
                          shall be used to inform traffic of upcoming work and changing
                          traffic control during the life of the project and as directed by the
                          Engineer. They shall be installed off the shoulder where possible
                          with the wheels blocked up, and operated a minimum of 14
                          calendar days prior to the start of work. Each PCMS shall be
                          delineated with (3) Plastic Drum, High Intensity, Lighted, Furn &
                          Oper. The drums shall be placed on the shoulder at an offset and
                          alignment as directed by the Engineer.

                       2. Moving the PCMS’s to multiple locations and displaying different
                          messages will be expected through the life of the project. All
                          messages and locations of the signs shall have the approval of
                          the Engineer prior to displaying the message. All PCMS shall
                          have the ability to change/update the message from a remote
                          location. PCMS shall be turned off and removed from the
                          roadway when not being used to display a message approved by
                          the Engineer. Turning the sign parallel to traffic is not acceptable.

                       3. Sample PCMS messages include, but are not limited to:
                          “Rest Area Closed” “Starting Tuesday Oct. 4”
                          “Rest Area Closed” “Next Area 24 Miles”
                          “Rest Area Opening” “Monday 5 PM”

                O. A miscellaneous quantity of 100 sq ft of Sign, Type B, Temp, Prismatic,
                   Furn & Oper is included in the quantities, to be fabricated and placed as
                   directed by the Engineer.

          3. Temporary Sign Overlays on Overhead Signs

                A. Temporary sign overlays (Sign Type B) shall be fabricated, installed and
                   removed as follows: Fabrication, installation, and removal of temporary
                   overlays to be placed over existing signs shall be the responsibility of the
                   Contractor and shall be included in the pay item for Sign Type “B”
                   Temporary, Special. Fastening devices such as nails, staples, screws or
                   adhesive materials shall not be applied in direct contact with the reflective
                   sheeting. The Contractor shall devise a method that holds the temporary
                   overlay in place but does not come into contact with the sheeting on the
                   face of the sign.

          4. Permanent Signs

                A. All permanent signing shall be fabricated and placed according to the
                   current editions of the Michigan Manual of uniform Traffic Control Devices
                   (MMUTCD), Standard Highway Signs manual and sign support typicals,
                   published by the Michigan Department of Transportation.
HCY:PRB                                5 of 8                             04-14-2011


                B. All permanent signs shall be mounted at a 7 foot bottom height unless
                   noted differently in the plans.

                C. All new permanent signs provided for this job shall be fabricated with
                   High-Intensity Reflective sheeting.

                D. Sign fabrication details as needed for permanent signs are also included.
                   Prior to fabricating non-standard permanent signs, the Contractor shall
                   provide shop drawings similar to the Standard Highway Signs Standards
                   and deliver the drawings to the Project Engineer for review and approval.
                   Construction and Technology Division certification of signs shall not be
                   construed to include MDOT approval of sign legend and layout.

                E. Prior to opening ramps or roadways to traffic, all applicable final signs
                   must be installed as shown on the final sign plans.

                F. Signs requiring relocation due to Contractor convenience, or damage,
                   shall be replaced by the Contractor at locations determined by the
                   Engineer at the Contractor’s expense.

          5. Channelizing Devices

                A. Channelizing devices required shall be Plastic Drum, High Intensity, Furn
                   & Oper. Maximum drum spacing (in tapers and tangent sections) when
                   closing a lane shall be 45 feet.

                B. Lights shall be placed on all Plastic Drums located in tapers.

                C. All paved shoulders, regardless of width, shall have Plastic Drum, High
                   Intensity, Furn & Oper spaced at 200 foot intervals until a continuous solid
                   6 inch line is placed.

                D. A miscellaneous quantity of 10 each of Plastic Drum, High Intensity, Furn
                   & Oper is included to be used at the discretion of the Engineer.

                E. Placement of type III barricades shall be as shown on the typicals and as
                   directed by the Engineer. Stripes on barricade rails shall be oriented as
                   prescribed in the most current version of the Michigan Manual on Uniform
                   Traffic Control Devices.

          6. Permanent Pavement Markings

                A. Permanent pavement markings shall consist of the following:

                       Pavt Mrkg, Waterborne, 6 inch, White – for edge lines
                       Pavt Mrkg, Waterborne, 6 inch, Yellow – for edge lines
                       Pavt Mrkg, Waterborne, 12 inch, White – for gore areas on ramps
                       Pavt Mrkg, Waterborne, for Rest Areas, Parks, and Lots, 4 inch, White
                          – for parking stalls
HCY:PRB                                   6 of 8                              04-14-2011

                  B. The 2nd application of waterborne pavement markings shall be installed as
                     described in Special Provision 03SP811(F).

                  C. The Contractor shall make an inventory of the existing pavement
                     markings and re-establish the permanent pavement markings as per the
                     Pavement Marking Standards or as directed by the Engineer. The
                     Contractor shall lay out proposed pavement marking locations, to be
                     verified by the Engineer, prior to final placement, as described in Special
                     Provision 03SP811(G).

  f.   Measurement and Payment-The estimate of quantities for maintaining traffic is based
       on signing and related traffic control devices for (1) shoulder closure, (1) single lane
       closure, (1) total closure, and the description in this Special Provision. Payment for these
       devices shall be in accordance with the most current edition of the Standard
       Specifications for Construction unless otherwise specified.

          1. Payment for temporary signs shall be made on the maximum square foot of
             dissimilar sign legends in use at any one time during the project.

          2. Any additional signing or maintaining traffic devices required to expedite the
             construction shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
 HCY:PRB                               7 of 8                      04-14-2011


                      ESTIMATE OF TEMPORARY SIGN QUANTITIES


                                                                  inch x
  SIGN                       MESSAGE                      QTY.     inch     Square Foot
  G20-1               ROAD WORK NEXT __ MILES              2     60    24       20
  R2-1a              WHERE WORKERS PRESENT 45              4     48    60       80
  R2-1                     SPEED LIMIT 60                  4     48    60       80
  R2-1                     SPEED LIMIT 70                  2     48    60       40
                 TO PROTECT HIGHWAY WORKERS FINES
  R5-18a                DOUBLED IN WORK ZONES              2     96    60       80
                   INJURE / KILL A WORKER $7500 & 15
 R5-18b                          YEARS                     2     48    60        40
 R5-18c                    WORK ZONE BEGINS                2     48    48        32
  W3-5b              REDUCED SPEED ZONE AHEAD              2     48    48       32
 W4-2 (R)                 Rt Channelizing Symbol           2     48    48        32
  W20-1                    ROAD WORK AHEAD                 2     48    48        32
W20-5 (R)              RIGHT LANE CLOSED AHEAD             2     48    48        32
W20-5 (R)              RIGHT LANE CLOSED 1 MILE            2     48    48        32
W20-5 (R)             RIGHT LANE CLOSED 2 MILES            2     48    48        32
W21-5a (R)              RIGHT SHOULDER CLOSED              1     48    48        16
W21-5b (R)          RIGHT SHOULDER CLOSED AHEAD            1     48    48        16
  MISC                     Engineer's Discretion           1                    100
                                                                  Total
             Sign, Type B, Temp, Prismatic, Furn/Oper             (Sft):        696



                                                                  inch x
   SIGN                        MESSAGE                    QTY.     inch     Square Foot
   SF-1                         CLOSED                     1     78    24       13
   SF-2                           58                       1     18    12       1.5
W20-3 (mod)               RAMP CLOSED AHEAD                1     48    48       16
R11-2 (mod)                  RAMP CLOSED                   1     48    30       10
                                                                  Total
      Sign, Type B, Temp, Prismatic, Special, Furn/Oper           (Sft):        41
HCY:PRB   8 of 8   04-14-2011
       SIGN PLACEMENT
      IS THE SAME FOR
      BOTH DIRECTIONS


                          END                                                                                           END

                   ROAD WORK                                                                                         ROAD WORK



                         G20-2                                                                                        G20-2




                                                                                                       2D
                                                                                                                                  PROJECT LIMITS




                                                                                               WORK ZONE

                                                                                                                                   PROJECT LIMITS




                                                                                                                                REMAINING SEQUENCE
                                                                                                                                         SIGNING PER
                                                                                                                               APPROPRIATE TYPICAL




           TO PROTECT                                                                                                         TO PROTECT
                                                                                                   D




         HIGHWAY WORKERS                                                                                               HIGHWAY WORKERS


         FINES DOUBLED IN                                                                                               FINES DOUBLED IN
           WORK ZONES                                                                                                     WORK ZONES


             R5-18a                                                                                                            R5-18a
                                                                                                   D




               INJURE /                                                                                                       INJURE /
                KILL A                                                                                                         KILL A
                WORKER                                                                                                         WORKER
               $7500 +                                                                                                         $7500 +
               15 YEARS                                                                                                       15 YEARS


              R5-18b                                                                                                      R5-18b
                                                                                                   D




               ROAD                                                                                                             ROAD
               WORK                                                                                                             WORK
              AHEAD                                                                                                            AHEAD
                                                SHOULDER




                                                                                    SHOULDER




              W20-1                                                                                                            W20-1




                                                                                                   TYPICAL ADVANCE SIGNING TREATMENT FOR

  SIGN = 136 ft2 - TYPE B                                                                               LONG, INTERMEDIATE AND SHORT TERM
                                                           Michigan Department of Transportation

FOR ONE DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC                                                                                STATIONARY WORK ZONE OPERATIONS
                                                              TRAFFIC AND SAFETY
W20-1 QUANTITY INCLUDED WITH                                                                       OF LESS THAN TWO MILES IN LENGTH WHERE
                                                           MAINTAINING TRAFFIC                     TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES MAY REMAIN AT
  APPROPRIATE TYPICAL FOR
                                                                       TYPICAL                      END OF WORK DAY ON A DIVIDED ROADWAY.
      SEQUENCE SIGNING
                                                           DRAWN BY:       CON:AE:djf               JUNE 2006                                          SHEET

                                                           CHECKED BY:         BMM                      PLAN DATE:
                                                                                                                                   M0070a              1 OF 2
                                 NOT TO SCALE              FILE:    PW RD/TS/Typicals/Signs/MT NON FWY/M0070a.dgn REV.                          08/15/2007
                                                  NOTES


30.   THE APPROPRIATE ADVANCE SIGNING SEQUENCE(S), (M0030a THROUGH M0080a) SHALL BE USED ON ALL PROJECTS.


32.   THESE SIGNS SHALL BE LEFT IN PLACE AT THEIR PRESCRIBED LOCATIONS FOR THE DURATION OF THE PROJECT AND
      UNTIL ALL TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL HAS BEEN REMOVED.


35.   THESE SIGNS ARE INTENDED TO BE USED WITHIN THE LIMITS OF THE TEMPORARY SEQUENCE SIGNING AS IS SHOWN ON
      1 0F 2. THESE SIGNS ARE NOT TO BE INTERMINGLED WITH ANY OTHER TEMPORARY SEQUENCE SIGNING EXCEPT AS
      SHOWN.




               SIGN SIZES

                                                                                         TYPICAL ADVANCE SIGNING TREATMENT FOR
       G20-2      -    48" x 24"
                                                                                           LONG, INTERMEDIATE AND SHORT TERM
       R5-18a     -    96" x 60"                 Michigan Department of Transportation

                                                                                            STATIONARY WORK ZONE OPERATIONS
       R5-18b     -    48" x 60"                    TRAFFIC AND SAFETY
                                                                                         OF LESS THAN TWO MILES IN LENGTH WHERE
       W20-1      -    48" x 48"                 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC                     TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES MAY REMAIN AT
                                                             TYPICAL                      END OF WORK DAY ON A DIVIDED ROADWAY.

                                                 DRAWN BY:       CON:AE:djf               JUNE 2006                            SHEET

                                                CHECKED BY:          BMM                   PLAN DATE:
                                                                                                            M0070a            2 OF 2
                           NOT TO SCALE          FILE:    PW RD/TS/Typicals/Signs/MT NON FWY/M0070a.dgn REV.          08/15/2007
     WHERE                                                                                      WHERE

    WORKERS                                                                                    WORKERS
                                                                                               PRESENT
                                                                                                                                         KEY
    PRESENT

                                                                                                                                         CHANNELIZING DEVICES
    45                                                                                         45




                            D




                                                               D
                    SPEED                                                                                                                TRAFFIC FLOW
 R2-1a                                                                        SPEED            R2-1a
                    LIMIT                                                     LIMIT                                                      REQUIRED AFTER ALL




                            D




                                                               D
                                                                                                                                         ENTRANCE RAMPS
                    XX                                                        XX
                    R2-1                                                      R2-1




                                                                   SHOULDER
                                   SHOULDER




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          SUCH THAT NO SET OF THESE SPEED LIMIT SIGNS ARE EVER
                                                                                                ENTRANCE




                                                                                                                                                                *SUPPLEMENTAL SET OF SPEED LIMIT SIGNS ARE REQUIRED
                                                                                                RAMP
       WHERE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                      WHEN ENTRANCE RAMPS ARE MORE THAN 2 MILES APART,
      WORKERS
      PRESENT


      45
                            D




*
                                                               D




      R2-1a         SPEED



                                                                                               SH
                                                                                                OU
                    LIMIT


                                                                                                    LD
                    XX
                                                                                                     ER
                            D




                                                               D




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 PLACED MORE THAN 2 MILES APART.
                *
                    R2-1


                                                                                                                         CROSSROAD
                             D




                                                               D




                                                                                                         WHERE
 WHERE              SPEED                                                     SPEED
                                                                                                     WORKERS
WORKERS
                    LIMIT                                                     LIMIT                  PRESENT
PRESENT



45                  XX                                                        XX                     45
                             D




                                                               D




                    R2-1                                                      R2-1                   R2-1a
R2-1a




                                                                                 ENTRANCE
                                                                                 RAMP
                                                                                 SH
                                                                                  O
                                                                                      U
                                                                                       L
                                                                                       D
                                                                                           E
                                                                                           R
                                    SHOULDER




                                                    SHOULDER




                                                                                                                               TYPICAL TEMPORARY TRAFFIC
                                                                                 Michigan Department of Transportation     CONTROL FOR SUPPLEMENTAL SPEED
                       CROSSROAD
                                                                                      TRAFFIC AND SAFETY                             LIMIT TREATMENT ON
                                                                                  MAINTAINING TRAFFIC                           LIMITED ACCESS ROADWAYS
                                                                                               TYPICAL                            WHERE WORKERS PRESENT
                                                                                 DRAWN BY:           CON:AE:djf           JUNE 2006                                                                                                                                      SHEET

                                                                                 CHECKED BY:              BMM               PLAN DATE:
                                                                                                                                                 M0100a                                                                          1                                                           OF 2
                                               NOT TO SCALE                      FILE:         PW RD/TS/Typicals/Signs/MT NON FWY/M0100a.dgn REV.         08/21/2007
                                                     NOTES


1N.   D = DISTANCE BETWEEN TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
              FOR "D" VALUES
      SEE M0020a



 2.   ALL NON-APPLICABLE SIGNING WITHIN THE CIA SHALL BE MODIFIED TO FIT CONDITIONS, COVERED OR REMOVED.


 3.   DISTANCES BETWEEN SIGNS, THE VALUES FOR WHICH ARE SHOWN IN TABLE D, ARE APPROXIMATE AND MAY NEED
      ADJUSTING AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER.



 7.   ALL TEMPORARY SIGNS, TYPE III BARRICADES, THEIR SUPPORT SYSTEMS AND LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS
      SHALL MEET NCHRP 350 CRASHWORTHLY REQUIREMENTS STIPULATED IN THE 2005 EDITION OF THE
      MICHIGAN MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES, THE CURRENT EDITION OF THE STANDARD
      SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION, THE STANDARD PLANS AND APPLICABLE SPECIAL PROVISIONS.
      ONLY DESIGNS AND MATERIALS APPROVED BY MDOT WILL BE ALLOWED.



 8.   WHEN BUFFER AREAS ARE ESTABLISHED, THERE SHALL BE NO EQUIPMENT OR MATERIALS STORED OR WORK
      CONDUCTED IN THE BUFFER AREA.




                                                                                             TYPICAL TEMPORARY TRAFFIC
                                                 Michigan Department of Transportation   CONTROL FOR SUPPLEMENTAL SPEED
                                                     TRAFFIC AND SAFETY                           LIMIT TREATMENT ON
                                                 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC                          LIMITED ACCESS ROADWAYS
                                                             TYPICAL                            WHERE WORKERS PRESENT
                                                 DRAWN BY:       CON:AE:djf              JUNE 2006                        SHEET

                                                CHECKED BY:          BMM                  PLAN DATE:
                                                                                                           M0100a        2   OF 2
                            NOT TO SCALE         FILE:     PW RD/TS/Typicals/Signs/MT NON FWY/M0100a.dgn REV.      08/21/2007
              END
                                                                                                                                  END
                                                                                                                                           PLACE THIS SIGN ALONG WITH THE
           ROAD WORK
                                                                                                                              ROAD WORK
                                                                                                                                           ADVANCE WORK ZONE SIGNING AS

 PLACE THIS SIGN ALONG WITH THE                                                                                                            DEPICTED ON THE APPROPRIATE
 ADVANCE WORK ZONE SIGNING AS                                                                                                              TYPICAL M0030a-M0080a.
                                                                                                                      SPEED
 DEPICTED ON THE APPROPRIATE
                                                                                                                      LIMIT
 TYPICAL M0030a-M0080a.


                                                                                                                       XX




                                                                                   D
                           SPEED
                           LIMIT                                                                                        R2-1
                                                                                                                                                         WHERE
                                                                                                                                           SPEED
                                                                                                                                                        WORKERS
                               XX                                                                                                         LIMIT         PRESENT

                               R2-1
                                                                                                                                           XX           45




                                                                                                 WORK AREA VARIES
                       WHERE                                                                                                                R2-1        R2-1a
   SPEED
                    WORKERS
                                                                                                                                        PLACE ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTAL
  LIMIT             PRESENT
                                                                                                                                        SETS OF SPEED LIMIT SIGNS

   XX               45                                                                                                                  THROUGHOUT THE WORK AREA AS

                                                                                                                                        DEPICTED ON TYPICAL M0100a.
    R2-1            R2-1a
PLACE ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTAL                                                                                                                   KEY
SETS OF SPEED LIMIT SIGNS

THROUGHOUT THE WORK AREA AS                                                                                                                     CHANNELIZING DEVICES
DEPICTED ON TYPICAL M0100a.
                                                                                                                                                LIGHTED ARROW PANEL




                                                                                        BUFFER
                                                                                                                                                (CAUTION MODE)




                                                                                   D
                           WHERE                                                                                     WHERE
                          WORKERS                                                                                   WORKERS
                                                                                                                                                TRAFFIC FLOW
                          PRESENT                                                                                   PRESENT

                                                                                                                                                LEGEND REFLECTS SPEED


                                                                                       BUFFER
                          45                                                       D
                                                                                                                    45
                                                                                                                                                LIMIT BEYOND WORK AREA
                         R2-1a                                                                                      R2-1a
                                                                                                                                                USE THE "NEXT         MILES"
                                                                             1/3




                                                                                                                                                SIGN WHEN SHOULDER CLOSURE
                                                                                   L




                                                                                                                                                EXCEEDS 1 MILE IN LENGTH


                                                                                                                       SPEED              SIGN = 260 ft2 - TYPE B
                                                                                   D




                          SPEED
                                                                                                                       LIMIT              PLUS ADDITIONAL SPEED LIMIT
                          LIMIT
                                                                                                                                          SIGNING THROUGHOUT WORK AREA
                          XX                                                                                            XX
                                                                                                                         R2-1
                                                                                   D




                           R2-1


                           WORK                                                                                          WORK

                           ZONE                                                                                          ZONE

                         BEGINS                                                                                        BEGINS
                                                                                   D




                         R5-18c                                                                                        R5-18c
      REDUCED                                                                                                                              REDUCED
     SPEED ZONE                                                                                                                          SPEED ZONE
       AHEAD                                                                                                                                AHEAD
                                                                                   D




      W3-5b                                                                                                                                W3-5b
                                                                                                                                                          RIGHT
                                                                                                                                                         SHOULDER
                                                                                                                                                          CLOSED
                                                                                                                                                                    W21-5a
                                                               SHOULDER
                                                    SHOULDER




                                                                                   D




                                                                                                                        RIGHT
                                                                                                                                                           NEXT
                                                                                                                       SHOULDER
                                                                                                                        CLOSED                            MILES
                                                                                                                         AHEAD
                                                                                                                                                         W20-1a
                                                                                   D




                           ROAD                                                                                        W21-5b               ROAD
                           WORK                                                                                                             WORK
                          AHEAD                                                                                                            AHEAD



                          W20-1                                                                                                            W20-1




                                                                                                                                 TYPICAL TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
                                                                Michigan Department of Transportation
                                    TTCO REQUIRED
                                                                                                                                        FOR A SHOULDER CLOSURE ON A
                                                                          TRAFFIC AND SAFETY
                                                                                                                                         FREEWAY, USING A REDUCED
                                                                  MAINTAINING TRAFFIC
                                                                                                                                 SPEED LIMIT WHERE WORKERS PRESENT
                                                                               TYPICAL

                                                               DRAWN BY:           CON:AE:djf                                     JUNE 2006                                  SHEET

                                                               CHECKED BY:             BMM                                         PLAN DATE:
                                                                                                                                                        M0910a               1 OF 2
                                         NOT TO SCALE          FILE:         PW RD/TS/Typicals/Signs/MT FWY/M0910a.dgn                                      REV.      8/9/07
                                                      NOTES
 1G.   D = DISTANCE BETWEEN TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
       AND LENGTH OF LONGITUDINAL BUFFERS
       1/3 L = MINIMUM LENGTH OF TAPER
               FOR "D" AND "L" VALUES
       SEE M0020a



  2.   ALL NON-APPLICABLE SIGNING WITHIN THE CIA SHALL BE MODIFIED TO FIT CONDITIONS, COVERED OR REMOVED.


  3.   DISTANCES BETWEEN SIGNS, THE VALUES FOR WHICH ARE SHOWN IN TABLE D, ARE APPROXIMATE AND MAY NEED
       ADJUSTING AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER.


 3A.   THE "WORK ZONE BEGINS" (R5-18c) SIGN SHALL BE USED ONLY IN THE INITIAL SIGNING SEQUENCE IN THE WORK
       ZONE. SUBSEQUENT SEQUENCES IN THE SAME WORK ZONE SHALL OMIT THIS SIGN AND THE QUANTITIES SHALL BE
       ADJUSTED APPROPRIATELY.


 4D.   THE SPACING OF CHANNELIZING DEVICES SHOULD NOT EXCEED 45 FEET WHEN USED FOR TAPER CHANNELIZATION,
       AND SHOULD NOT EXCEED 90 FEET WHEN USED FOR TANGENT CHANNELIZATION.


  5.   FOR OVERNIGHT CLOSURES, CHANNELIZING DEVICES SHALL BE LIGHTED PLASTIC DRUMS.


  6.   WHEN CALLED FOR IN THE FHWA ACCEPTANCE LETTER FOR THE SIGN SYSTEM SELECTED, THE TYPE A WARNING
       FLASHER, SHOWN ON THE WARNING SIGNS, SHALL BE POSITIONED ON THE SIDE OF THE SIGN NEAREST THE ROADWAY.


  7.   ALL TEMPORARY SIGNS, TYPE III BARRICADES, THEIR SUPPORT SYSTEMS AND LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS
       SHALL MEET NCHRP 350 CRASHWORTHLY REQUIREMENTS STIPULATED IN THE 2005 EDITION OF THE
       MICHIGAN MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES, THE CURRENT EDITION OF THE STANDARD
       SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION, THE STANDARD PLANS AND APPLICABLE SPECIAL PROVISIONS.
       ONLY DESIGNS AND MATERIALS APPROVED BY MDOT WILL BE ALLOWED.


  8.   WHEN BUFFER AREAS ARE ESTABLISHED, THERE SHALL BE NO EQUIPMENT OR MATERIALS STORED OR WORK
       CONDUCTED IN THE BUFFER AREA.


16B.   WHEN REDUCED SPEED LIMITS ARE UTILIZED IN THE WORK AREA, ADDITIONAL SPEED LIMIT SIGNS RETURNING
       TRAFFIC TO ITS NORMAL SPEED SHALL BE PLACED BEYOND THE LIMITS OF THE REDUCED SPEED AS INDICATED.


29C.   THE TYPE OF REFLECTIVE SHEETING USED FOR THE W20-1a PLAQUE AND THE "WHERE WORKERS PRESENT"

       PLAQUE SHALL BE THE SAME AS THE TYPE USED FOR THE PARENT SIGN.




                                                                                                           SIGN SIZES

                                                                                          DIAMOND WARNING            - 48" x 48"

                                                                                          W20-1a PLAQUE            - 48 "x 36"
                                                                                          R2-1 REGULATORY           - 48" x 60"
                                                                                          R5-18c REGULATORY          - 48" x 48"




                                                                                            TYPICAL TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
                                                  Michigan Department of Transportation

                                                                                               FOR A SHOULDER CLOSURE ON A
                                                      TRAFFIC AND SAFETY
                                                                                                  FREEWAY, USING A REDUCED
                                                  MAINTAINING TRAFFIC
                                                                                            SPEED LIMIT WHERE WORKERS PRESENT
                                                              TYPICAL

                                                  DRAWN BY:       CON:AE:djf                 JUNE 2006                             SHEET

                                                 CHECKED BY:          BMM                     PLAN DATE:
                                                                                                                M0910a             2 OF 2
                             NOT TO SCALE         FILE:    PW RD/TS/Typicals/Signs/MT FWY/M0910a.dgn               REV.   8/9/07
                                                                                                  PLACE THESE SIGNS ALONG WITH
                                                                                       END        THE ADVANCE WORK ZONE SIGNING
                                                                              ROAD WORK
                                                                                                  AS DEPICTED ON THE APPROPRIATE

                                                                                                  TYPICAL M0030a-M0080a.
                  SPEED
                  LIMIT                                                                 SPEED
                                                                                        LIMIT
                   XX
                                                                                        XX




                                                           D
                   R2-1
                                                                                          R2-1
                     WHERE
       SPEED
                    WORKERS                                                                                                   WHERE     PLACE ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTAL
       LIMIT                                                                                               SPEED




                                                           WORK AREA VARIES
                    PRESENT                                                                                                  WORKERS
                                                                                                                                        SETS OF SPEED LIMIT SIGNS
                                                                                                           LIMIT             PRESENT
       XX           45                                                                                                                  THROUGHOUT THE WORK AREA AS


        R2-1        R2-1a
                                                                                                           XX                45         DEPICTED ON TYPICAL M0100a.


PLACE ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTAL                                                                                  R2-1          R2-1a
SETS OF SPEED LIMIT SIGNS
                                                                                                                                           KEY
THROUGHOUT THE WORK AREA AS

DEPICTED ON TYPICAL M0100a.                                                                                                                CHANNELIZING DEVICES




                                                                              BUFFER
                                                                                                                                           LIGHTED ARROW PANEL




                                                           D
                   SPEED                                                                             SPEED
                                                                                                                                           TRAFFIC FLOW
                   LIMIT                                                                             LIMIT
                                                                                                                                           LEGEND REFLECTS SPEED




                                                                              BUFFER
                    XX                                                                                  XX                                 LIMIT BEYOND WORK AREA




                                                           D
                    R2-1                                                                                R2-1

                                                                                                                                        SIGN = 344 ft2 - TYPE B
                                                           L                                                                            PLUS ADDITIONAL SPEED
                                                                                                                                        LIMIT SIGNING THROUGHOUT
                                                                                                                                        WORK AREA
                                                           D




    SPEED                                                                                                                  SPEED
    LIMIT                                                                                                                  LIMIT

     XX                                                                                                                    XX
                                                           D




      R2-1          WORK                                                                                WORK               R2-1
                    ZONE                                                                                ZONE
                   BEGINS                                                                           BEGINS
                                                           D




                   R5-18c                                                                            R5-18c
                                                           D




      W4-2         REDUCED                                                                                      REDUCED                  W4-2
                                                                                        5300 ft




                  SPEED ZONE                                                                                   SPEED ZONE
                    AHEAD                                                                                        AHEAD
                                                           D




                   W3-5b
                                                                                                                 W3-5b
   RIGHT LANE                                                                                                                          RIGHT LANE
     CLOSED                                                                                                                              CLOSED
      AHEAD                                                                                                                              AHEAD




     W20-5                                                                                                                              W20-5




                  RIGHT LANE                                                                                    RIGHT LANE
                    CLOSED                                                                                        CLOSED
                    1 MILE                                                                                        1 MILE




                   W20-5                                                                                         W20-5
                                                           5300 ft




                 (MODIFIED)                                                                                (MODIFIED)




    RIGHT LANE                                                                                                                         RIGHT LANE
      CLOSED                                                                                                                             CLOSED
     2 MILES                                                                                                      ROAD                  2 MILES

                                                                                                                  WORK
                                                           D




   W20-5                                                                                                         AHEAD                 W20-5
                    ROAD
(MODIFIED)                                                                                              W20-1                      (MODIFIED)
                    WORK
                    AHEAD
                                 SHOULDER




                                            SHOULDER




                                                                                                                  TYPICAL EXTENDED TEMPORARY TRAFFIC
                                                       Michigan Department of Transportation
                   W20-1
                                                                                                                 CONTROL FOR A ONE-LANE CLOSURE ON A
                                                          TRAFFIC AND SAFETY

                                                                                                                 FREEWAY USING A REDUCED SPEED LIMIT
                                                       MAINTAINING TRAFFIC
                                                                                                                               WHERE WORKERS PRESENT
                                                                                       TYPICAL

                                                       DRAWN BY:                             CON:AE:djf             JUNE 2006                                     SHEET

                                                       CHECKED BY:                                BMM                 PLAN DATE:
                                                                                                                                                    M1040a        1 OF 2
                                NOT TO SCALE           FILE:                     PW RD/TS/Typicals/Signs/MT FWY/M1040a.dgn                           REV.   08/13/2007
                                                      NOTES

 1I.   D = DISTANCE BETWEEN TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
       AND LENGTH OF LONGITUDINAL BUFFERS
       L = MINIMUM LENGTH OF TAPER
               FOR "D" AND "L" VALUES
       SEE M0020a

  2.   ALL NON-APPLICABLE SIGNING WITHIN THE CIA SHALL BE MODIFIED TO FIT CONDITIONS, COVERED OR REMOVED.


  3.   DISTANCES BETWEEN SIGNS, THE VALUES FOR WHICH ARE SHOWN IN TABLE D, ARE APPROXIMATE AND MAY NEED
       ADJUSTING AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER.


 3A.   THE "WORK ZONE BEGINS" (R5-18c) SIGN SHALL BE USED ONLY IN THE INITIAL SIGNING SEQUENCE IN THE WORK
       ZONE. SUBSEQUENT SEQUENCES IN THE SAME WORK ZONE SHALL OMIT THIS SIGN AND THE QUANTITIES SHALL BE
       ADJUSTED APPROPRIATELY.


 4D.   THE SPACING OF CHANNELIZING DEVICES SHOULD NOT EXCEED 45 FEET WHEN USED FOR TAPER CHANNELIZATION,
       AND SHOULD NOT EXCEED 90 FEET WHEN USED FOR TANGENT CHANNELIZATION.


  5.   FOR OVERNIGHT CLOSURES, CHANNELIZING DEVICES SHALL BE LIGHTED PLASTIC DRUMS.


 6.    WHEN CALLED FOR IN THE FHWA ACCEPTANCE LETTER FOR THE SIGN SYSTEM SELECTED, THE TYPE A WARNING
       FLASHER, SHOWN ON THE WARNING SIGNS, SHALL BE POSITIONED ON THE SIDE OF THE SIGN NEAREST THE ROADWAY.


  7.   ALL TEMPORARY SIGNS, TYPE III BARRICADES, THEIR SUPPORT SYSTEMS AND LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS
       SHALL MEET NCHRP 350 CRASHWORTHLY REQUIREMENTS STIPULATED IN THE 2005 EDITION OF THE
       MICHIGAN MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES, THE CURRENT EDITION OF THE STANDARD
       SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION, THE STANDARD PLANS AND APPLICABLE SPECIAL PROVISIONS.
       ONLY DESIGNS AND MATERIALS APPROVED BY MDOT WILL BE ALLOWED.



  8.   WHEN BUFFER AREAS ARE ESTABLISHED, THERE SHALL BE NO EQUIPMENT OR MATERIALS STORED OR WORK
       CONDUCTED IN THE BUFFER AREA.


16B.   WHEN REDUCED SPEED LIMITS ARE UTILIZED IN THE WORK AREA, ADDITIONAL SPEED LIMIT SIGNS RETURNING
       TRAFFIC TO ITS NORMAL SPEED SHALL BE PLACED BEYOND THE LIMITS OF THE REDUCED SPEED AS INDICATED.


 21.   ALL EXISTING PAVEMENT MARKINGS WHICH ARE IN CONFLICT WITH EITHER PROPOSED CHANGES IN TRAFFIC PATTERNS
       OR PROPOSED TEMPORARY TRAFFIC MARKINGS, SHALL BE REMOVED BEFORE ANY CHANGE IS MADE IN THE TRAFFIC
       PATTERN. EXCEPTION WILL BE MADE FOR DAYTIME-ONLY TRAFFIC PATTERNS THAT ARE ADEQUATELY DELINEATED BY
       OTHER TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES.


 26.   THE LIGHTED ARROW PANEL SHALL BE LOCATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE TAPER AS SHOWN. WHEN PHYSICAL
       LIMITATIONS RESTRICT ITS PLACEMENT AS INDICATED, THEN IT SHALL BE PLACED AS CLOSE TO THE BEGINNING
       OF THE TAPER AS POSSIBLE.




                  SIGN SIZES

 DIAMOND WARNING                   - 48 " x 48 "
 RECTANGULAR REGULATORY - 48 " x 60 "
 R5-18c REGULATORY             - 48 " x 48 "
                                                                                           TYPICAL EXTENDED TEMPORARY TRAFFIC
                                                   Michigan Department of Transportation


                                                                                           CONTROL FOR A ONE-LANE CLOSURE ON A
                                                      TRAFFIC AND SAFETY

                                                                                           FREEWAY USING A REDUCED SPEED LIMIT
                                                   MAINTAINING TRAFFIC
                                                                                                   WHERE WORKERS PRESENT
                                                               TYPICAL

                                                   DRAWN BY:       CON:AE:djf               JUNE 2006                        SHEET

                                                   CHECKED BY:         BMM                   PLAN DATE:
                                                                                                              M1040a         2 OF 2
                             NOT TO SCALE          FILE:    PW RD/TS/Typicals/Signs/MT FWY/M1040a.dgn           REV.   08/13/2007
                                                    SIGN MATERIAL SELECTION TABLE



                                                                                               SIGN MATERIAL TYPE


                           SIGN SIZE                       TYPE I                              TYPE II                         TYPE III


                    _ 36" X 36"
                    <
                                                                                                   X                                X


      36" X 36" _ 96" TO WIDE
      >          <                                                                                 X


       >
        96" WIDE TO 144" WIDE                                   X                                  X


                     >    144" WIDE                             X



                    TYPE I                  ALUMINUM EXTRUSION




                    ROUNDING OF CORNERS IS NOT REQUIRED FOR TYPE I OR II SIGNS.
                    VERTICAL JOINTS ARE NOT PERMITTED.

                    HORIZONTIAL JOINTS THROUGH SIGN LEGEND OR SYMBOLS ARE NOT PERMITTED.


                                                     POST SIZE REQUIREMENTS TABLE


                                                                                               POST TYPE


                           SIGN AREA
                                        2            U-CHANNEL STEEL                SQUARE TUBULAR STEEL                          WOOD
                                 (ft )

                                                                       *                                      *
                                    _
                                    <
                                     9                   1 - 3 lb/ft                   1 - 2" 12 or 14 GA                          N/A

                                <                                                                                                            *
                              9 _ 20                    2 - 3 lb/ft                    2 - 2" 12 or 14 GA                      1 - 4" X 6"

                                 <
                          >
                              20 _ 30                       N/A                                   N/A                      2 - 4" X 6"

                                 <
                          >
                              30 _ 60                       N/A                                   N/A                      2 - 6" X 8"

                                 <
                          >
                              60 _ 84                       N/A                                   N/A                      3 - 6" X 8"




                                                            *
                                                                SIGNS 4 FEET AND GREATER IN WIDTH REQUIRE 2 POSTS.

                                                                SIGNS GREATER THAN 8 FEET IN WIDTH REQUIRE 2 OR 3 WOOD
                                                                POSTS DEPENDING ON AREA OF SIGN.

                                                                A MAXIMUM OF 2 POSTS WITHIN A 7’ PATH IS PERMITTED.




                                                                       File: PW/Doc/RD/T&S/Typ/Dev/Sign MainTraf D/WZD-100-A    Rev. 8/21/06 ECH
 NOT TO SCALE


                                                                                                   MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
                                                                                                   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN FOR


                                                 ENGINEER OF DELIVERY
Michigan Department of Transportation
                                                                                                       GROUND DRIVEN SIGN
           PREPARED BY
  TRAFFIC AND SAFETY                                                                           SUPPORTS FOR TEMP SIGNS
           SUPPORT AREA                         ENGINEER OF DEVELOPMENT


 DRAWN BY: CON/ECH                                     PENDING                                  8/2006                                             SHEET
                                                                                                                  WZD-100-A                         11
                                                                                                                                                 1 of
CHECKED BY: AUG                                   FHWA APPROVAL DATE                           PLAN DATE

NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
                                                              2 POST SIGN SUPPORT SPACING
                                                                                                     L




                                                                                                   SIGN




                                                                                 1/6L               2/3L    1/6L

                                                                                  + 1"              + 1"    + 1"
                                                                                  -                 -       -




    3 POST SIGN SUPPORT SPACING
                                                 L




                                              SIGN




                           1/6L       1/3L           1/3L        1/6L

                           + 1"        + 1"           + 1"       + 1"
                           -           -              -          -


                                                                          *   FOR ALL 11’ AND 12’ LONG SIGNS ON 3 WOOD SUPPORTS,

                                                                              SPREAD POSTS SO AS TO HAVE A 8’ MIN. TO 9’ MAX.

                                                                              DISTANCE BETWEEN OUTSIDE POSTS.




 NOT TO SCALE

 MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION                            PENDING
   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN                  FHWA APPROVAL DATE               8/2006                       SHEET
                                                                                                           WZD-100-A           11
                                                                                                                            2 of
File: PW/Doc/RD/T&S/Typ/Dev/Sign MainTraf D/WZD-100-A           Rev.   8/21/06 ECH             PLAN DATE
NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
                                             ROAD
                                                                                                                              DETOUR
                                             WORK
                                                                                                                                  AHEAD
                                            AHEAD




                                                                                                                        35
                                                                                                                         M.P.H.


                      6’-12’
                                                                                                       6’-12’
                                                              5’ MIN.



                                                                                                                6’                 4’MIN.




                                                                                                                 PAVED SHOULDER



                                 RURAL                                                                     RURAL WITH ADVISORY
                                                                                                                     SPEED PLATE




                                ROAD
                                                                                                                RIGHT LANE
                               CLOSED
                 2’                                                                               2’
                                                                                                                 CLOSED
                               AHEAD
                                                                                                                     AHEAD

                                                          4" MAX.                                                                           4" MAX.




                      7’MIN.                                                                           7’ MIN.




                                   URBAN                     WALKWAY                                                  URBAN                   WALKWAY




                       (CURBED AREAS OR WHERE                                                           (CURBED AREAS OR WHERE

                        WALKWAYS ARE PRESENT)                                                            WALKWAYS ARE PRESENT)



                                              BOTTOM HEIGHT AND OFFSET




 NOT TO SCALE

 MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION                            PENDING
   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN                  FHWA APPROVAL DATE               8/2006                                                 SHEET
                                                                                                                 WZD-100-A                               11
                                                                                                                                                      3 of
File: PW/Doc/RD/T&S/Typ/Dev/Sign MainTraf D/WZD-100-A           Rev.   8/21/06 ECH             PLAN DATE
NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
                                                                                                      1"


                                                                                                           POST LENGTH VARIES
                                                                                        &" DIA. HOL
                                                                           42" MIN.




                                                      CL
                                                              1" MIN.

                                                              1    "                                                                            X



                                                                                                                                 TRAFFIC FLOW
                                              X                        X
                                 1 &"
                                        2 "




                                                    3" MIN.
                                                                                                                                                X




                                                   3 3/4" MAX.



                                WEIGHT = 3 lbs/ft

                              SECT. MOD. X.-X. = 0.31 CUBIC INCHES MIN.




                                                  3 lb. U - CHANNEL STEEL POST

                                                                                (NO SPLICE)

                                                                  MOUNT SIGN ON OPEN FACE OF
                                                                  U - CHANNEL STEEL POST




 NOT TO SCALE

 MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION                                     PENDING
   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN                      FHWA APPROVAL DATE                                            8/2006                  SHEET
                                                                                                                                            WZD-100-A      11
                                                                                                                                                        4 of
File: PW/Doc/RD/T&S/Typ/Dev/Sign MainTraf D/WZD-100-A                  Rev.           8/21/06 ECH                               PLAN DATE
NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
                                                                         1"
                                                                                      5/16" BOLTS
                                                                                      2 REQUIRED




                                                                1"- 2"
                                                                         A     A




                                                                                                    UPPER POST
                                                 18" MIN. LAP




           TRAFFIC FLOW                                                  1"
                                                                                      5/16" BOLTS
                                                                                      2 REQUIRED
                                                                1"- 2"




                                                                                                                                                                              1"
                            DRIVEN POST STUB




                                                                                                                                                                                       5/16" BOLTS
                                                                                                                                                                                       2 REQUIRED




                                                                                                                                                                     1"- 2"
                                                                                                                                    18" MIN. TO 20"
                                                                                                                                                                              A    A




                                                                                                                                                                                                     UPPER POST
                                                                                                                                                      18" MIN. LAP
                                                 24" MIN.




                                                                                                                 DRIVEN POST STUB




                                                                                                                                                                     1"- 2"


                                                                                                                                                                              1"
                                                                                                                                                                                       5/16" BOLTS
                                                                                                                                                                                       2 REQUIRED




                                                                                                                                                                     0"- 2"
                                                 42" MIN.




                                                                                                                                    42" MIN.




                                               UPPER SPLICE                                                                                           LOWER SPLICE




                                                                         3 lb. U - CHANNEL STEEL POST

                                                                                 (WITH SPLICE)

                                                                              MOUNT SIGN ON OPEN FACE OF
                                                                              UPPER U - CHANNEL STEEL POST




 NOT TO SCALE

 MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION                                           PENDING
   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN                                  FHWA APPROVAL DATE                                        8/2006                                                                    SHEET
                                                                                                                                                                              WZD-100-A                              11
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  5 of
File: PW/Doc/RD/T&S/Typ/Dev/Sign MainTraf D/WZD-100-A                          Rev.   8/21/06 ECH                                    PLAN DATE
NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
                                            DRIVEN POST
                                                                               UPPER POST
                                                                                                7/16" SPACER
                                                                                                REQUIRED FOR ALL BOLTS
                                                                                                O.D. 3/4" MIN., I.D. 3/8" MAX.
                               TRAFFIC FLOW
                                                                                           5/16" BOLT




                                                                                                                SPACER DETAIL
                                                            SECTION A-A

                                                                                                  SPACER THICKNESS
                                                                                                        7/16"
                                                                                                                     3/4" O.D.




                                                                                                                     3/8" I.D.


                  NOTES:



                  1. THE SPACER THICKNESS SHALL BE 1/16" LESS THAN THE GAP BETWEEN THE POST

                    WHEN POSITIONED IN THE UNBOLTED CONFIGURATION.




                  2. THE EXTERIOR BOLT (CLOSEST TO LAP), SPACER, WASHER, AND NUT SHALL BE

                    INSTALLED IN A PREPUNCHED HOLE 1" to 2" FROM THE END OF THE LAP.




                  3. THE INTERIOR BOLT (FARTHEST FROM LAP), SPACER, WASHER, AND NUT SHALL BE

                    INSTALLED IN THE NEXT PREPUNCHED HOLE.



                  4. THE DRIVEN POST SHALL ALWAYS BE MOUNTED IN FRONT OF THE UPPER POST

                    WITH RESPECT TO THE ADJACENT ONCOMING TRAFFIC, REGARDLESS OF THE

                    DIRECTION THE SIGN IS FACING.




                  5. THE SPLICE LAP SHALL BE FASTENED BY FOUR-5/16" DIA. GALVANIZED A449 BOLTS

                    (SAE J429 GRADE 5) OR GALVANIZED A325 BOLTS.




                                      3 lb. U - CHANNEL STEEL POST

                                                         (WITH SPLICE)




 NOT TO SCALE

 MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION                            PENDING
   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN                  FHWA APPROVAL DATE               8/2006                            SHEET
                                                                                                                WZD-100-A           11
                                                                                                                                 6 of
File: PW/Doc/RD/T&S/Typ/Dev/Sign MainTraf D/WZD-100-A           Rev.   8/21/06 ECH             PLAN DATE
NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
                                  5/16" DIAMETER GALVANIZED BOLT
                                                                                       SELF-ALIGNING STEEL
                                  AND NUT
                                                                                       REINFORCING PLATE
                                                                                       (TYP. ALUMINUM SHEET [TYPE III] SIGN ONLY)




                                                                                        3# POST




                                                                                                  PLYWOOD (TYPE II) OR ALUMINUM SHEET (III) SIGN


                                                                      FLAT WASHER




                                                                   SIGN TO 3 lb. POST CONNECTION




                                        A

                                             3 1/2"

                                    1 3/4"            1 3/4"
                                                                                                    NOTES: (FOR STEEL SIGN REINF’ PLATE)
                                                                               .44"




                                                                                                    1. MATERIAL: 12 GAUGE CARBON STEEL.
                                                                               .62"
                 2 1/4"




                                                                                                    2. TOLERANCE ON ALL DIMENSIONS 0.0625"
                                                                                                                                 +
                          0
                                                        7/16" DRILL                                                                    -
                           .1
                              9
                                "
                                                                                .62"




                                    R                                                               3. FINISH-AFTER STAMPING AND PUNCHING,
                                                                                                      GALVANIZE ACCORDING TO CURRENT
                                                                                .44"




                                                                                                      SPECIFICATIONS FOR ZINC (HOT
                                                                                                      GALVANIZE) COATINGS ON PRODUCTS
                          VARIES             VARIES       VARIES
                                                                                                        FABRICATED FROM PLATES OR STRIPS
                                    EQUAL TO POST THROAT
                                                                             SECTION A-A
                                        OPENING DIMENSION

                                                  FRONT
                                        A


                                                               STEEL SIGN REINFORCING PLATE

                                                            REQUIRED FOR TYPE III SIGNS ONLY




                                        3 lb. U - CHANNEL STEEL POST SIGN CONNECTION




 NOT TO SCALE

 MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION                                 PENDING
   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN                        FHWA APPROVAL DATE            8/2006                                      SHEET
                                                                                                                 WZD-100-A                      11
                                                                                                                                             7 of
File: PW/Doc/RD/T&S/Typ/Dev/Sign MainTraf D/WZD-100-A                 Rev.   8/21/06 ECH          PLAN DATE
NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
 NOT TO SCALE
                   (4" X 6" (NOMINAL) POST) 1 1/2" DIA. 2 HOLES

                   (6" X 8" (NOMINAL) POST) 3 1/2" DIA. 2 HOLES




                                    THE POST MAY BE DRIVEN OR PLACED IN AN
                                    AUGERED HOLE. IF AUGERED, BACKFILL WITH

                                    EXISTING MATERIAL IN FIVE EQUAL

                                    LAYERS, TAMPING EACH LAYER.




 MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
                                       TRAFFIC FLOW




   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN
                                                   SIGN PANEL




File: PW/Doc/RD/T&S/Typ/Dev/Sign MainTraf D/WZD-100-A
                                                                   TRAFFIC FLOW




                                                              WOOD POST BREAKAWAY HOLES/
                                                                DIRECT EMBEDMENT DETAILS




                                                                Rev.
                                                                       6"




                                                                  PENDING

                                                              FHWA APPROVAL DATE

                                                                       8/21/06 ECH
                                                                                  (FOR4"X6NMIALPST)1
                                                                                  1/4" SAW CUT (EXCEPT IN




                                                                                  (FOR 6" X 8" NOMINAL POST) 1 1/2"




                                                                            SAW CUT DETAIL
                                                         (MULTIPLE POST INSTALLATIONS)




                                                                    WOOD POST DETAILS




NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
                                                                                                             SINGLE POST ASSEMBLIES)




                                                                                                            5 1/2 " OR 7 1/2" ACTUAL
                                                                                                                                            5" OR 7




                                                                                                                                            4"

                                                                                                                                                 14"
                                                                                                                                            8" DIA. AUGERED HOLE FOR 4" X 6" POST

                                                                                                                                           10" DIA. AUGERED HOLE FOR 6" X 8" POST




                                                                                                                                            WOOD POST SHALL BE IN CONFORMANCE TO

                                                                                                                                            SECTION 912 OF THE CURRENT EDITION OF
                                                                                                                                            THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR

                                                                                                                                            CONSTRUCTION.




                                                                                                                                       8/2006

                                                                                                                                       PLAN DATE
                                                                                                                                                             18"
                                                                                                                                                            42" MIN.




                                                                                                                                                       WZD-100-A
                                                                                                                                                                       DRILLED BREAKAWAY
                                                                                                                                                                       HOLES ARE TO BE

                                                                                                                                                                       CENTERED ON POSTS.




                                                                                                                                                                                            SHEET

                                                                                                                                                                                               11
                                                                                                                                                                                            8 of
                                                           3/8" DIA. GALVANIZED

                                                           HEX. HD. BOLT                                       GALVANIZED

                                                                                                               NYLON INSERT LOCKNUT


                                                         GALVANIZED
                                                                                                              GALVANIZED
                                                         FLAT WASHER
                                                                                                              FLAT WASHER




                                                                                                                                                                                             PLYWOOD (TYPE II) OR

                                                                                                             EXCLUDE SAW CUT ON SINGLE                                                       ALUMINUM SHEET (TYPE III)
                                                      SAME AS BOLT ABOVE
                                                                                                             POST ASSEMBLIES                                                                 SIGNS




                                                                                             TYPE II AND TYPE III SIGNS




                                                                  4" X 6" (NOMINAL) OR 6" X 8" (NOMINAL) WOOD POST

                                                                                   3/8" DIA. GALVANIZED BOLT,
                                                                                   2 GALVANIZED FLAT                                                                       ALUMINUM L 4" X 3" X 3/8" ANGLES MAY

                                                                                   WASHERS & GALVANIZED                                                                    BE INSTALLED ON EITHER SIDE OF EACH POST.
                                                                       2" (TYP.)




                                                                                   NYLON INSERT LOCKNUT (TYP.).                                                            1/6 SIGN LENGTH
                                                                                                                                                                  12"
                                                                                       STIFFENER ANGLE                                                            (TYP.)      (TYP.)
                                                      1 1/2"                           (TYP.)




                                                                                                                                                                                                        ALUMINUM EXTRUSION
                                                                                                                                                                                                        (TYPE I) SIGN

                            C OF POST
                            L

                                                                                                                       TOP VIEW

                                                                                                                     TYPE I SIGN                                                              GALVANIZED 3/8" DIA.
                                                                                                                                                                                              RECTANGULAR FLAT BOLTS,

                                                                                                                                                                                              GALVANIZED FLAT WASHERS

                                                                                                                                                                                              & GALVANIZED
                                                                                                                                                                                              NYLON INSERT LOCKNUTS.

                                                                                                                                                                                              BOLT STIFFENER ANGLE TO
                                                                                                                    C OF HOLES FOR 3/8" DIA.
                                                                                                                    L                                                                         EACH PANEL.
                                                                                                                    GALVANIZED BOLTS.
                                                                                                                                                                                              1/2" X 3/4" ELONGATED BOLT
      3/8" DIA. GALVANIZED BOLTS
                                                                                                                                                                                              HOLES MAY BE USED TO FACILITATE
      ON APPROX. 24" CENTERS FULL
      LENGTH ALL EXTRUSIONS.                                                                                                                                                                  ALIGNMENT OF ALUMINUM ANGLES.
                                                                                                                                  12" MAX.
                                                                                                                        6" MIN.
            O.015" (TYP.)

                            SEE NOTE 5
                                         ON SHEET 5




                                                                                         2"                                                                                                           ALUMINUM EXTRUSION
                                                                                         TYP.                                                                                                         PER MDOT STANDARD
                                                                                                                                             TYPICAL                                                  SPECIFICATIONS
                                                                                                                                             HOLE                                                     FOR CONSTRUCTION
                                                                                                                                             SPACING
                                                                                                                                                                                    1 1/2"
                                                                                                                                  MAX.




                                                                                                                                                                                                     STIFFENER ANGLE-
                                                                                                                        30"




                                                                                                                                                                                    (TYP.)
                                                                                                                                                                                                     L 2" X 2" X 1/4"
                                                                                             PANEL

                                                                                                     WIDTH




                                                                                                                                                                                                     (ALUM.) x SIGN HEIGHT
                                                         1/2"
                                                                                                                                  MAX.
                                                                                                                        30"




          0.040" EXTERIOR

          CORNER RADIUS (TYP.)

             1/2" X 3/4" ELONGATED
             BOLT HOLES MAY BE

              USED TO FACILITATE
                                                                                             6"




                                                                                                                                                       12" MAX.
                                                                                                                                             6" MIN.




              ALIGNMENT OF PANELS.


                                                                                   SAW CUT

                                                                                                        END VIEW                                                            REAR VIEW


                                                                                             TYPE I SIGN - ERECTION DETAILS


                                                                                                             WOOD POST CONNECTIONS




 NOT TO SCALE

 MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION                                                                                PENDING
   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN                                                                     FHWA APPROVAL DATE                                            8/2006                                           SHEET
                                                                                                                                                                                                 WZD-100-A                         11
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                9 of
File: PW/Doc/RD/T&S/Typ/Dev/Sign MainTraf D/WZD-100-A                                                               Rev.          8/21/06 ECH                                  PLAN DATE
NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
                                                                                                                                                                                SIGN POST




                                                                                                       1"
                                                                                                                                                                        TUBE SIZE = 2" x 2"
                                                                                                                                                                        WALL THICKNESS =12 OR 14 GA




                                                                                                                     ON TWO OPPOSITE OR ALL FOUR SIDES
                                                      POST LENGTH VARIES




                                                                                                     9" DIA. HOLES
                                                                           2" MAX.




           INSERT CONNECTION HARDWARE

                (PER MANUFACTURER’S
                                                                                                                                                                                 GRADE
                   SPECIFICATIONS)
                                                                                          MIN.
                                                                                     8"




                   ANCHOR SLEEVE
                                                                                                                                                         44" MIN.




             TUBE SIZE
             WALL THICKNESS = 12 GA
             HOLES OPTIONAL EXCEPT FOR
             ANCHOR/POST CONNECTION AND
             SIGN CONNECTION LOCATIONS.




                                    SQUARE TUBULAR STEEL POST




 NOT TO SCALE

 MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION                                                           PENDING
   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN                                         FHWA APPROVAL DATE                                                             8/2006                             SHEET
                                                                                                                                                                                    WZD-100-A         10 of 11
File: PW/Doc/RD/T&S/Typ/Dev/Sign MainTraf D/WZD-100-A                                     Rev.    8/21/06 ECH                                                       PLAN DATE
NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
       GENERAL NOTES:


      1. A MAXIMUM OF TWO POSTS WITHIN A 7 FOOT PATH IS PERMITTED.


      2. ALL SIGN POSTS SHALL COMPLY WITH NCHRP 350.


      3. ALL POSTS SHALL BE EMBEDDED A MINIMUM OF 42".


      4. BRACING OF POST IS NOT PERMITTED.


      5. SIGN SHALL BE LEVEL, AND UPRIGHT FOR THE DURATION OF INSTALLATION.



      6. ERECT POSTS SO THE SIGN FACE AND SUPPORTS DO NOT VARY FROM PLUMB

         BY MORE THAN 3/16" IN 3’.                              PROVIDE A CENTER-TO-CENTER DISTANCE

         BETWEEN POSTS WITHIN 2 PERCENT OF PLAN DISTANCE.


      7. NO MORE THAN ONE SPLICE PER POST, AS SHOWN, WILL BE PERMITTED.


      8. POST TYPES SHALL NOT BE MIXED WITHIN A SIGN SUPPORT INSTALLATION.



      9. NO VERTICAL JOINTS ARE PERMITTED IN SIGN. NO HORIZONTIAL JOINTS

         THROUGH SIGN LEGEND OR SYMBOLS ARE PERMITTED IN SIGN

    10. REMOVE SIGN POSTS AND/OR POST STUBS IN THEIR ENTIRETY WHEN NO LONGER

        REQUIRED.


    11. ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING TEMPORARY SUPPORTS

        REQUIRED TO INSTALL, MAINTAIN, RELOCATE, COVER, AND/OR REMOVE THE

        TEMPORARY SIGN, INCLUDING SUPPORTS, ARE CONSIDERED TO BE INCLUDED

        IN THE COST OF THE TEMPORARY SIGN.


    12. SAW CUTS IN WOOD POSTS ARE TO BE PARALLEL TO THE BOTTOM OF THE SIGN.



    13. POSTS SHALL NOT EXTEND MORE THAN 4" ABOVE TOP OF SIGN.




 NOT TO SCALE

 MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION                            PENDING
   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN                  FHWA APPROVAL DATE               8/2006                   SHEET
                                                                                                           WZD-100-A   11 of 11
File: PW/Doc/RD/T&S/Typ/Dev/Sign MainTraf D/WZD-100-A           Rev.   8/21/06 ECH             PLAN DATE
NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
                                                                                                          LIGHTWEIGHT WARNING LIGHT ATTACHED
                                                                                                          WITH VANDAL RESISTANT HARDWARE




                                                             6
                                                             "
                                                                                                          THROUGH UPRIGHT AND RAIL (OPTIONAL)




                                                                 6
                                                                  "
                                                                                   o
                                                                              45
                                                                                                          BARRICADE RAIL MAY BE
                                                                                                          " ACX P
                                                                                                          " HIGH DENSITY
                                                                                                          " HOLLOW EXTRUDE
                 1’-8"


                                                                              REFLECTORIZED
                                 6" MIN.
                         C-C


                                                                              SILVER (WHITE)
                                 12" MAX.                                                                                                                       1" PER
                                                                              (TYPICAL)
                                                                                                                                                                SQUARE STEEL TUBE




                                                                                                                 TYP.
                                                                                                                                                                (12 GAGE)




                                                                                                            8"
      5’-0"




                                                                                                                                                                                     5’-0"
                 1’-8"




                                                                              REFLECTORIZED
                         C-C




                                                                                                           &" - 16 ST
                                                                              ORANGE
                                                                                                           &" - 16 ST
                                                                              (TYPICAL)
                                                                                                          1" MIN. O.D. STEEL FLAT LOCK WASHER
                                                                                                          (12 REQUIRED)
                                                                                                                                                                WELD TO CENTER
                                                                                                                        2" x 2" x                               OF BASE
                                                                                                                        2" x 2"
                                            6"
                                                 OR
                                                      8"




                                                            2" SQUARE STEEL TUBE
                                                            (12 GAGE)


                                                                      8’-0"                                                                     4’-0" - 6’-0"




                                                           FRONT ELEVATION                                                                       SIDE VIEW



                                                                 PERFORATED SQUARE STEEL TUBE OPTION



                                                                                                          LIGHTWEIGHT WARNING LIGHT ATTACHED
                                                                                                          WITH VANDAL RESISTANT HARDWARE
                                                                                                          THROUGH UPRIGHT (OPTIONAL)
                                                             6
                                                             "
      3"




                                                                 6
                                                                  "




                                                                                   o
                                                                              45
                                                                                                          BARRICADE RAIL MAY BE
                                                                                                          " ACX P
                                                                                                          " HIGH DENSITY
                                                                                                          " HOLLOW EXTRUDE
                 1’-8"




                                                                              REFLECTORIZED
                                 6" MIN.
                         C-C




                                                                              SILVER (WHITE)
                                 12" MAX.                                                                                                                       1" x 1
                                                                              (TYPICAL)
                                                                                                                                                                (10 GAGE)
                                                                                                                 TYP.
                                                                                                            8"




                                                                                                                                                                                     5’-3"
      5’-0"



                 1’-8"




                                                                              REFLECTORIZED                &" - 16 ST
                         C-C




                                                                              ORANGE                       &" - 16 ST
                                                                              (TYPICAL)                   1" MIN. O.D. STEEL FLAT LOCK WASHER
                                                                                                          (12 REQUIRED)

                                                                                                                                                                WELD TO CENTER
                                                                                                                        2" x 2" x
                                                                                                                                                                OF BASE
                                                                                                                        2" x 2" x
                                                                                                                        1" x 1" AN
                                                      8"




                                                            2" SQUARE STEEL TUBE
                                                            (12 GAGE)


                                                                      8’-0"                                                                     4’-0" - 6’-0"




                                                           FRONT ELEVATION                                                                       SIDE VIEW



                                                                                          ANGLE IRON OPTION




                 LEFT DIRECTIONAL                                             BI-DIRECTIONAL                            RIGHT DIRECTIONAL                         CLOSURES




                                                                        BARRICADE RAIL SHEETING OPTIONS

                                                                                          TYPE III BARRICADES




                               Other Type III Barricades meeting current NCHRP crash worthy criteria can be found on the FHWA Safety website at


                                                                      http://safety.fhwa.dot.gov/roadway_dept/road_hardware/wzd.htm




                                                                                               File:   T&S/Typ/Signs/WorkZones/wzd 125 d                          Rev.    09/22/09           PJ
NOT TO SCALE


                                                                                                                                    MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
                                                                                                                                    BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN FOR


                                                                     ENGINEER OF DELIVERY
Michigan Department of Transportation

                                                                                                                                              Temporary
              PREPARED BY
  TRAFFIC AND SAFETY                                                                                                          Traffic Control Devices
                                                                 ENGINEER OF DEVELOPMENT


DRAWN BY:                 ECH                                         (SPECIAL DETAIL)                                       9/22/09                                                   SHEET
                                                                                                                                                WZD-125-E                              1 of 3
CHECKED BY:                     MWB                                   FHWA APPROVAL DATE                                     PLAN DATE

NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
                                                                     LIGHTWEIGHT (3.3 LBS. MAX.) WARNING LIGHT TYPE A
                                                                     WITH 6 VOLT SINGLE LANTERN TYPE BATTERY HELD BY

                                                                     Z-BRACKET ATTACHED WITH
                                                                     WITH BOLT PROTECTION CUP.                   LOCATE BOLT 2" IN
                                                                     FROM THE EDGE LINE OF THE PANEL



                                                                                                                                                                        48" x 48"
                                                                                                                                                                        (MEDIUM DENSITY OVERLAY PLYWOOD)


                                                                                                                                                                        REFLECTIVE SHEETING



                                                                                                                                                                        1 " DIA. HOL
                                                                                                                                                                         &" x 3" - 16
                                                                                                                                                                        STEEL HEX BOL
                                                                                                                                                                        AND 1" FLAT
                                                                                                                                                                        TIGHTENED TO CUP WASHER
                                                                                                                                                                        NYLON WASHER (SEE DETAIL BELOW)
                                                                                                                                                                        INSERTED IN THE HOLE OF PANEL

                                                                                                                                                                        (OPTIONAL)
                                              WARNING LIGHT HOUSING
                                              MUST PROTRUDE FROM EDGE
                                              OF SIGN A MINIMUM OF 1"
                                              AND BATTERY MUST BE
                                              PLACED IN OUTERMOST SLOT

                                                                                                                                                                        1" x 1"
                                                                                                                                                                        12 OR 14 GAGE GALVANIZED UPRIGHT
                                                                                                                                                                        PSST STEEL TUBI




                                                                                                                         5’-0" (RURAL) OR 7’-0" (URBAN)
                                                                                                                                                                        1" ON CENTER, ALL FOUR SIDES



                                                                                                                                                                        &" x 2" - 1
                                                                                                                                                                        STEEL HEX BO




                                                                                              1" - 2"

                                                                                                        (TYP.)
                                                                                                                                                                        (4 REQUIRED)



                                                                                                                                                                        2" x 2" x 3’-0"
        2" SQUARE STEEL TUBE                   ATTACH STUB TO ANGLE
                                                                                                                                                                        12 GAGE GALVANIZED SLEEVE
        6" HIGH (12 GAGE)                      IRON BY         "
                                                                                                                                                                        PSST STEEL TUBI
        FOR INSERTING UPRIGHT                  ON THREE SIDES
                                                                                                                                                                        1" ON CENTER, ALL FOUR SIDES
                                                                                                                                                                        PLACED 6" FROM BOTTOM OF UPRIGHT

                                               2" x 2" x
                                               2" x 2" x




                                                                                                                                                                   6"
                                  6’-0"                                                                          3’-4"




                                SIDE VIEW                                                  FRONT ELEVATION



                                                               TEMPORARY SIGN SUPPORT
                                                          (WARNING LIGHT PLACED ON SIDE CLOSEST TO TRAFFIC)

                                   * SIGN STAND IS BALLASTED WITH FOUR OR MORE 35 LB SANDBAGS. A MINIMUM OF ONE ON EACH END.

                                                              UPRIGHTS SHALL NOT EXTEND ABOVE THE SIGN PANEL.




              1




                        14 GAGE STEEL                                R" DI                                                                                         1
                                              1
                                          3



                                              1




                                                     1     1
                  1


                                                         3"                                                                                               &" DI




                               Z-BRACKET DETAIL                                                                      OPTIONAL NYLON WASHER




           Other temporary sign supports meeting current NCHRP crash worthy criteria can be found on the FHWA Safety website at


                                               http://safety.fhwa.dot.gov/roadway_dept/road_hardware/wzd.htm




 NOT TO SCALE

 MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION                         (SPECIAL DETAIL)
   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN                       FHWA APPROVAL DATE                            9/22/09                                                                               SHEET

File:                                                                Rev.
                                                                                                                                                                  WZD-125-E                         2 of 3
         T&S/Typ/Signs/WorkZones/wzd 125 d                                   09/22/09    PJ                      PLAN DATE
NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
                                                                                                                                                   0 TO 4"
                                                                                                               18" MIN.




                                 PLASTIC DRUM




                                                                                     APPROX. 3’-0"




                                                                                                                                                              (SEE NOTE)
                                                                                                                                                   30" MAX.
                                 PROPOSED TYPE III BARRICADE                                                                         2" MAX.




                                 EXISTING TYPE III BARRICADE


                                                                                                                                                                           REMAINDER OF DRUM

           SYMBOLS TO BE USED ON PLANS


                                                                                                                          REFLECTORIZED ORANGE



                                                                                                                          REFLECTORIZED WHITE



                                                                                                                          NON REFLECTORIZED ORANGE




                                                                                                       NOTE:
                                                                                                       DRUMS SHALL HAVE AT LEAST 4 HORIZONTAL REFLECTORIZED
                                                                                                       STRIPES (2 ORANGE AND 2 WHITE) OF 6" UNIFORM WIDTH,
                                                                                                       ALTERNATING IN COLOR WITH THE TOPMOST REFLECTORIZED
                                                                                                       STRIPE BEING ORANGE. NON REFLECTORIZED SPACES BETWEEN
                                                                                                       THE HORIZONTAL REFLECTORIZED ORANGE AND WHITE STRIPES
                                                                                                       SHALL BE ORANGE IN COLOR AND EQUAL IN WIDTH.




                                                                                                                           PLASTIC DRUM




                                                                                                     NOTES:



                                                                                                     2" PERFORATED SQUARE STEEL TUBES MAY BE USED TO FABRICATE THE
                                                                                                     HORIZONTAL BASE OF THE TYPE III BARICADE.


                                                                                                     WARNING LIGHTS SHALL BE PLACED ACCORDING TO THE CURRENT STANDARD
                                                                                                     SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION AND ALL OTHER PROVISIONS IN THE
                                                                                                     CONTRACT WHEN THEY ARE USED ON TYPE III BARRICADES.


                                                                                                     SEE ROAD STANDARD PLANS R-113-SERIES FOR TEMPORARY CROSSOVERS FOR
                                                                                                     DIVIDED ROADWAY, AND R-126-SERIES FOR TYPICAL LOCATION AND SPACING
                                                                                                     OF PLASTIC DRUMS FOR PLACEMENT OF TEMORARY CONCRETE BARRIER.




                                                                                                     SIGNS, BARRICADES, AND PLASTIC DRUMS SHALL BE FACED WITH PRESSURE-
                                                                                                     SENSITIVE REFLECTIVE SHEETING ACCORDING TO THE CURRENT STANDARD
                                                                                                     SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION.


                                                                                                     SANDBAGS SHALL BE USED WHEN SUPPLEMENTAL WEIGHTS ARE REQUIRED TO
                                                                                                     ACHIEVE STABILITY OF THE BARRICADE.       THE SANDBAGS SHALL BE PLACED
                                                                                                     SO THEY WILL NOT COVER OR OBSTRUCT ANY REFLECTIVE PORTION OF THE
                                                                                                     TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICE.




 NOT TO SCALE

 MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION                     (SPECIAL DETAIL)
   BUREAU OF HIGHWAYS DELIVERY STANDARD PLAN                   FHWA APPROVAL DATE                             9/22/09                                                                     SHEET

        T&S/Typ/Signs/WorkZones/wzd 125 d
                                                                                                                                 WZD-125-E                                                3of 3
File:                                                           Rev.   09/22/09      PJ                       PLAN DATE
NOTE: THE ORIGINAL SIGNED COPY IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
                                                MICHIGAN
                                       DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                           SPECIAL PROVISION
                                                  FOR
                                        LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR
                                  FAILURE TO OPEN ALL LANES TO TRAFFIC

MUS:CAS                                                         1 of 1                      C&T:APPR:EMB:DBP:11-27-07

    a. Description. This provision for liquidated damages serves to stress the need to open all
lanes to traffic as quickly as possible. The Contractor shall perform work as detailed in both the
Progress Clause and Special Provision for Maintaining Traffic.

Failure to Meet Hourly Open-to-Traffic Requirement(s):
The liquidated damages will be charged by the hour, for each hour, or part of an hour (rounded
up to the next whole hour) and will be assessed according to this special provision, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.

                                   FAILURE TO OPEN ALL LANES TO TRAFFIC

Period                                  Liquidated Damages per Period                                      Accumulation

First Hour ................................................ $1,000 ..................................................... $1,000
Second Hour ........................................... $1,000 ..................................................... $2,000
Third Hour ................................................. $500 ...................................................... $2,500
Fourth Hour ............................................... $500 ...................................................... $3,000

Each Additional Hour ................................ $500

The liquidated damages will be assessed at a maximum of $13,000 per day every day until all
work is completed and all lanes are reopened to traffic.

Failure to Meet Interim Calendar Date or Work Day Requirement(s):
The liquidated damages will be assessed at a rate equal to the $13,000 maximum allowable
rate shown above per day every day until all work is completed and all lanes are reopened to
traffic.

Failure to Meet Final Contract Completion Date:
Liquidated damages will be assessed on a per calendar day basis as outlined in subsection
1.08.11 of the Standard Specifications for Construction.
                                          MICHIGAN
                                 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                             SPECIAL PROVISION
                                                    FOR
                                            HORTICULTURAL WORK

DES:JLB                                                      1 of 1                        C&T:APPR:MLL:GJB:5-21-02
                                                                                                  REVISED:01-25-06

   a. Description. This work shall consist of tree trimming and removal of limbs and dead
branches as directed by the Engineer.

   b. Materials. None specified.

    c. Construction. The trees to be trimmed will be marked by the Region Resource Specialist
and/or Roadside Development staff. Any damage to the trees to be trimmed or to adjacent trees by
the Contractor’s operations shall be corrected at the Contractor’s expense as directed by the
Engineer.

   All horticultural work shall be done by licensed professional tree trimmers.

   The Contractor shall provide tree trimmers, high-ranger, chipper, chain saws, and other
equipment necessary to do the required work.

   d. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as described will be paid for at the
contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                                          Pay Unit

       Horticultural Work........................................................................................................ Hour

    The pay item Horticultural Work will be measured by the hour for each crew member and shall
include all labor and equipment necessary to complete the trimming, removal, and disposal as
directed by the Engineer.
                                       MICHIGAN
                              DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                       SPECIAL PROVISION
                                              FOR
                                    EMBANKMENT, CIP, SPECIAL

GND:DAP                                               1 of 1                   C&T:APPR:DMG:TWK:10-24-05

     a. Description. Embankment, CIP, Special shall be in accordance with “Embankment,
CIP” in Section 205 of the Standard Specifications for Construction except that Class II or Class
III granular material shall be used in place of sound earth. The plans will detail on the note
sheet which granular material shall be required.

   b. Material. The Class II or Class III granular material shall be in accordance with Section
902 of the Standard Specifications for Construction and conform to Table 902-3.

   c. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as described will be paid for at the
contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                              Pay Unit

       Embankment, CIP, Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cubic Yard

   Embankment, CIP, Special will be measured in cubic yards in accordance with the
methods specified in Section 205 of the Standard Specifications for Construction.

   Payment for Embankment, CIP, Special shall include all labor, materials and equipment
needed for furnishing, hauling, placing, spreading, shaping, compacting and maintaining the
proposed embankment.
                                                                         03DS303(E430)


                                 MICHIGAN
                        DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                         SPECIAL PROVISION
                                FOR
          OPEN-GRADED DRAINAGE COURSE, MODIFIED BASE PRICES

HCY:DC                                  1 of 1             APPR:C&T:ACR:DBP:05-09-11

   a. Description. This special provision lists the base price(s) for open graded drainage
course item(s) for use in conjunction with the Special Provision for Open Graded Drainage
Course, Modified included in the contract documents.

    b. Base Prices. The base price(s) shown below will be used in determining the pay
adjustments for the pay item(s) listed:

Pay Item Code       Pay Item Name                             Unit             Base Price

3037011             Open-Graded Dr Cse, 6 inch, Modified      Square Yard           $6.00
                                          MICHIGAN
                                 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                               SPECIAL PROVISION
                                                      FOR
                                               PEAT SOIL, SPECIAL

DES:JLB                                                     1 of 1                       C&T:APPR:JKG:JTL:07-24-02

a.      Description. This Special Provision covers the requirement for Peat Soil, Special as called
        for on plans or as directed by Engineer. The work shall consist of providing and placing
        Peat Soil, Special as described below which shall include soil excavation and backfill with
        prescribed mixture. Peat Soil, Special shall be in accordance with the MDOT Standard
        Specifications for Construction with the following exceptions and additions.

b.      Materials. The Peat Soil, Special shall meet the requirements specified in sections 815 and
        816 be composed for the following mixture.

        1. 60% Topsoil
        2. 40% Peat Mix (Soil-less) as follows:
           a) Sphagnum peat moss - 70% by volume.
           b) Vermiculite - 30% by volume

        PH Factor adjusted between 6.0 and 7.0

c.      Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured for Peat Soil, Special will
        be paid for at contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

        Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                                       Pay Unit

        Peat Soil, Special .............................................................................................. Cubic Yard

     Peat Soil, Special will be measured in place in cubic yards of material installed.
                                  MICHIGAN
                         DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                              SPECIAL PROVISION
                                     FOR
                      WRAPPING CULVERT AND SEWER JOINTS

GND:DAP                                    1 of 1             C&T:APPR:DMG:EMB:06-15-05

    a. Description. This work shall consist of completely wrapping all culvert and sewer joints
with a geotextile blanket on pipe with diameters of 24 inches or less.

   b. Materials. The geotextile blanket shall be a nonwoven geotextile meeting the
requirements of Section 910 of the Standard Specifications for Construction.

   c. Construction. The geotextile blanket shall be a minimum of 24 inches wide and
centered on the joint. The ends of the geotextile blanket shall overlap a minimum of 12 inches.

   d. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as described will be paid for at the
contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                      Pay Unit

       Wrapping Culvert and Sewer Joints………………………………………………..Lump Sum

   Payment for Wrapping Culvert and Sewer Joints shall include all labor, equipment and
materials necessary to completely wrap the pipe joints as described herein.
Job Number:    101616

User:          BOKOVOYJ

Last Saved:    April 04, 2011 at 13:07:48

Generated:     April 04, 2011 at 13:07:48

                     03SP101(A) DEFINITION CHANGES - Use in all projects
    03SP101A

                     03SP102(A) CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS - Use in all projects
    03SP102A

                     03SP102(B) ELECTRONIC BIDDING - Use in all projects
    03SP102B

                     03SP102(C) CRITICAL PATH METHOD NETWORK SCHEDULE - Use in projects for which the Progress
    03SP102C         Clause requires a critical path network schedule to be submitted


                     03SP102(F) UNBALANCED BIDDING - Use in all projects
    03SP102F

                     03SP103(A) DEBRIS OR MATERIALS IN TRAFFIC LANES - Use in all bridge projects
    03SP103A

                     03SP104(A) SUBCONTRACTS - Use in all projects
    03SP104A

                     03SP104(B) SCALE INSPECTIONS - Use in all projects
    03SP104B

                     03SP104(C) CLAIM REVIEW PROCESS - Use in all projects
    03SP104C

                     03SP104(D) HIGH VISIBILITY CLOTHING - Use in all projects
    03SP104D

                     03SP104(E) VALUE ENGINEERING CHANGE PROPOSAL (VECP) - Use in all projects with an
    03SP104E         estimated cost over $2 million.


                     03SP105(A) SOURCE OF STEEL AND IRON - Use in all projects
    03SP105A

                     03SP107(A) ANTI-DISCRIMINATION CLAUSE FOR CITY OF DETROIT CONTRACTS - Use in City of
    03SP107A         Detroit


                     03SP107(C) NPDES INSPECTION AND RESPONSE - Use in all projects with NPDES Coverage
    03SP107C

                     03SP107(D) SWEEPING - Use in all projects in Metro Region
    03SP107D
           03SP107(E) OBTAINING REQUIRED NPDES PERMITS FOR STORAGE AREAS, DISPOSAL AREAS
03SP107E   AND BORROW AREAS - Use in all projects


           03SP107(F) MIGRATORY BIRD PROTECTION - Use in all projects that involve work on bridges over
03SP107F   waterways


           03SP107(G) INDEMNIFICATION, DAMAGE LIABILITY AND INSURANCE - Use in all projects
03SP107G

           03SP108(A) EXTENSION OF TIME AND EXTRA COST FOR INCENTIVE/DISINCENTIVE PROJECTS -
03SP108A   Use in incentive/disincentive projects


           03SP108(B) TIMELY PROJECT COMPLETION AND CLOSEOUT - Use in all Metro projects and as
03SP108B   requested in other Regions


           03SP109(A) PROMPT PAYMENT - Use in all projects
03SP109A

           03SP109(B) RETAINAGE - Use in all projects
03SP109B

           03SP110(A) ON-THE-JOB TRAINING PROGRAM - Use in all federally funded projects
03SP110A

           03SP204(A) ASBESTOS REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL - Use where work consists of building demolition or
03SP204A   structural removal, either demolition or renovation, where asbestos-containing materials are positively
           identified


           03SP204(B) NOTIFICATION FOR BUILDING AND/OR STRUCTURE DEMOLITION OR RENOVATION -
03SP204B   Use where work consists of building demolition or structural removal, either demolition or renovation


           03SP205(A) NON-HAZARDOUS CONTAMINATED MATERIAL HANDLING AND DISPOSAL - Use
03SP205A   where non-hazardous contaminated materials are to be removed and disposed of, use with pay item


           03SP205(B) CRUSHED CONCRETE - Use in all projects that have removal items for items made of
03SP205B   concrete, have embankment items, have granular blanket items, granular material items, aggregate base
           items, open graded base course items, subbase items or call for granular fill


           03SP208(A) NON-COMPLIANCE WITH SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
03SP208A   REQUIREMENTS - Use in all projects that involve earth distrubing activities


           03SP302(A) AGGREGATE BASE COURSE - Use in all projects that include a temporary road or grade
03SP302A   lift where a six inch aggregate base thickness is exceeded


           03SP302(B) AGGREGATE BASE COURSES - Use in all projects that have Aggregate Base Course pay
03SP302B   items


           03SP303(A) OPEN-GRADED DRAINAGE COURSE, MODIFIED - Use in all projects, except for LAP
03SP303A   projects not on the NHS (it will be optional), that include Open-Graded Drainage Course. A special
           provision for Open-Graded Drainage Course Base Prices must be used with this SP


           03SP304(A) RUBBLIZING PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT - Use in all projects that call
03SP304A   for Rubblizing Portland Cement Concrete Pavement


           03SP401(A) PRECAST THREE-SIDED OR ARCH CULVERT - Use with pay item
03SP401A
           03SP401(C) CULVERT CLASSES TABLE 401-1 - Use in all projects with culverts except box, elliptical,
03SP401C   CSP arch, and jacked in place culverts


           03SP401(D) DRAINAGE MARKER POSTS - Use in all projects with drainage marker posts
03SP401D

           03SP401(E) BACKFILL FOR UTILITY TRENCH, CULVERT, SEWER, AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES -
03SP401E   Use in all projects with utility trench, culvert, sewer, and drainage structures


           03SP402(A) POLYMER COATED STEEL PIPE - Use in all projects with culverts and sewers
03SP402A

           03SP402(C) VIDEO TAPING SEWER AND CULVERT PIPE - Use in all projects with sewers and/or
03SP402C   culverts, except do not use if the project has only driveway culverts, culvert extensions less than 50 feet,
           new culverts less than 50 feet, or extensions of catch basin leads of less than 20 feet. Use with pay item


           03SP402(D) STORM SEWER CLASSES TABLE 402-1 - Use in all projects with sewers except for
03SP402D   elliptical sewers


           03SP402(E) SEWER JACKED IN PLACE - Use in all projects with Sewer, Cl_, (type), _inch, Jacked in
03SP402E   Place


           03SP404(A) UNDERDRAIN AND UNDERDRAIN OUTLET VIDEO INSPECTION - Use on all projects
03SP404A   with round underdrains excluding foundation underdrains


           03SP501(A) SAMPLING ASPHALT BINDER ON LOCAL AGENCY PROJECTS - Use on all Local
03SP501A   Agency bituminous projects, except Wayne County DPS


           03SP501(B) PRACTICAL TARGET DENSITY - Use when recommended by the Region Soils Engineer
03SP501B   and when areas to be applied are under the mainline and are identified on the plans. Use 501(E) for HMA
           shoulders


           03SP501(C) PRICE ADJUSTMENTS ON ASPHALT BINDER - Use in all HMA projects, do not use on
03SP501C   Local Agency projects


           03SP501(D) HIGH STRESS HOT MIX ASPHALT - Use with pay item
03SP501D

           03SP501(E) PRACTICAL TARGET DENSITY ON HMA SHOULDERS - Use in all projects that include
03SP501E   HMA shoulder paving. Do not use on local agency projects


           03SP501(F) SUPERPAVE HMA MIXTURES - Use in all HMA projects that include Superpave Mixtures,
03SP501F   except Wayne County Local Agency projects


           03SP501(G) RECYCLED HOT MIXED ASPHALT MIXTURE - Use in all Local Agency HMA projects,
03SP501G   except Wayne County Local Agency projects and any projects that prohibits the use of RAP in the
           specified HMA mixtures


           03SP501(H) MARSHALL HOT MIX ASPHALT MIXTURE - Use in all projects that include Marshall HMA,
03SP501H   except Wayne County Local Agency projects


           03SP501(I) RECYCLED HOT MIX ASPHALT IN SUPERPAVE MIXTURES - Use in all trunk line HMA
03SP501I   projects


           03SP502(C) CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL FOR PAVEMENT WARRANTY - Use on all HMA
03SP502C   warranty and concrete warranty projects except HMA Ultra-Thin overlays. Do not use on Local Agency
           projects
           03SP502(F) PAVEMENT ACCEPTANCE FOR HOT MIXED ASPHALT - Use on all projects specifying
03SP502F   HMA mixtures that are not warranted. Do not use on Local Agency projects


           03SP502(G) PAVEMENT ACCEPTANCE FOR HOT MIX ASPHALT MIXTURES WITH WARRANTY -
03SP502G   Use on all projects specifying HMA mixtures with a warranty. Do not use on Local Agency projects


           03SP502(H) MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP PAVEMENT WARRANTY(NEW/RECONSTRUCTED HOT
03SP502H   MIXED ASPHALT PAVEMENT ) - Use in all New and Reconstructed HMA Pavement projects. Do not
           use on Local Agency projects


           03SP502(I) MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP PAVEMENT WARRANTY (MULTIPLE COURSE HOT MIX
03SP502I   ASPHALT OVERLAYS ON CONCRETE PAVEMENT) (MULTIPLE COURSE HOT MIX ASPHALT
           OVERLAYS ON COMPOSITE PAVEMENT) (MULTIPLE COURSE HOT MIX ASPHALT OVERLAYS ON
           FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT) - Use in all HMA Overlay projects which include E10, E30, E50 Superpave
           Mixtures. Do not use on Local Agency projects


           03SP502(J) CONTROLLING UNIFORMITY IN HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT DURING PAVING
03SP502J   OPERATIONS - Use in all HMA projects, except on Wayne County Local Agency projects


           03SP502(M) MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP PAVEMENT WARRANTY (HMA PLACED ON
03SP502M   RUBBLIZED CONCRETE) - Use in all projects which include HMA Placed on Rubblized Concrete. Do
           not use on Local Agency projects


           03SP502(N) MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP PAVEMENT WARRANTY (HMA PLACED ON CRUSH
03SP502N   AND SHAPED BASE) - Use in all crush and shape projects. Do not use on Local Agency projects


           03SP502(O) ACCEPTANCE OF HMA ON LOCAL AGENCY PROJECTS - Use on Local Agency projects
03SP502O   when not using 03SP504(B) or 03SP504(C)


           03SP502(P) PAVEMENT RIDE QUALITY - Use on all new concrete and multiple course HMA paving
03SP502P   projects greater than 1 mile long. Also use on all diamond grinding projects. Consult with C&T Division
           before using on urban projects. Do not use on Local Agency projects except for NHS routes


           03SP502(U) TEMPORARY HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT QUALITY AND COMPLIANCE - Use when
03SP502U   the pay item "HMA, Temp Pavt (mix type)" is set up in a project


           03SP502(V) RIDE QUALITY REQUIREMENTS COLD MILLING AND ONE COURSE HOT MIX
03SP502V   ASPHALT OVERLAY AND ONE COURSE HOT MIX ASPHALT OVERLAY (CAPITAL PREVENTIVE
           MAINTENANCE) - Use in all cold mill and one course HMA overlays and one course HMA overlay
           resurfacing projects in the CPM program


           03SP502(W) MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP PAVEMENT WARRANTY COLD MILLING AND ONE
03SP502W   COURSE HOT MIX ASPHALT OVERLAY - Use in all cold mill and one course HMA resurface projects in
           the CPM program


           03SP502(X) MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP PAVEMENT WARRANTY ONE COURSE HOT MIX
03SP502X   ASPHALT OVERLAY - Use in all one course HMA overlay projects in the CPM program


           03SP502(Y) HOT MIX ASPHALT (hma) MATERIAL TRANSFER SYSTEM - Use in all limited access
03SP502Y   trunkline rehabilitation and reconstruction projects with a single mixture quantity above 10,000 tons. Use
           in all CPM projects utilizing Gap Graded Superpave mixtures with a single mixture quantity above 10,000
           tons


           03SP504(B) FURNISHING AND PLACING MARSHALL HMA MIXTURE (WITH SAMPLING BEHIND
03SP504B   THE PAVER) - Use in all HMA projects using Marshall mixtures, except CPM projects that are warranted,
           include the pay item HMA Quality Initiative for projects over 2000 tons. On non-warranted CPM projects,
           do not include the pay item HMA Quality Initiative. For Local Agency projects, use when not using
           03SP502(O) and Marshall HMA mixtures are specified


           03SP504(C) SUPERPAVE HOT MIX ASPHALT PERCENT WITHIN LIMITS (PWL) - Use in all HMA
03SP504C   projects using superpave mixtures, except CPM projects. Include the pay item HMA Quality Initiative.
           For Local Agency projects, use when not using 03SP502(O) and superpave HMA mixtures are specified
           03SP504(D) SUPERPAVE HOT MIX ASPHALT PERCENT WITHIN LIMITS (PWL) FOR CAPITAL
03SP504D   PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (CPM) MILL AND RESURFACE PROJECTS AND CPM ONE COURSE
           OVERLAY PROJECTS - Use in all cold mill and one course HMA overlays and one course HMA overlay
           resurfacing projects in the CPM program


           03SP504(E) HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA) SHOULDER DENSITY IN CONJUNCTION WITH SUPERPAVE
03SP504E   HMA PERCENT WITHIN LIMITS (PWL) - Use in all HMA projects that include FUSP 03SP504(C)
           Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt Percent Within Limits (PWL)


           03SP505(A) PAVEMENT PERFORMANCE WARRANTY FOR HMA CRACK TREATMENT (Capital
03SP505A   Preventive Maintenance) - Use in all crack sawing and sealing projects on asphalt pavements. Do not
           use on Local Agency projects


           03SP505(C) OVERBAND CRACK FILL CRACK PRETREATMENT APPLICATION (PREVENTIVE
03SP505C   MAINTENANCE) - Use with all CPM surface treatment applications, including chip seals, microsurfacing,
           ultra-thin HMA overlays. Do not use on Local Agency projects


           03SP505(D) OVERBAND CRACK FILL STAND-ALONE APPLICATION (PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE)
03SP505D   - Use on all HMA pavements where secondary cracking is present. Do not use on Local Agency projects


           03SP507(A) PAVEMENT PERFORMANCE WARRANTY FOR MICRO-SURFACING (Capital Preventive
03SP507A   Maintenance) - Use in all micro-surfacing projects that are warranted. Do not use on Local Agency
           projects


           03SP507(B) PAVEMENT PERFORMANCE WARRANTY FOR HMA ULTRA-THIN OVERLAY (CAPITAL
03SP507B   PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE) - Use in all HMA Ultra-Thin Overlay projects in the CPM program


           03SP507(C) PAVEMENT PERFORMANCE WARRANTY FOR PAVER PLACED SURFACE SEAL
03SP507C   (Capital Preventive Maintenance) - Use with pay item


           03SP507(D) MICRO-SURFACING CORRUGATIONS (RUMBLE STRIPS) - Use in all micro-surfacing
03SP507D   projects with rumble strips


           03SP508(A) PAVEMENT PERFORMANCE WARRANTY FOR SINGLE CHIP SEALS (Capital Preventive
03SP508A   Maintenance) - Use in all single chip seal projects which are warranted. Do not use on Local Agency
           projects


           03SP508(B) PAVEMENT PERFORMANCE WARRANTY FOR COMPOUND SEAL (Capital Preventive
03SP508B   Maintenance) - Use with pay Item


           03SP508(C) PAVEMENT PERFORMANCE WARRANTY FOR DOUBLE CHIP SEALS (Capital
03SP508C   Preventive Maintenance) - Use in all double chip seal projects which are warranty. Do not use on Local
           Agency projects


           03SP602(B) PAVEMENT ACCEPTANCE FOR JOINTED PLAIN CONCRETE PAVEMENT - Use on all
03SP602B   projects specifying non-reinforced concrete, excludes base courses


           03SP602(D) MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP PAVEMENT WARRANTY (NEW/RECONSTRUCTED
03SP602D   JOINTED PLAIN CONCRETE PAVEMENT) - Use in all New/Reconstructed non-reinforced concrete
           pavement projects. Do not use on Local Agency projects


           03SP602(H) CLEANING AND SEALING JOINTS IN CONCRETE PAVEMENT - Use in all projects that
03SP602H   have concrete pavement pay items


           03SP602(K) PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT MIXTURE FOR UNBONDED OVERLAY -
03SP602K   Use in all unbonded concrete overlay projects


           03SP602(L) HIGH PERFORMANCE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE GRADE P1, MODIFIED - Use
03SP602L   in all trunkline (including ramps) concrete reconstruction projects
           03SP602(M) JOINTING LAYOUT PLAN FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE INTERSECTIONS -
03SP602M   Use in all intersection paving projects using Portland Cement Concrete


           03SP605(B) CONCRETE QUALITY ASSURANCE PAY FACTOR - Use on all 2003 projects with over
03SP605B   100 cubic yards of any single grade of concrete. Do not use on Interim 2003 projects.


           03SP703(A) SILICA FUME MODIFIED CONCRETE - Use in all projects with concrete overlays of Bridge
03SP703A   Decks


           03SP704(A) STEEL SHEET PILING, TEMP AND STEEL SHEET PILING, TEMP, LEFT IN PLACE - Use
03SP704A   with pay items


           03SP705(A) FOUNDATION PILING SPLICES - Use with Pile, CIP and Pile, Steel pay items
03SP705A

           03SP706(A) EXPANSION JOINT DEVICE - Use with pay item
03SP706A

           03SP706(B) REINFORCEMENT, STAINLESS STEEL - Use in projects with deck sections less than 9
03SP706B   inches, and/or in projects where the average road user cost per day per section exceeds $10,000 as
           applicable. Do not use on Local Agency projects


           03SP706(C) SEALING LOCALIZED CRACKS IN BRIDGE DECKS - Use in all projects with bridge deck
03SP706C   construction and overlay construction


           03SP706(D) PLACING ADDITIONAL CONCRETE ON BRIDGE DECKS - Use in all projects that include
03SP706D   the pay items for Superstructure Conc, and/or Superstructure Conc, Night Casting


           03SP707(A) STRUCTURAL STEEL AND ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION - Use in all projects having
03SP707A   structural steel bridge, steel and aluminum sign structures, luminaires and miscellaneous structural steel
           members


           03SP707(B) FRACTURE CRITICAL MEMBERS - Use on non-redundant steel bridges and other frature
03SP707B   critical members


           03SP707(C) MODULAR EXPANSION JOINT SYSTEM - Use on bridge projects where movement
03SP707C   required at the expansions joint(s) exceeds the capability of standard strip seal expansion systems
           contained on the EJ3 and EJ4 Special Details. Use with pay item


           03SP711(A) BRIDGE BARRIER RAILING, MODIFIED - Use in projects when replacing barrier railing with
03SP711A   Type 4 or Type 5 Bridge Barrier Railing


           03SP711(B) TEXTURED CONCRETE AESTHETIC BRIDGE RAILING - Use in projects with Type 4 or
03SP711B   Type 5 Bridge Barrier Railing with aesthetic treatment


           03SP712(B) EMBEDDED GALVANIC ANODES - Use on bridge deck widening, deck joint replacement,
03SP712B   substructure repairs and superstructure widening projects where new concrete is placed next to old
           concrete and on bridge repair projects where patch service life of more than 10 years is required


           03SP712(C) MANAGING HYDRODEMOLITION RUNOFF WATER - Use in all project which include
03SP712C   hydrodemolition. Use with pay item


           03SP712(D) LATEX CONCRETE SURFACE REMOVE - Use in all projects that includes the pay item
03SP712D   Latex Conc, Surface, Rem


           03SP713(A) HEAT STRAIGHTENING DAMAGED STRUCTURAL STEEL - Use in all projects requiring
03SP713A   structural steel heat straightening
           03SP715(A) WARRANTY ON BRIDGE COATING - Use where projects require complete bridge painting.
03SP715A   Do not use on Local Agency projects


           03SP715(B) PROVIDING EXPOSURE ASSESSMENTS, EXPOSURE MONITORING, EQUIPMENT,
03SP715B   HYGIENE FACILITIES, AND TRAINING - Use with pay items for painting steel bridge projects, repairing
           steel bridges, removing structures with steel beams, and for painting faying surfaces


           03SP715(C) SOLVENT USED FOR COATING EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL - Use in all projects
03SP715C   which involve coating of steel structures


           03SP715(D) CLEANING AND COATING EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL - Use with pay items for
03SP715D   painting steel bridge projects, repairing steel bridges, and for painting faying surfaces


           03SP716(A) SHOP CLEANING AND COATING STRUCTURAL STEEL (GALVANIZING OPTION) - Use
03SP716A   in all projects where new structural steel is specified


           03SP803(A) SIDEWALK RAMPS AND DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE- Use with pay items
03SP803A

           03SP807(A) ADJUSTING OR RECONSTRUCTING GUARDRAIL - Use with pay item
03SP807A

           03SP807(B) GUARDRAIL ANCHORED IN BACKSLOPE (TYPE 4B AND 4T) - Use with pay item
03SP807B

           03SP810(A) SIGN SUPPORT AND LIGHT STANDARDS - Use in projects with sign supports, light
03SP810A   standards, tower lighting, and traffic signal mast arm poles


           03SP810(B) TRAFFIC SIGNAL MAST ARM POLE AND MAST ARM, 4 ANCHOR BOLT TYPE - Use in
03SP810B   all projects requiring Traffic Signal Mast Arm Pole, Mast Arm and Foundation that have four anchor bolts


           03SP810(C) FRANGIBLE LIGHT STANDARD TRANSFORMER BASE - Use in all projects with frangible
03SP810C   light standard transformer bases


           03SP811(A) 6-INCH EDGE LINES AND 12-INCH GORE MARKINGS - Use with pay item
03SP811A

           03SP811(B) DELAYED ACCEPTANCE OF PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS - Use in all projects
03SP811B   with permanent pavement markings


           03SP811(C) POLYUREA PAVEMENT MARKINGS - Use in all projects with special markings in Superior
03SP811C   and North Regions. Use in all projects with longitudinal lines when high quality pavement markings are
           required


           03SP811(D) EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION - Use in all projects calling for longitudinal pavement
03SP811D   markings


           03SP811(E) PAVEMENT MARKINGS ON CAPITAL PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (CPM) PROJECTS -
03SP811E   MICRO-SURFACING - Use in all micro-surfacing projects calling for the application of both temporary
           and permanent pavement markings


           03SP811(F) SECOND APPLICATION OF PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS - Use only in projects
03SP811F   calling for a second application of permanent pavement markings


           03SP811(G) CONTRACTOR LAYOUT OF PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS - Use in all projects
03SP811G   with permanent pavement markings
           03SP811(I) 4 INCH SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIP MARKING (SRSM) - Use in all projects calling for 4
03SP811I   inch wide longitudinal shoulder rumble strip markings


           03SP811(J) SMALL QUANTITIES OF SPRAYABLE THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING
03SP811J   MATERIAL - Use in all projects with the pay item Pavt Mrkg, Sprayable Thermoplastic,_ inch (color).


           03SP811(K) LONGITUDINAL PAVEMENT MARKING REMOVAL - Use in all projects with longitudinal
03SP811K   pavement marking removal


           03SP811(L) EARLY/LATE SEASON STRIPPING FOR PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS - Use in
03SP811L   all projects calling for a combined total of 30,000 ft or more of Pavt Mrkg, Waterborne,_inch, (color). Do
           not include the adjustment pay item(s) in the proposal


           03SP811(M) PAVEMENT MARKING APPLICATION RATES PER MILE - Use in all projects calling for
03SP811M   thermoplastic or sprayable thermoplastic permanent marking materials


           03SP812(A) MOBILE ATTENUATOR - Use in all projects that require pavement markings to be placed
03SP812A   under traffic. Also, use in all projects where personnel are exposed to traffic under the conditions defined
           in the special provision for use of shadow or barrier vehicles, aerial operations and mobile/short duration
           operations


           03SP812(H) TEMPORARY SIGNS - Use on all projects where temporary signs are required
03SP812H

           03SP812(I) WORK ZONE SIGNING ON LOCAL AGENCY PROJECTS - Use in all Local Agency projects
03SP812I   where the local agency elects to include Injure/Kill and Traffic Fines Doubled advance work zone
           regulatory signing into the maintaining traffic plan


           03SP812(J) TRAFFIC CONTROL QUALITY AND COMPLIANCE - Use in all projects that have traffic
03SP812J   control


           03SP812(K) TEMPORARY REMOVAL OF PORTABLE SIGNS - Use in all projects where temporary
03SP812K   signs are required


           03SP812(M) MINOR TRAF DEVICES AND FLAG CONTROL DURING AN APPROVED EXTENSION OF
03SP812M   TIME - Use in all MDOT projects that include the pay item(s) Minor Traf Devices and/or Flag Control.
           This special provision is optional for use on local agency projects


           03SP812(N) LIGHTS ON TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES - Use in all MDOT trunkline projects. This
03SP812N   special provision is not for local agency projects


           03SP812(O) 42 INCH CHANNELIZING DEVICES - Use as directed by the Engineer, use in CPM projects
03SP812O   that are micro surface, chip seal and crack seal or other projects where space limitations would prohibit
           the use of plastic drum


           03SP812(P) QUALITY GUIDELINES FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES - Use in all
03SP812P   projects that require temporary traffic control


           03SP812(Q) CHANNELIZING DEVICES - Use in all projects
03SP812Q

           03SP812(S) PAYMENT FOR MINOR TRAFFIC DEVICES AND FLAG CONTROL - Use in all projects
03SP812S   that include the pay item(s) Minor Traf Devices and/or Flag Control


           03SP812(T) TYPE B, TEMPORARY, PRISMATIC, SPECIAL - Use in all projects with Type B,
03SP812T   Temporary, Prismatic signs that have non-standard legends or project specific signs that can not be used
           again. Will need to include the pay item Sign, Type B, Temp, Prismatic, Special in the project


           03SP812(U) LIGHTING FOR NIGHT WORK - Use in all projects that include the pay item Ltg for Night
03SP812U   Work
           03SP812(V) TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIER R-52-SERIES - Use in all projects that include
03SP812V   Temporary Concrete Barrier and have a completion date before November 15, 2011


           03SP812(W) TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIER, NCHRP 350 OR MASH COMPLIANT - Use in all
03SP812W   projects that include Temporary Concrete Barrier and have a completion date on or after November 15,
           2011


           03SP815(A) LANDSCAPING - Use in all projects that have landscaping materials that have a two year
03SP815A   establishment period


           03SP820(A) STRAIN POLE FOUNDATION AND ANCHOR BOLTS, 4 ANCHOR BOLT TYPE - Use in all
03SP820A   projects that include Traffic Signal strain poles and strain pole foundations that have four anchor bolts


           03SP822(A) CENTERLINE CORRUGATIONS - Use with pay item
03SP822A

           03SP822(B) NON-FREEWAY SHOULDER CORRUGATIONS - Use with pay item
03SP822B

           03SP822(C) CONSTRUCTION OF SHOULDER CORRUGATIONS - Use in all projects where new
03SP822C   concrete shoulders will be built


           03SP902(B) GRANULAR MATERIALS - Use with Embankment and Subbase pay items
03SP902B

           03SP902(C) DETERMINATION OF AWI FOR HMA TOP COURSE MIXTURES - Use in all projects with
03SP902C   HMA top course AWI requirement in the contract documents


           03SP904(A) POLYMER MODIFIED PERFORMANCE GRADE BINDERS - Use on all projects specifying
03SP904A   HMA mixtures requiring a Polymer Modified Binder ("P" designation on the PG binder callout in the HMA
           Application Estimate; i.e. PG 70-28P, PG 76-28P)


           03SP907(A) RECYCLED RUBBER OR PLASTIC PRODUCTS - Use with fence posts & woven wire
03SP907A   fence pay items


           03SP912(A) TIMBER AND LUMBER - Use in all projects where timber and lumber products are
03SP912A   specified, including but not limited to guardrail posts, sign posts and timber piles


           03SP917(A) NURSERY STOCK - Use in all projects that contain Nursery Stock (Botanical Name) pay
03SP917A   items


           03SP919(A) RETROREFLECTIVE SHEETING FOR YELLOW WARNING SIGNS - Use when permanent
03SP919A   warning sign replacement (Sign Type IB; Sign, Type IIB or Sign, Type IIIB) is included in the project


           03SP919(B) RETROREFLECTIVE SHEETING FOR FREEWAY GUIDE SIGNS - Use when freeway
03SP919B   guide sign replacement (Sign, Type IA; Sign, Type IIA or Sign, Type IIIA) is included in the project


           03SP919(C) RETROREFLECTIVE SHEETING FOR SCHOOL SIGNS - Use when school sign
03SP919C   replacement (Sign, Type IIB or Sign, Type IIIB) is included in the project


           03SP919(D) PLASTIC REFLECTORS - Use in projects with the pay item delineator reflector
03SP919D
Job Number:   101616

User:         BOKOVOYJ

Last Saved:   May 19, 2010 at 15:02:16

Generated:    October 28, 2010 at 10:34:09

                    03NB00 Report Forms - Use in all projects
    03NB00

                    03NB01 Insurance - Use in all projects (This is a fillable form. After creating package, locate form in
    03NB01          package and list all agencies following MDOT that are involved including counties, county road
                    commissions, villages, cities)


                    03NB03 Dissemination of Public Relations Information - Use in all projects
    03NB03

                    03NB05 Rest Area Building Insurance - Use with rest area building construction OR include fillable NB for
    03NB05          Insurances


                    03NB07 Joint/Two-Party Checks - Use in all projects with federal funding
    03NB07

                    03NB10 Certified Payrolls - Use in all projects
    03NB10

                    03NB12 Prevailing Wage Oversight for Short Duration Projects - Use in all projects with a progress
    03NB12          schedule duration of less than 75 calendar days for construction


                    03NB13 Multiple Wage Decisions - Use in all projects with federal funding
    03NB13

                    03NB14 Labor Compliance - Use in all projects
    03NB14

                    03NB15 Bid Rigging - Use in all projects with federal funding
    03NB15

                    03NB17 Contractors/Consultants Fraud and Abuse Hotline - Use in all projects
    03NB17

                    03NB18 Road Construction Apprenticeship Readiness (RCAR) Program - Use in all projects
    03NB18

                    03NB20 Multiple Warranties - Use in projects that have more than one warranty included in the proposal.
    03NB20          Do not use on Local Agency Projects


                    03NB30 Landscape Plants - Use in all projects that include pay items for landscaping plantage. Do not
    03NB30          use on Local Agency projects


                    03NB35 Pass-Through Warranty Bonds - Use in all projects that have a warranty
    03NB35
             03NB37 Required Contract Provisions Federal-Aid Construction Contracts Form FHWA-1273 - Use in all
03NB37       federal aid projects


             03NB40 ARRA Monthly Employment Reports - Use in all projects that are funded by the American
03NB40       Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009


             03NB41 ARRA Requirements - Use in all projects that are funded by the American Recovery and
03NB41       Reinvestment Act of 2009


             03NB42 Required Contract Provisions to Implement American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA)
03NB42       Sections 902 and 1515 - Use in all projects that are funded by the American Recovery and Reinvestment
             Act of 2009


             03TNB(01) Traffic Signal Timing Permit - Use with traffic and safety timing permits
03TNB(01)

             03TNB(02) - Notification of Completion Date - Use in all MDOT state trunkline highway projects that
03TNB(02)    include traffic signal work.


             03TNB-ANNA - ELECTRICAL WORK - TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION - (City of Ann Arbor) - Use in all
03TNB-ANNA   traffic signal projects in the City of Ann Arbor.


             03TNB-DEAR - ELECTRICAL WORK - TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION - (City of Dearborn) Use in all
03TNB-DEAR   traffic signal projects in the City of Dearborn.


             03TNB-FLIN - ELECTRICAL WORK - TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION - (City of Flint) Use in all traffic
03TNB-FLIN   signal projects in the City of Flint.


             03TNB-GENE - ELECTRICAL WORK - TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION - (Genesee County) - Use in
03TNB-GENE   all traffic signal projects in Genesee County.


             03TNB-GRAN - ELECTRICAL WORK - TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION - (City of Grand Rapids) - Use
03TNB-GRAN   in all traffic signal projects in the City of Grand Rapids.


             03TNB-LANS - ELECTRICAL WORK - TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION - (City of Lansing) - Use in all
03TNB-LANS   traffic signal projects in the City of Lansing.


             03TNB-MACO - ELECTRICAL WORK - TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION - (Road Commission of
03TNB-MACO   Macomb County) - Use in all traffic signal projects in Macomb County.


             03TNB-MDOT - ELECTRICAL WORK - TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION - (Michigan Department of
03TNB-MDOT   Transportation) - Use in all MDOT state trunkline highway projects that include traffic signal work.


             03TNB-OAKL - ELECTRICAL WORK - TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION - (Road Commission for
03TNB-OAKL   Oakland County) - Use in all traffic signal projects in Oakland County.


             03TNB-PONT - ELECTRICAL WORK - TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION - (City of Pontiac) - Use in all
03TNB-PONT   traffic signal projects in the City of Pontiac.


             03TNB-SAGI - ELECTRICAL WORK - TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION - (City of Saginaw) - Use in all
03TNB-SAGI   traffic signal projects in the City of Saginaw.


             03TNB-WAYN - ELECTRICAL WORK - TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION - (Wayne County Department of
03TNB-WAYN   Public Services) - Use in all traffic signal projects in Wayne County.
    Michigan Department
      of Transportation                         UTILITIES STATUS REPORT
        2286 (11/06)                                             Page 1 of 1

CONTROL SECTION(S)                                                       JOB NUMBER(S)

 34043                                                                     101616




                                                                                      UTILITY TO       COORDINATION UTILITY WORK
                                                                 RELOCATION
                                                FACILITY                              RELOCATE          INFORMATION
                 UTILITY                                            WORK                                             INCLUDED IN
                                                 TYPE                                 PRIOR TO            IN NOTICE
                                                                  IDENTIFIED                                          CONTRACT
                                                                                     START DATE          TO BIDDERS

                                                                 YES        NO       YES        NO       YES        NO       YES          NO

AT&T                                          Telecom

Consumers Energy                              Electric

                                           ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE CHECKED:




                                                                                           Y
          The above is a list of utilities which have indicated they have facilities in the project area. Coordination arrangements, if
          necessary, have been made and are noted in the Notice to Bidders - Utility Coordination document.




                                                                                    R
          The above is a list of utilities which have indicated they have facilities in the project area. There are no known utility
          adjustments required by this project.



                                                                             A
          There are utilities within the project area. However based upon the project’s limited scope of work, no utility impacts are
                                                                   IN
          anticipated. Utility information has not been solicited for this project and does not need to be listed above.
                                                         IM
                                             EL
                                PR




NAME                                                                                                               DATE
         Michael Roberts                                                                                                  25-Apr-2011
OFFICE
         Howard City TSC
Job Number:      101616

User:            BOKOVOYJ

Last Saved:      December 18, 2009 at 09:42:11

Generated:       October 28, 2010 at 10:43:13

                       03SS001(2h) ERRATA TO THE 2003 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - Use in all projects using the 2003
    03SS001(2h)        Spec Book


                       03SS102(1) PARTNERING - Use in projects requested by the Transportation Service Center Manager
    03SS102(1)

                       03SS107(1) NPDES REQUIREMENTS FOR PORTABLE PLANT OPERATIONS - Use in all projects
    03SS107(1)

                       03SS401(1) CULVERT SLOPED END SECTIONS - Use in all projects that include culvert end sections
    03SS401(1)

                       03SS804(1) REFLECTIVE MARKERS ON PERMANENT CONCRETE BARRIERS - Use in all projects
    03SS804(1)         that include permanent single face, double face or split concrete barrier
                                    MICHIGAN
                           DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                  SPECIAL PROVISION
                                         FOR
                            DUCTILE IRON WELL CONNECTION

DES:SJU/Rev.                                   1 of 3                             07-31-06
                                                                 C&T:APPR:DMG:EMB:07-12-02

  a. Description. This work shall consist of installing ductile iron well connection of the nominal
diameter shown on the plans. This work includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment and
materials required for electrical cable and conduit, excavation, installation, testing, disinfection,
chlorination of the main, backfilling, and disposing of waste material as shown on the plans and
specified herein.

 b. Materials. The Contractor shall furnish all pipe materials required for the Contract. All
materials shall meet the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Construction and
AWWA.

    Pipe. The ductile iron pipe shall be Class 54, manufactured in accordance with AWWA
Specification C151 (ANSI A21.51), of the sizes shown on the plans. All pipe shall be lined with
a standard thickness cement mortar lining sealed with a bituminous seal coat in accordance
with AWWA Specification C104 (ANSI A21.4), unless otherwise specified. The outside of the
pipe shall be coated with the standard bituminous seal. The metal thickness class, net weight
of the pipe without lining, the nominal size, and the manufacturer's identifying symbol shall be
clearly marked on each length of pipe.

   The ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have Megalug or Field-Lok joint restraint system or
approved equal.

   The fittings, plugs, and gaskets for use with ductile iron pipe shall meet all applicable
requirements of AWWA C153 (ANSI A21.53) and AWWA C111 (ANSI A21.11) Specifications.
Cement mortar linings for fittings in accordance with AWWA C104 will be required.

      All fittings shall be ductile iron fittings conforming to ANSI/AWWA specifications
C110/A21-10 for standard fittings or to ANSI/AWWA specifications C153/A21.53 for compact
fittings.

    c. Construction. The Contractor shall furnish and install ductile iron well connection of the
sizes shown on the plans at a minimum depth of 5.5 feet below the ground, from the pitless
adapter unit of the proposed well and at the tie-in location to the existing well line as shown on
the plans to a distance of 10 feet out from the wall of the rest area building.
Disturbance to existing ground shall be kept to a minimum and care shall be taken to avoid
damage to existing vegetation.

       1. Trenching and Backfilling. Trenching and backfilling shall be as detailed on the
          plans and per Standard Plan R-83 (series). The depth of the trench shall be such
          that the top of the pipe shall be a minimum of 5.5 feet below the final grade.

       2. Laying of Pipe. The pipe joint restraint system shall be installed according to the
DES:SJU/Rev                                2 of 3                                     07-31-06

        manufacturer's recommendations. The pipe shall be assembled in the trench.
        Wherever deflections at joints are required by changes in grade or alignment or to
        plumb valve stems, the deflections of any bell and spigot joint shall not exceed the
        manufacturers’ recommendations. The deflection at the joints of any mechanical joint
        fittings shall not exceed three-quarters of the maximum deflection recommended by
        the manufacturer of the joint used. Tools or other objects shall not be stored or left in
        the pipe.

        Joint restraint is required at all fittings and deflections of 11-1/4 degree and larger,
        and at the first joint to either side.

     3. Hydrostatic Testing. Hydrostatic testing for the water main shall be done by the
        Contractor as directed by the Engineer. The section of main to be tested shall be
        filled with water and maintained at a pressure of 150 pounds per square inch for a
        minimum of one hour while all joints are inspected for leaks. The leakage, as
        measured by a water meter from the section of water main under test pressure, shall
        not be greater than that determined by the formula found in Section 4.1 of AWWA
        Specification C600. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary appurtenances
        including necessary pumps, connections, gauges, meters, and necessary water to
        satisfactorily conduct the testing.

     4. Flushing and Chlorination. All mains or sections thereof shall be flushed and
        chlorinated by the Contractor. Outlets for flushing the mains shall consist of
        blow-offs or other means as may be indicated on the plans or as directed by the
        Engineer. Blow-offs shall be fitted with a hose connection to the blow-off pipe to
        carry the flushed water away.

        The Contractor shall provide hoses and other equipment and arrange a means of
        disposing of the water without damage to the roadway or adjacent property.

        The flushing and chlorination procedures shall be as follows:

        After satisfactory completion of hydrostatic testing, the pipe line shall be cleaned and
        flushed by introducing water into the completed line and allowing it to flow from the
        far end of the section flushed until it runs clear. Liquid chlorine or calcium
        hypochlorite solution containing not less than 10,000 ppm (1%) of available chlorine
        shall then be introduced continuously into the main through a corporation stop or
        other suitable approved means while water is flowing and until water from the far end
        of the section to be treated shows residual chlorine content of at least 50 ppm when
        tested by the DPD indicator method. The water shall not exceed 20 psi during
        application of the disinfectant. The treated water shall then remain in the main for at
        least 12 hours. After this waiting period has expired, the main shall again be flushed.

        The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the above operations are completed
        so that water samples may be taken in his presence.

        The Engineer will have the necessary bacteriological analysis run by the local county
        health department to determine the purity of the water. If the results are unsatisfac-
        tory, the Contractor shall repeat the flushing and chlorination procedures until
DES:SJU/Rev                                        3 of 3                                           07-31-06

           acceptable tests are obtained.

       5. Cable and Conduit. The cable from the submersible pump to the pitless adapter of
          the well shall be as specified by the pump manufacturer. The cable from the pitless
          adapter of the well to the control box shall be #2 AWG with 600 volt insulation and
          75 °F (24 °C) temperature rating for dry or wet locations and shall bear the
          Underwriters Laboratories label. The cable shall be placed in a 2" non-metallic
          conduit from the pitless adapter to the building, it shall be buried at least 18" below
          finished grade, and shall be placed directly above the DI well connection. The
          conduit shall be sealed into the pitless adapter.

           The wire size specified above was calculated assuming a 4 percent voltage drop, 1
           phase, 240V, 7.5Hp pump located at 600 feet from the rest area building.
           Calculations of the voltage drop shall be submitted by the contractor when the final
           location and size of the pumps has been determined. Voltage drop shall not exceed
           4 percent. Where adjustments to wire size are necessary, the Department or
           Contractor will be credited for the difference in cost of materials only.



Shop Drawings. Submit six (6) sets of shop drawings for all items associated with the Ductile
Iron Well Connection contract item. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and approved prior to
beginning work on the Ductile Iron Well Connection.

As-Built Drawings. The Contractor shall provide as-built drawings of the Ductile Iron Well
Connection to the Engineer. The cost of this is considered included in the cost of the Ductile
Iron Well Connection. Ductile Iron Well Connection work shall not be considered complete, and
payment may be withheld, until acceptable as-built drawings have been provided to the
Engineer.

   d. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured will be paid for at the
contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                 Pay Unit

       Well Connection, DI, ___inch, Tr Det ___ ......................................................Foot

     Payment for Well Connection, DI shall be payment in full for furnishing all labor, equipment
and materials necessary to install the ductile iron connection to the proposed well and existing
well system. Also, all fittings, excavation, sheeting, thrust blocks, dewatering if necessary,
laying, jointing, bedding, testing, disinfecting, backfilling, electrical cable and conduit from the
pitless adapter of the proposed and existing well to the rest area building, all cable, conduit,
pressure switches, alternator and all other well pump controls necessary to connect the
proposed and existing well systems, disposal of surplus excavated material, final clean-up, as-
built drawings and all other related work for the completion of the well connection will not be
paid for separately, but shall be included in the ductile iron well connection item.
                                  MICHIGAN
                         DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                  SPECIAL PROVISION
                                         FOR
                                    WELL DRILLING

DES:SJU/Rev.                               1 of 4                             05-30-05
                                                             C&T:APPR:JKG:JTL:07-27-01

  a. Description.- The work shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment
necessary for the complete and satisfactory construction and testing of the proposed water
supply well in accordance with the plans and as specified in the proposal.

The Contractor shall procure all permits, certificates and licenses required by law and shall
comply with all federal, state, and local laws, rules and ordinances relating to the
performance of the work.

Where the water bearing formation is anticipated to be an artesian aquifer, the Contractor
shall submit to the local county health department, the proposed methods and procedures
for protecting the aquifer and confining beds from erosion. This shall be done at least 30
days prior to commencement of drilling operations.

  b. Materials.- The 8-inch ID well casing shall meet ASTM Specification A-53, Grade B,
“Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless.” Recessed couplings with tapered threads or welded joints shall be used.

The well screen shall be a V-slot screen constructed of silicon red brass, stainless steel, or
approved equal.

  c. Construction.- All work shall be performed in accordance with Michigan Department
of Environmental Quality, Drinking Water and Radiological Protection Division, and as
provided for in Act 368 P.A. 1978, Act 399 P.A. 1976 and the Michigan Water Well
Construction and Pump Installation Code, 1994 AACS R 325.1601 et seq.

Disturbance to existing ground shall be kept to a minimum and care shall be taken to avoid
damage to existing vegetation.

All excess water shall be conducted to a place where it will not cause damage by erosion or
will not return to the groundwater, causing interference with the capacity test.

   1. Well. The proposed location of the well and the estimated depth is shown on the
      plans. If the Contractor determines that the proposed location will not produce a
      satisfactory water supply, the well location may be moved to a location determined
      by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The estimated depth of the well is
      not guaranteed to be accurate.
DES:SJU/Rev.                               2 of 4                                   05-30-05

      The well may be either rotary-bored or driven.

      If the Contractor elects to use welded joints, the welder shall be qualified as
      specified in Section 707.03.D.8 of the 2003 Standard Specifications for
      Construction.

      The discharge shall be a minimum of 100 gallons per minute determined in
      accordance with the requirements for the Capacity Test.

      When water-bearing formations are encountered, the Engineer shall be notified. If
      the Contractor determines that the formation may be capable of producing an
      acceptable yield, pumping tests shall be conducted to determine whether a
      satisfactory supply of water has been obtained, and to establish the depth of the
      well.

      The Contractor shall keep a complete and accurate written log of all material
      encountered in drilling the well. Such written log, together with the static water level
      and other pertinent information relative to the well as required by the Michigan
      Water Well Construction and Pump Installation Code, shall be filed with the
      Engineer.

      The Contractor shall be responsible to inform the Engineer if the proposed well
      location is unsuitable to obtain water. All "dry" or otherwise unacceptable wells shall
      be abandoned in accordance with the Safe Drinking Water Act 399 P.A. 1976,
      specifically R 325.10832; and the Michigan Water Well Construction and Pump
      Installation Code.

2. Well Screen. The screen shall be fitted with standard screwed fittings and plugged with
     a neoprene packer. The size of the screen slots shall be determined by information
     obtained from the samples of the aquifer and subject to approval by the Engineer.

      The Contractor shall submit a selected sample of the water bearing formation to be
      delivered to the screen manufacturer for mechanical analysis and recommendation
      as to size of screen, slot openings, and length of screen necessary to permit the well
      to produce the required yield capacity. Entrance Velocity shall be 0.1 fps maximum.
      A copy of the manufacturer's report or recommendation shall be furnished to the
      Engineer. A well screen may not be required in bedrock. The method of placing the
      screen shall insure it against any damage.

3. Well Development. Developing the well shall commence only upon approval of the
     Engineer. The well shall be thoroughly and completely surged to remove all fine
     sand, drilling mud, chips, silt, and to develop the well to its maximum yield. This
     surging may be done by means of an appropriate surge block, the use of air, jetting,
     or other appropriate method as approved by the Engineer. The surge block, if used,
     shall be equipped with a flap valve, and care shall be used when starting the surging
     operation to prevent extreme pressures.
DES:SJU/Rev.                                 3 of 4                                     05-30-05


4. Capacity Test. After developing the well, a capacity test shall be run by method as
     specified herein and approved by the Engineer. The pump test shall be continuous
     for 8 hours unless otherwise shortened or extended as approved by the Engineer.
     The Contractor shall provide a test pump of ample capacity to test the well up to 100
     gpm.

        The Contractor shall submit two (2) samples of water to the local health department
        in standard samples bottles to obtain partial chemical analysis and the necessary
        bacteriological analysis to assure a safe water source. The determination shall
        include the following information:

        Fe    (Iron)                                    Mn  (Manganese)
        Cl   (Chlorides)                                SO4 (Sulphate)
        Hardness as CaC03                               pH  (acidity/alkalinity)

        The first sample should be obtained during the first part of the capacity test and the
        second sample near the end of the test to determine any change in the water
        quality. If the results are unsatisfactory the Contractor shall flush and chlorinate until
        acceptable test results are obtained.

        The laboratory results shall be reported to the Engineer.

        Arrangements shall be made by the Contractor so as to obtain accurate
        measurements of the drawdown during the pump test period by means of air line
        and altitude gauge or other reliable means. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish
        a reliable and approved means of measuring the quantity of water pumped. Any
        one of the following four methods shall be accepted for measurement of the water:
        Weir box and hook gauge, calibrated orifice, calibrated tank and stop watch, reliable
        meter. Such capacity test shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer and
        to his/her satisfaction.

        Provisions shall be made to control the output of the test pump by means of throt-
        tling valves or other acceptable means to permit accurate measurement of
        drawdown at various pumping rates.

        The following information shall be obtained during the capacity test:

         Static water level.
         Pumping level recorded at intervals during the pumping test.
         Residual drawdown and recovery rates.
         Specific capacity.

Shop Drawings. Submit six (6) sets of shop drawings for review and approval for all items
associated with the Well Drilling contract items.


   d.    Measurement and Payment.            The completed work as measured for WELL
DES:SJU/Rev.                                           4 of 4                                                 05-30-05

DRILLING shall be paid for at the contract unit prices for the following contract items (pay
items):

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                               Pay Unit

       Well in Drift, 8 inch........................................................................................... Foot
       Well in Rock, 8 inch ......................................................................................... Foot
       Well Screen .................................................................................................... Each
       Well Development ................................................................................. Lump Sum
       Capacity Test.................................................................................................. Hour

Payment for Well in Drift, 8 inch shall include furnishing all labor, material, and equipment,
installing the casing, grouting, and performing all related work required to install the portion
of the well in drift complete, subject to the approval of the Engineer, and as specified in the
well permit.

Payment for Well in Rock, 8 inch shall include furnishing all labor, material and equipment
necessary for the construction of the portion of the well in rock.

Payment for Well Screen shall include furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor
necessary to furnish and install the screen in accordance with these specifications to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

Payment for Well Development shall include furnishing all equipment and labor for surging
the well and developing it to maximum capacity.

Payment for Capacity Test shall include furnishing all equipment and labor required for
performing the test complete as specified.

Payment for Well in Drift, 8 inch, Well in Rock, 8 inch, Well Development, and Capacity
Test will only be made towards a completed well of the size and capacity specified or
otherwise accepted by the Engineer. "Dry Wells" or otherwise unacceptable wells will not
be paid for.

The Engineer retains the right to add or delete quantities, as appropriate for the proper
construction of the well, at no additional cost to the project.
                                       MICHIGAN
                              DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                           SPECIAL PROVISION
                                                  FOR
                                            PITLESS ADAPTER

DES:SJU/Rev.                                           1 of 1                                05-30-05
                                                                            C&T:APPR:JKG:DMG:07-16-01

  a. Description.- This work shall consist of the installation of a Pitless Adapter including
an overflow discharge if necessary.

  b. Materials.- The pitless adapter shall consist of a spool type pitless adapter with a
watertight cap, a copper delivery fitting matching the requirements of the PVC Well
Connection, a pitless case, and a spool with O-ring seals. The watertight cap shall have a
2" conduit tapping, and the conduit shall have a "bury depth" of 5 feet. The pitless adapter
shall be fitted with a check valve either below or integral with the spool.

  c. Construction.- The Pitless Adapter Unit shall be installed with the top of the pitless
case terminating approximately one foot above the final ground surface. The top of the well
shall be adequately protected at all times from the entrance of foreign material. When
complete, the pitless adapter shall be secured with a vented cap. The pitless adapter shall
be connected to the well casing by welding or with a threaded coupling.

In the event that the well is in an artesian aquifer, the Contractor shall provide for
necessary modifications to the pitless adapter to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the
local health department.

Shop Drawings. Submit six (6) sets of shop drawings for all items associated with the
Pitless Adapter contract item. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and approved prior to
beginning work on the Pitless Adapter.

  d. Measurement and Payment.- The completed work as measured for Pitless Adapter
will be paid for at the contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item).

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                               Pay Unit

       Pitless Adapter.......... ....................................................................... Each

Payment for Pitless Adapter shall include all material, labor, conduit, miscellaneous
fittings, modifications for overflow discharge and equipment necessary to furnish and install
the Pitless Adapter.
                                     MICHIGAN
                            DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                       SPECIAL PROVISION
                                              FOR
                                       SUBMERSIBLE PUMP

DES:SJU                                             1 of 2                             06/09/08
                                                                      C&T:APPR:JKG:DMG:07-16-01

   a. Description.- This work shall consist of furnishing and installing a submersible pump,
drop line, conduit pipe, electrical installation and control box as required to complete the
item. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for approval.

  b. Construction.- The Contractor shall furnish and install a 7.5 H.P. three phase
120/240 Volt submersible pump compatible with a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
controller for the new drinking water well as shown on the plans. Pumps manufactured by
Crown Pump Company, Myers, Berkley, Red Jacket or an approved equal shall be
equipped for VFD service and supply a continuous discharge of approximately 65 gallons
per minute at 50 p.s.i. measured in the rest area building. Pumps with plastic impellers will
not be accepted.

A galvanized steel drop pipe shall be furnished and installed (with torque arrester),
matching the requirements and dimensions of the pump from the pitless adapter of the
wells to the submersible pump.

The motor control box for the pump shall be furnished and installed at a location in the rest
area building as shown on the plans or approved by the Engineer. A lightning arrester shall
be installed at the control box.

The new pump shall be provided with a line voltage AC magnetic starter with melting alloy-
type thermal overload relay to be mounted in the pump control panel.

The Contractor shall provide 8 copies of shop drawings for the pumps and Variable
Frequency Drive Controller including pump model, pump curves, capacity test results,
pump sizing calculations VFD components, and well tank to the Engineer who will forward
them to the Design Support Division for review and approval.

  c. Measurement and Payment.- The completed work as measured for Submersible
Pump will be paid for at the contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                Pay Unit

       Submersible Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Each
                                           2 of 2


Payment for Submersible Pump shall be payment in full for all labor, material and
equipment required to furnish and install the submersible pump. Also, the submersible
pump, drop pipe, torque arrester, pump control panel, electrical wiring, all electrical
connections, and all other related work and materials required for the completion of the
submersible pump shall not be paid for separately, but shall be included in the Submersible
Pump item.

The pump size specified above was determined based upon an assumed drawdown of 80
ft. Upon review of the capacity test results, pump sizing calculations and shop drawings for
the submersible pump, the Engineer may elect to require a different horsepower pump, in
which case the Department or Contractor will be credited for the difference in cost of
materials as applicable.

The Contractor shall be responsible for installing the proper size wiring, conduit, starters,
circuit breakers, etc. for proper operation of the pump selected.

All well connections including cable and conduit from the pitless adapter to the pump
control will be paid for separately as described in the specification "Well Connection, PVC."
                                   MICHIGAN
                          DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                   SPECIAL PROVISION
                                          FOR
                                EXTENDED WATER OUTLET

DES:SJU/Rev.                                 1 of 2                              04/22/11
                                                                C&T:APPR:JKG:JTL:07-27-01

 a. Description.- The work under this specification includes all labor, materials and
equipment necessary to furnish and install an extended water outlet system as specified
herein and as shown on the plans.

  b. Materials.- Polyethylene (PE) Pressure-rated Pipe in the sizes called for on the plans
shall be in accordance with ASTM D2239, PE3408. The pipe shall have an SDR 11
(Standard Dimension Ratio of 11) and be pressure rated at 160 psi at 73° F.

A suitable means for locating the PE pipe (tracer wire) shall be installed with the PE pipe
and shall be approved by the Engineer prior to construction.

All plastic fittings (couplings) shall be of the "High-max" type, or equal. All fittings shall be
double clamped, and the clamp, including the appurtenances, shall be stainless steel. Both
fittings and clamps shall be NSF approved.

Quick coupling valves shall be furnished at each of the seven locations as indicated on the
plans. They shall be brass valves with 1-inch couplers and 1-inch riser connections.
Aqua-Dial No. 44 manufactured by Turf Irrigation Equipment or similar items by Toro,
Buckner or Rain Bird may be acceptable. Valves shall be installed enclosed in a box or
hand-hole as shown on the plans.

All couplings, elbows and other necessary fittings shall be supplied to complete an
operating system.

Two (2) 1" x 3/4" quick coupling hose bibbs with valves shall be provided. All components
shall be brass. Items by Toro, Buckner, Rain Bird or Aqua-Dial may be acceptable.

Two (2) 50 ft. long, ¾-inch diameter, reinforced rubber garden hoses shall be provided.

Impact lawn sprinklers shall be heavy duty, with sprinkler pattern adjustable from full circle
to part circle. Each sprinkler shall have a maximum discharge of 5 gpm at 50 psi. Two (2)
sprinkler heads shall be provided.

Manually operated drain valves shall be installed at the end of each extended water outlet pipe
run. Drains shall discharge into a suitable porous material sump. Valves shall be installed with
a minimum of 4 inches of cover from finished grade and shall be provided with the proper
valve sleeve and cover extending from grade to the body of the valve. All piping shall pitch to
the drains at a rate of 3 inches per 100 feet.

c. Construction.- Minimum depth of cover over piping shall be 18 inches. When pipe laying
is not in progress or at the end of each day, the pipe ends shall be closed by means of a
                                                 2 of 2

tight plug or cap. All work shall be performed in accordance with good practices prevailing in
the piping trades.

  1. Backfill.- The Contractor shall do all necessary backfilling and compaction required for
complete installation of the system. Compaction shall be such that the original density of the
material is obtained. Backfill material shall be free from rock, large stones or other
unsuitable substances. Backfilling of trenches containing plastic pipe shall be done when
the pipe is cool to avoid excessive contraction.

  2. Quick-Coupling Valve.- Quick-coupling valves shall be set plumb and level with the turf
at locations called for on the plans. Elevation of quick-coupling valves is critical and the
contractor shall exercise care to set them exactly or slightly above grade.

All quick-coupling valves shall be connected to the water distribution main with swing joints
so that direct loads applied to the sprinkler head or coupling are not transmitted to the main.

  3. Testing and Flushing.- All main lines and lines that will have continuously applied
pressure shall be tested at a pressure of 160 psi or at the rated pressure of the pipe,
whichever is lower, and upon visual inspection of the ground, should any leak be found, it
shall be repaired. The line shall then be retested until satisfactory.

Zone lines shall be tested at operating pressure of the zone, and should any leak be found,
it shall be repaired and the zone retested. After testing, the system shall be thoroughly
flushed with a minimum of 150 percent of the operating flow passing through the mains in
sequence. When the testing and flushing is completed, the Contractor, in the presence of
the Engineer, shall demonstrate the irrigation system with particular attention to the method
of operation.

Submit six (6) sets of shop drawings for all equipment associated with the Extended Water
Outlets contract item. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and approved prior to beginning
work on the Extended Water Outlets.

 d. Measurement and Payment.- The completed work as measured for Extended Water
Outlets will be paid for at the contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

               Pay Item                                              Pay Unit

       Extended Water Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lump Sum

Extended Water Outlet shall be payment in full for furnishing all material and labor
required to install the complete system as specified herein and as shown on the plans. Also,
the rubber hoses, sprinkler heads, quick coupling hose bibbs, manual drain valves, tracer
wire and all other related work and materials required for the completion of the extended
water outlets will not be paid for separately, but shall be considered to have been included
in the Extended Water Outlet item.
                                    MICHIGAN
                           DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                    SPECIAL PROVISION
                                           FOR
                                  SEWAGE PUMP STATION

DES/PGF/Rev.                                   1 of 6                           Rev:10-05-09
                                                                    C&T:APPR:GC:JKG:06-03-02

    a. Description. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing an automatic duplex sewage
pump station incorporating submersible pumps, wet well, integral valve chamber with check and
plug valves, flanged pipe, aluminum cover, electrical control panel and required cable (wiring) and
conduit, excavation, backfill, compaction, startup, training session and all other material, equipment
and labor as necessary to complete the work.

    b. Materials/Fabrication. The sewage pump station shall be fabricated, wired, plumbed and
electrically tested to the extent practical at the manufacturer’s facility prior to shipment to the
project site.

   Concrete Grade S3 shall be in accordance with Section 701 of the 2003 Standard
Specifications for Construction.

   Excavated soils may be used as backfill if considered suitable material by the Engineer.
Otherwise, backfill shall be Granular Material Class III.

    1. Station. Station construction shall be steel with a minimum wall thickness of 3/8" and shall be
designed for H-20 loading. All mill scale, rust, weld flux and other foreign matter shall be removed
from all steel surfaces by sandblasting to SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) SP-10
specification for near-white blast cleaning. Surface irregularities shall be removed by grinding.
Exterior and interior surfaces shall be coated with coatings and by procedures approved by the
Steel Tank Institute for underground steel tanks. The coating shall be self priming, chemically
cured, and either catalyzed epoxy or polyurethane material. The coating shall have superior
adhesion qualities and shall be highly resistant to disbonding. The coating shall be applied in a
single application to provide a minimum 16 mil dry film with no runs, sags or pinholes. Coating
damage due to shipping and handling shall be repaired. The basin shall be additionally protected
from corrosion by magnesium anodes attached to the basin and buried in the ground adjacent to
the basin.

   The station base shall be provided with means to anchor it to a concrete pad. The concrete pad
shall be of adequate size to withstand buoyant forces when station is completely submerged.

    The station access covers shall be heavy duty (designed for H-20 wheel loads) diamond plate
aluminum and constructed without projections that could be a tripping hazard. Covers shall be
painted with anti skid paint and shall be safety equipped with two stainless steel supports that lock
the cover open and require simultaneous release to lower. Cover shall be counterbalanced so one
person can easily open it. Door shall lock open in the 90 degree position. Each cover shall have a
provision for a pad-lock. The covers shall be sized as shown on the plans.

   Each cover shall be provided with a plastic placard that reads: Confined Space - Do Not Enter.
DES:PGF/Rev.                                      2 of 6                                  06-02-03


Placard shall be UV resistant; a minimum of 16" x 8" with lettering a minimum of 2" tall; with white
lettering on a red background; securely attached to the hatch cover with J-B Weld or similar
approved metal epoxy.

   The station shall be constructed so all maintenance and repair can be performed without
entering the sump pit.

    The valve chamber shall be provided with a floor drain to the wet well complete with stainless
steel grating and integral p-trap to prevent corrosive gases from entering the valve chamber.

   The wet well shall be provided with a 6-inch blind flange for a possible future vent.

    2. Piping. Station pipe and fittings shall be schedule 80 steel, schedule 80 PVC or ductile iron.
Schedule 80 steel pipe shall conform to ANSI/ASME B36.10 and B16.5. Schedule 80 PVC shall
conform to ASTM D 1785 with flanges meeting ANSI/ASME B16.5 (PVC flanges shall not be
solvent-welded). Ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 and ANSI/ASME
B16.42.

    Steel and ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be provided with a double-coat cement-mortar lining
in accordance with industry standards. Steel pipe shall be provided with an external bituminous
coating.

    An appropriately sized thermoplastic pipe grommet shall be field installed by the contractor in a
hole in the wet well wall to receive the inlet piping. The pipe grommet shall provide a mechanical
seal and shall not require any secondary sealing materials.

      “Link-seal” type modular, mechanical, interlocking, synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously
fill the annular space between the discharge pipe and wall sleeve shall be used to provide a
hydrostatic seal.

    3. Valves. Horizontal swing check valves shall be sized and installed as indicated on the plans.
The valve shall permit flow in one direction only and close tightly without slamming when the
discharge pressure exceeds the inlet pressure. The valve shall be provided with an outside lever
and spring. The valve in the full open position shall permit full flow through the valve equal to the
nominal pipe diameter. The valve body shall be of high quality cast iron construction, bronze fitted
with stainless steel hinge pins and with O-ring packing. Check valves shall have flanged fittings.
Valves shall meet the requirements of AWWA C 508.

    Eccentric plug valves shall be tight closing, resilient faced, non-lubricating and shall be
designed such that the plug rises off the body seat contact area immediately upon shaft rotation
during the opening movement. Valves shall be drop-tight at 175 psi. The valve plug shall rotate
approximately 90 degrees from the full-open to full-close position. The valve body and plug shall be
constructed of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B. Body ends shall be flanged with
dimensions, facing and drilling in conformance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125 (including flange
thickness). The entire plug shall be 100% encapsulated with Buna-N rubber. Shaft bearings, upper
and lower, shall be sleeve type metal bearings, sintered, oil impregnated and permanently
lubricated Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 743 Grade CF-8M. Eccentric plug
valves shall be Clow F5412, M&H 1820-02 or approved equal.
DES:PGF/Rev.                                    3 of 6                                       05-30-05


    All valves shall be set and jointed to the force main in the manner as specified for cleaning,
laying and jointing pipe of their type. All valves shall be installed in the position as shown on the
plans or as approved by the Engineer. Care should be taken to ensure the valve stems are plumb.

   4. Pumps. The submersible pumps shall conform to all applicable requirements of NEMA,
IEEE, NEC, SWPA and the Hydraulic Institute.

   The manufacturer of the pump shall assume full responsibility for the compatibility of the
supplied components with the application. The motor and pump shall be manufactured by one
company providing sole source responsibility for the warranty of the unit. Manufacturers who do not
manufacture the submersible motor and who limit their warranty to that of the motor manufacturer
shall not be acceptable.

    Major pump components shall be grey cast iron, ASTM A 48, Class 30 or 35B, with smooth
surfaces devoid of blow holes or other irregularities. All exposed nuts or bolts shall be AISI type 304
stainless steel construction.

  The pumps shall be submersible sewage pumps, and shall meet the operating point of 150
GPM at 80 feet TDH.

  The pumps shall be non-overloading over a range of 10 feet to 82 feet of total head, as
manufactured by ABS, Flygt, Hydromatic or approved equal. Pumps shall be explosion proof.
Pump speed shall not exceed 1800 RPM.

    Each pump shall be equipped with a two rail stainless steel guide rail system. Lifting devices
shall be either stainless steel cable or stainless steel chain. The pumps shall be automatically and
firmly connected to the discharge connection. Sealing of the pump to the discharge connection shall
be accomplished by a machined metal to metal watertight contact. Sealing of the discharge
interface with a diaphragm, O-ring or profile gasket will not be acceptable. No portion of the pump
shall bear directly on the sump floor. The pumps shall have discharge fittings enabling the pumps to
be removed and replaced from the sump without requiring cleaning of the sump or entering the pit.

    The pumps shall be equipped with 230 volt single phase motors. The motor shall be supplied
with heat sensing units attached to motor winding. The heat sensing unit shall trip the starter and
energize a red indicating light if the motor overheats.

   5. Electrical Control. Electrical control equipment shall meet NEMA standards.

    The operation of the pumps shall be controlled automatically by liquid level sensors, intrinsically
safe relays and magnetic motor starters. Magnetic motor starters shall be manufactured by Square
D or approved equal. Both pumps shall operate in an override condition.

    Four (4) liquid level sensors shall be provided: redundant off, pump off, pump on and
combination lag pump on and high level alarm. Sensors shall consist of a stainless steel mercury
switch mounted in a smooth, chemical-resistant, leak-proof and shock-proof casing, not sensitive to
rotation and shall be suspended on its own cable. Sensors shall be Conery 2900 series or approved
equal. The liquid-level sensor circuit shall be intrinsically safe in accordance with the National
Electrical Code, Class I, Division I, Group C and D.
DES:PGF/Rev.                                      4 of 6                                         05-30-05


   A circuit breaker shall be provided for each pump. The control circuit shall be 120 volts. A
control "power on" indicating light (color white) and a control circuit breaker shall be furnished. The
“power on” indicating light shall be installed on top of the exterior control panel.

   A hand-off-automatic selector switch and run light (color green) shall be supplied for each pump.
An alternator shall be supplied with a selector switch to operate on one pump in the event that one
pump is removed.

    In the event of stop level sensor malfunction, a redundant control sensor, installed below the
stop elevation, shall stop the pump and energize a red warning light (on top of the exterior control
panel). The pump shall start again on rising level while the red light stays energized until the
redundant reset button is pressed manually.

    A high water visual alarm system shall be supplied. The alarm circuit shall be fed from a
separate branch circuit, and shall include "power on" light, warning red light, alarm test button and
reset button. Additionally, the circuit shall light the red alarm light on top of the exterior control panel
(as does the redundant off sensor described above). The alarm and redundant shut off intrinsically
safe relays shall be on the control circuit.

    The control panel shall be housed in a NEMA Type 3R stainless steel, aluminum or fiberglass
enclosure with a drip shield and hinged door with neoprene gasket. The hinged outer door shall be
securely held closed with provisions for padlocking. All indicating lights, push buttons and selector
switches shall be mounted in the enclosure (except as indicated above). Power and control circuit
breakers shall not be mounted on the door. A lightning arrester, GFI receptacle and switch operated
maintenance light shall be installed in the control panel.

    An anode test station shall be installed next to the control panel on the same mounting.

    Intrinsically safe circuit devices and wiring shall be physically isolated from equipment and
wiring operating at line voltage.

    Control and power devices shall be identified, using the same identification shown on the wiring
diagram. Identification shall be shown on a plate mounted adjacent to, not on, the device.

    All disconnects and circuit breakers shall be heavy duty type rated at 600 volts. Magnetic motor
starter shall be furnished with thermal overload protection.

   All control relays, push buttons and selector switches shall be heavy duty industrial type. No
miniature type relays shall be used. All indicating lights shall be "push to test" type. All electrical
equipment shall be UL approved.

   All cables within the wet well portion of the station shall be intrinsically safe and shall be
continuous with no splices or terminal connections.

    A runtime meter shall be installed within the control panel. The runtime meter shall record the
length of time each pump operates, cumulatively adding up the operation time after each
successive use.
DES:PGF/Rev.                                   5 of 6                                       05-30-05

    The Contractor shall install a new two-pole circuit breaker sized for the load of the new pump
station and control circuit. The Contractor shall provide and install 4-1/C #4 cable in conduit from
the building to the new pump control panel.

    6. Operations and Maintenance Manuals. The prefabricated sewage pump station
supplier shall prepare a complete operations and maintenance (O&M) manual for the complete
sewage pump station. The O&M manual shall include routine maintenance requirements and
spare parts lists for each major item of equipment in the pump station. The names and
telephone numbers of companies where spare parts and/or trained service technicians are
available shall also be included for each item of equipment.

   7. Warranty. The Manufacturer shall warrant all items of his manufacture to be free of defects in
material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment from manufacturing plant
and make available to the purchaser a one year extension of the warranty.

    Manufacturer shall provide a written copy of the warranty terms with the operating manual for
the sewage pump station.

    c. Shop Drawings. The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of shop drawings to the Engineer
for review and approval in accordance with Section 104.02 of the Standard Specifications for
Construction. The prefabricated sewage pump station manufacturer shall prepare shop drawings for
the complete pump station including structural and opening details, equipment mounting and
location details and manufacturers’ cut sheets for each item of equipment in the pump station. Shop
drawings shall also be submitted for the control panel and external piping. The shop drawings shall
be submitted to the Engineer at least fifteen (15) working days prior to fabrication for review.
Fabrication shall not begin until written approval of the shop drawings are received from the
reviewing Engineer.

   The fabricator shall provide an affidavit sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State
of Michigan verifying that the prefabricated sewage pump station has been designed and
constructed to conform to all specifications contained herein and as detailed on the plans.

   It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to call attention to all deviations from the plans,
specifications and/or details. If deviations have not been clearly identified, they will not be
considered as part of the shop drawing approval.

   d. Construction. Excavation, backfill and compaction shall be in accordance with all applicable
sections of the MDOT Standard Specifications for Construction.

    1. Confined Space Entry. Prior to construction, the Contractor shall provide documentation of
their confined space entry program to the Engineer.

    2. Start-up. The Manufacturer or Manufacturer’s representative shall provide a technician to
supervise the installation and perform start-up and calibration of all equipment. The technician shall
conduct a training session at the time of start-up for the designated owner’s representative to
review the pump system operation, maintenance and adjustment.
DES:PGF/Rev.                                   6 of 6                                      05-30-05

   The complete sewage pump station shall operate without appreciable vibration throughout the
range of operating conditions. The unit shall be given a running test of normal start and stop
conditions under load.

     e. Measurement and Payment. The completed work will be paid for at the contract unit price
for the following contract item (pay item):

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                   Pay Unit

       Sewage Pump Station………………………………………………………..Lump Sum

    The item Sewage Pump Station shall be payment in full for all labor, equipment and materials
required to furnish an automatic duplex-type non-clog sewage pumping system. All excavation,
backfill, compaction, valve chamber with valves, wiring, electrical control panel, conduit seals,
circuit breaker, terminal box, conduit and cable from duplex control box to the system, conduit and
cable from the building, concrete base and connections and all other related work and materials
required for the completion of the sewage pump station shall not be paid for separately, but shall be
considered to have been included in the Sewage Pump Station pay item.
                                  MICHIGAN
                         DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                               SPECIAL PROVISION
                                      FOR
                          SEWAGE PUMP STATION REMOVAL

DES:PGF/Rev.                                1 of 1                             05/20/03
                                                               C&T:APPR:GC:JKG:06-03-02

   a. Description. This work shall consist of pump station equipment removal, excavation,
removing the sewage pump station, control panel and appurtenances, backfilling and
compaction as required or as specified herein. This shall include dewatering and sheeting
and/or bracing as required, disposal of waste materials and all labor and equipment
necessary to complete the work.

   b. Materials. Excavated soils may be used as backfill if considered suitable material by
the Engineer. Otherwise, backfill shall be Granular Material Class III.

   c. Construction. All work shall be done in accordance with Section 204 of the Michigan
Department of Transportation 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction and state and
county requirements.

    Prior to excavation, pumps, floats, valves and miscellaneous piping shall be removed
from the pump station as determined by the Engineer. Sewage shall be pumped out to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and properly disposed.

   All electrical wires and conduit, the outside junction box and electrical control panel shall
be removed.

    d. Measurement and Payment. The completed work will be paid for at the contract
unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                 Pay Unit

       Sewage Pump Station, Rem……………………………………………Lump Sum

   Sewage Pump Station, Remove shall be payment in full for all labor, equipment and
material necessary for the removal of the pump station and appurtenances. All excavation,
dewatering, sheeting and bracing, backfilling, compaction, disposal of surplus excavated
material, final cleanup and all other work and materials required for the completion of the
Sewage Pump Station, Remove will not be paid for separately, but shall be considered to
have been included in the Sewage Pump Station, Remove item.
                                  MICHIGAN
                         DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                  SPECIAL PROVISION
                                         FOR
                                   ABANDON WELL

DES:SJU:rev                                1 of 2                           05-18-06
                                                           C&T:APPR:JKG:DMG:08-10-01

   a. Description.- This work shall consist of plugging an existing drinking water well and
removing the existing pitless adapter and appurtenances at the location indicated on the
plans. The term plugging is defined as filling and sealing the well with an impervious
material.

  b. Materials.- All plugging materials shall conform to Michigan Department of
Environmental Quality (MDEQ) regulations.

  c. Construction Methods.- The abandoned well shall be properly filled and sealed to
prevent it from becoming a hazard or serving as a channel for contamination of the
groundwater.

Sealing of abandoned water wells shall be in accordance with Part 127, 1978 PA 368, as
amended (Michigan Public Health Code).

The well shall be abandoned by a Michigan registered water well drilling contractor. A
copy of the well driller’s registration shall be provided to the Project Engineer prior to
beginning abandonment and well plugging work.

The Contractor, together with the well driller, shall initially contact the Project Engineer,
then the Local County Health Department in order to coordinate inspection activities prior to
beginning work on the project. All abandoned wells shall be sealed using methods and
materials approved by the Michigan Department of Environmental Quality, the Local Health
Department, and the Project Engineer.


Abandoned water wells are to be cleared of obstructions before sealing operations begin in
order to insure an effective bottom-to-top seal. Obstruction removal activities including
removal of all debris, foreign materials, pumps, packers, seals, pitless adapter connections,
and drop pipes shall be performed by the registered water well driller.

Abandoned water well sealing shall be completed by the registered water well driller and
copies of the Abandoned Well Plugging Record (EQP 2044) shall be provided to the Project
Engineer, Local Health Department and MDEQ within 60 days upon completion of the well
plugging operation.
                                                   2 οφ 2

 d. Measurement and Payment.- The completed work as measured for ABANDON
WELL shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item).

       Pay Item                                                                            Pay Unit

       Water Well, Abandon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lump Sum

Water Well, Abandon shall be payment in full for all labor, equipment and materials
required to remove the pump, pitless adapter and appurtenances, and all related
miscellaneous items required for abandonment and backfilling of the water well area.
                                   MICHIGAN
                          DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                    SPECIAL PROVISION
                                           FOR
                                   SANITARY SEWER, PVC

DD/Urda/rev                                   1 of 4                               04-25-11
                                                                   C&T:APPR:JG:JTL 01-13-98

 a. Description.- This work shall consist of installing Sanitary Sewer of the Nominal
Diameter and Trench Detail as specified on the plans. This work shall include trench
excavation, dewatering, sheeting and/or bracing, backfilling, testing of the pipe, disposal of
waste materials, connections to existing systems, providing as-built plans and all labor and
related work necessary to complete the sewer installation.

 b. Materials.- Polyvinyl Chloride pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 3034
and shall have an SDR 26 (standard dimension ratio of 26). All pipe shall have a "home"
mark. Joints shall be of the elastomeric gasket water tight push-on type conforming to
ASTM D 3212. PVC fittings shall be full fittings conforming to ASTM D 3034 for pipe wall
thickness of SDR 26.

Sanitary manholes shall be in accordance with the Standard Specifications section 403, the
Standard Plan for Drainage Structures R-1(series), and as detailed. The sanitary manhole
cover shall be a bolted down cover Q as detailed.

 c. Construction Methods.- All work shall be done in accordance with sections 203, 206,
402 and 403 of the 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction and ASTM D2321, as
well as Federal, State and Local requirements.

Couplings, fittings, solvents and lubricants shall be as recommended by the pipe or fitting
manufacturer.

All sewer shall be subjected to air, infiltration or exfiltration tests or a combination of same,
prior to approval of the sanitary sewer. All sewer where the ground water level above the
top of the sewer is over 7 feet, shall be subjected to the infiltration test. All sewer, where the
ground water level above the top of the sewer is 7 feet or less, shall be subjected to the air
test or exfiltration test. If an exfiltration test is performed, the maximum exfiltration rate shall
be the same as that permitted from infiltration. For the purpose of exfiltration testing, the
internal water level shall be equal to the external water level plus 7 feet as measured from
the top of the pipe.

Where groundwater conditions require dewatering operations in order to construct the
sewer, the Contractor may, at his option, perform a preliminary air test after backfilling and
while the dewatering equipment is still operating. After dewatering operations have ceased
                                            2 of 4
and groundwater has stabilized at its normal level (7 feet or less above the sewer) and if
the preliminary air test was satisfactory, the preliminary air test may be accepted as final to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The maximum allowable infiltration shall not exceed 100 gallons per inch of diameter per
mile of pipe per 24 hours for any individual run between manholes.
_____________________________________________________________________
            MAXIMUM SANITARY SEWER INFILTRATION (EXFILTRATION)
                  ALLOWABLE BASED ON 100 GALLONS PER INCH
                          PER MILE OF PIPE PER 24 HOURS
____________________________________________________________________

                                    4" = 0.00315 gal/ft/hr
                                    6" = 0.00475 gal/ft/hr
                                    8" = 0.00630 gal/ft/hr
                                   10" = 0.00790 gal/ft/hr
                                   12" = 0.00950 gal/ft/hr
                                   15" = 0.01180 gal/ft/hr

Air Test: The sanitary sewers shall be tested by applying an air pressure test described
herein. Methods of testing and measurement other than specified herein shall be approved
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all equipment and labor
for the air testing. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide the following equipment for performing the sanitary sewer air
tests: Portable air compressor, standard air hose, one single and one triple connection
pneumatic sewer plug, one hand air pump, stopwatch and one air gauge, range 0-30 psig
graduated in tenths from 0 to 10 psig. The Contractor shall test the pneumatic plugs in the
presence of the Engineer prior to actual line testing in the following manner: One length of
sewer pipe shall be laid on the ground and sealed at both ends with pneumatic plugs to be
checked; air shall be introduced into the pipe until the pipe pressure reaches 15 psig. The
pneumatic plugs being checked shall hold against this pressure without bracing being
needed, and without movement of the plugs out of the pipe. All pneumatic plugs shall pass
the qualifications before being used to test the actual installation.

The Contractor shall clean the pipe removing all debris prior to air testing.

Test Procedures: Immediately following the pipe cleaning, low pressure air shall be
introduced into the sealed line until the internal air pressure reaches 3.5 psi greater than
the average hydrostatic pressure of any groundwater that may be over the pipe. At least
two (2) minutes shall be allowed for the air pressure to stabilize.

The portion of the line being tested shall be accepted if the portion under the test meets or
exceeds the requirements of ASTM F 1417-92. This requirement shall be accomplished by
                                           3 of 4
performing the test as follows: The time required in minutes for the pressure to decrease
from 3.5 to 2.5 psig greater than the average back pressure of any groundwater that may
be over the pipe shall not be less than the time shown for the given diameters in the table
shown below. If the system does not meet the requirements mentioned above, the
Contractor will be required to locate and repair the leaks at no extra cost and repeat the
tests until the allowable leakage is obtained.

                                 AIR TEST TABLE
                        TEST TIME FOR VARIOUS PIPE SIZES

                                  MIN ALLOW TIME FOR 1.0 psig
                     PIPE
                                         PRESSURE DROP
                     SIZE
                                      (use greater of two values)
                                 Min time          Time for Length (L)
                    inches
                                  Min:s            per 100’in minutes
                        4         3:46                   0.380L
                        6         5:40                   0.854L
                                             OR
                        8         7:34                   1.520L
                       10         9:26                   2.374L
                       12         11:20                  3.418L
                       15         14:10                  5.342L

Video Inspection: Perform video inspection in accordance with Section 402.03.K of the
2003 Standard Specifications for Construction, for all diameter pipe (including those smaller
than 36 inches in diameter).

Mandrel Testing: Perform mandrel testing in accordance with Section 402.03.C.1 of the
2003 Standard Specifications for Construction. Except conduct the mandrel testing 30 days
after the pipe has been installed, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

As-Built Drawings: The Contractor shall provide as-built drawings of the sanitary sewer to
the Engineer. The cost of this is considered included in the cost of the sanitary sewer.
Acceptable as-built drawings include (but are not limited to) pipe size, pipe locations,
manholes, tees, tie-ins and cleanouts. Sanitary sewer work shall not be considered
complete, and payment may be withheld, until acceptable as-built drawings have been
provided to the Engineer.


 d. Measurement and Payment.- The completed work, as measured for SANITARY
SEWER, PVC, will be paid for at the contract unit prices for the following contract items
(pay items).
                                                    4 of 4
       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                        Pay Unit

       San Sewer, PVC, __ inch, Tr Det __ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foot

       San Structure, __ inch dia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Each

       San Structure, Rem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Each



Sanitary Sewer, PVC of the sizes and Trench Details specified, will be measured in place
per Foot along the centerline of the pipe. The price shall include payment in full for
furnishing all excavation and backfill, all material, labor, and equipment required to perform
the work specified herein and shown on the plans, including pumping to maintain sanitary
service, locating and connecting to existing service leads, dewatering (trench and/or pipe),
all testing, furnishing and installing all premium joints, bracing or sheeting, blocking and all
other miscellaneous items necessary for the installation of the pipe. Also, additional costs
due to working weekends, holidays and off-peak hours are included in the price.

Sanitary Structures shall be measured as Drainage Structures in accordance with sections
203 and 403 of the Standard Specifications and paid for at the contract unit prices for the
above pay items. Sanitary Structure covers shall be measured and paid for as Drainage
Structure Covers.

Sanitary Structures, Remove will be measured as Drainage Structure, Remove in
accordance with sections 203 and 403 of the Standard Specifications and paid for at the
contract unit prices for the above pay items.

Video inspection, mandrel testing and integrity testing are all considered as included in the
contract unit price for Sanitary Sewer.

Payment for all material, labor and equipment necessary to remedy an unsatisfactory test,
including removing and replacing any backfill, shall be considered as included in the
contract unit price for Sanitary Sewer.

As-built plans are included in the cost of the Sanitary Sewer and Structures. Payment may
be withheld until the as-built plans have been deemed acceptable by the Engineer.
                                          MICHIGAN
                                 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                               SPECIAL PROVISION
                                                      FOR
                                                FLAG POLE LIGHT

DES:RJZ                                                      1 of 1                              REVISED: 05-16-05
                                                                                         C&T:APPR:JKG:EMB:07-08-02

   a. Description. This item shall consist of furnishing the labor, materials and equipment
required to install a flag pole light.

     b. Materials. The Contractor shall provide a 26 Watt LED tight spot light to be mounted on top
of the 16' Square Aluminum Light Standard. The light fixture shall be made of heavy duty die cast
aluminum with an impact resistant clear acrylic lens with silicone gasket. The fixture shall be wired
for 120 volts, shall be water proof, and shall be provided in dark bronze textured powder coated
polyester finish. The light fixture shall be similar to Energy Focus Catalog number LEDLS-765-
SPT-26-HWD-AB- LEDLS-SLPFTTR-NPT. The fixture shall have a yoke mount to be installed on a
slipfitter.

The contractor shall provide a pole mounted tee suitable for two flag pole light fixtures that can be
mounted on a tenon on top of a light standard. The pole mounted tee shall be dark bronze.

    c. Construction Methods. The Flag Pole Light fixture shall be mounted on top of the 16'
Square Aluminum Light Standard. A post mounted yoke shall be provided to make aiming of the
flagpole light fixture possible. The Contractor shall provide and install two extra #12 cables and an
extra in-line fuse holder in the 16' Square Aluminum Light Standard to feed the Flag Pole Light.

    d. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measure for Flag Pole Light will be
paid for at the contract unit price for the following pay item:

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                                          Pay Unit

       Flag Pole Light ............................................................................................................Each

    Flag Pole Light includes payment in full for furnishing and installing the complete light fixture,
including lamp, pole top mounting bracket, slipfitter, and yoke, and associated hardware and wiring.
                                                                                                      03DS819(D495)


                                        MICHIGAN
                               DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                          SPECIAL PROVISION
                                                 FOR
                                        LIGHT STANDARD SHAFT

DES:RJZ                                                  1 of 1                 C&T:APPR:RJZ:DBP:08-11-10

    a. Description. The of work consists of furnishing the materials, equipment and labor for the
installation of new light standards. This item of work must meet subsection 819.01 of the Standard
Specifications for Construction.

   b. Materials. Light Standards must be aluminum.

       1. Shafts. Shafts must be as specified on the detailed plans.

      2. Handhole. Each standard must have a reinforced handhole with a locking cover and a
   grounding nut or lug located inside the shaft easily accessible from the handhole.

     3. Hardware. All threaded fasteners and lockwashers used to secure parts to the shaft
   must be AISI Series 300 Stainless Steel.

   c. Construction. Light standards must meet the requirements of subsection 819.03.F of the
Standard Specifications for Construction.

      1. Light Standard Shaft, Square. Light standard shaft must be understood as furnishing
   and installing a light standard shaft (of the length specified) on the specified light standard
   foundation.

      2. Shipping. All shafts must meet subsection 819.03.F.2 of the Standard Specifications for
   Construction.

    d. Measurement and Payment. The completed work, as described, will be measure and paid
for at the contract unit price using the following contract items (pay items):

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                                  Pay Unit

       Light Std Shaft, Square, 16 foot ..................................................................................Each
       Light Std Shaft, Square, 30 foot ..................................................................................Each

Light Std Shaft, Square, 16 foot includes payment for providing all labor, equipment and materials
required to install the light standard shaft on the specified light standard foundation.

Light Std Shaft, Square, 30 foot includes payment for providing all labor, equipment and materials
required to install the light standard shaft on the specified light standard foundation.
                                   MICHIGAN
                          DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                     SPECIAL PROVISION
                                            FOR
                                      LUMINAIRES – LED

DES:RJZ                                        1 of 2              C&T:APPR:JKG:GCT:04-15-04

    a. Description. This work shall consist of furnishing the labor and equipment necessary to
install luminaires. Luminaires shall be new as specified on the plans.

   b. Materials. Luminaire – LED - Luminaires shall be as specified on the detailed drawings.

100 Watt luminaires shall be light emitting diodes operating at 120 volts, have a color temperature
of 6000K, a drive current of 350mA and provide 6,500 initial lumens at 90 Watts. The fixture shall
be cast aluminum, dark bronze in color, provided with a fuse, and shall be UL listed for wet
locations. The fixture shall have an integral, weather-tight LED driver compartment with high
performance aluminum heatsinks. The fixture shall have a mounting arm of die cast aluminum that
mounts directly to the pole. The light pattern shall be IES type III.

250 Watt luminaires shall be light emitting diodes operating at 120 volts, have a color temperature
of 6000K, a drive current of 350mA and provide 16,000 initial lumens at 250 Watts. The fixture
shall be cast aluminum, dark bronze in color, provided with a fuse, and shall be UL listed for wet
locations. The fixture shall have an integral, weather-tight LED driver compartment with high
performance aluminum heatsinks. The fixture shall have a mounting arm of die cast aluminum that
mounts directly to the pole. The light pattern shall be IES type III.


   c. Construction Methods.

       1. General. All new installations shall have LED luminaires sized as shown on the plans.
          The candlepower distribution shall be in accordance with the Current National Standard
          Practice for Roadway Lighting.

           Luminaires shall be individually packed for shipment in such a way as to insure arrival at
           their destination in an undamaged condition.

       2. Submittals. A drawing showing general diagram of unit, indicating how it is to be
          assembled and installed, shall be provided.

       3. Installation. The luminaries shall be leveled to give optimum designed light distribution
          on the roadway.

           The luminaire reflector and glassware shall be clean after installation. Cleaning, if
           required, shall be done in accordance with the luminaire manufacturer's
           recommendations.
DES:RJZ                                         2 of 2                                       04-15-04


   d. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measure will be paid for at the
contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                              Pay Unit

       Luminaire, LED, 100 Watt…………………………........................................................Each
       Luminaire, LED, 250 Watt…………………………........................................................Each

    Luminaire, LED, 100 Watt of the type specified, will be measured as a unit and shall be paid
for at the contract unit price each, which price shall be payment in full for furnishing and installing
the complete luminaire, including the associated hardware and wiring.

    Luminaire, LED, 250 Watt of the type specified, will be measured as a unit and shall be paid
for at the contract unit price each, which price shall be payment in full for furnishing and installing
the complete luminaire, including the associated hardware and wiring.
                                          MICHIGAN
                                 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                               SPECIAL PROVISION
                                                      FOR
                                                OUTDOOR OUTLET

DES:RJZ                                                      1 of 1                      C&T:APPR:JKG:GCT:04-15-04

    a. Description. The Contractor shall furnish and install a weatherproof electrical outdoor
outlet.

   b. Materials. The outdoor outlet shall consist of a NEMA 3R or 4 enclosure with a closing cap
and provisions for locking. The enclosure shall be large enough to house the following:

       ITEM                                      DESCRIPTION                                                    QUANTITY
       Duplex                                    20 amp, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire                                    2
       receptacles                               grounding
       GFCI circuit                              20 amp, 1 pole, GFCI circuit breakers                                     2
       breakers

   The receptacles shall be bakelite composition, specification grade, by Hubbell, Square D,
Bryant or General Electric Company.

    c. Construction. The outlet shall be located as shown on the plans. The Contractor shall also
furnish the necessary hardware and miscellaneous items to complete the item. Contractor shall
perform all excavating, trenching, backfilling and disposal required for the installation of the
underground work in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Construction.

   d. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measure will be paid for at the
contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                                          Pay Unit

       Outdoor Outlet.............................................................................................................Each

   Outdoor Outlet includes payment in full for all material, labor and equipment required to furnish
and install the item as described above and as shown on the plans.
                                        MICHIGAN
                               DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                             SPECIAL PROVISION
                                                    FOR
                                              UTILITY SERVICE

DES:RJZ                                                  1 of 1                         REVISED: 03-15-04
                                                                                C&T:APPR:JAR:GEN 04-01-99

     a. Description.-This work consists of arranging for and paying fees for providing the
utility service(s) for this project. The Contractor shall make application to the company(s)
listed below, in the name of the Michigan Department of Transportation. The Engineer will
sign all application forms and must approve all final details and costs of the utility feed(s).

   b. Requirements.-As soon as the contract is awarded, the Contractor shall contact the
company representative(s) in order to have all utility service(s) operational within the
established time frame. No additional payment shall be allowed the Contractor due to any
delay caused by the utility feed(s) not being completed.

   Telephone                                            Electrical Service
   CONTACT PERSON                                       CONTACT PERSON
   Keith Belonga                                        Derrick Rosenberger
   COMPANY NAME                                         COMPANY NAME
   MDOT                                                 Consumers Energy
   425 W. Ottawa                                        ADDRESS
   P.O. Box 30050                                       1125 W. Green St.
   Lansing, MI 48933                                    Hastings, Mi 49058
   PHONE NUMBER                                         PHONE NUMBER
   (517)243-3908                                        (269) 948-3506

    c. Measurement and Payment.-A budgeted amount has been included in the contract
for this work. The cost of arranging the telephone service is estimated to be $ 15,000. The
cost of arranging the electrical service is estimated to be $ 10,000. The Contractor will be
reimbursed for all payments made to a utility company to establish required service. The
Contractor must submit a paid invoice to the Engineer before reimbursement is made.

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                        Pay Unit

       Utility, Telephone................................................................................ Dollar
       Utility, Elec.......................................................................................... Dollar
Job Number:   101616

User:         BOKOVOYJ

Last Saved:   April 26, 2011 at 09:14:38

Generated:    April 26, 2011 at 09:14:38

                    03T803(016) - SIDEWALK BRICKWORK - Use in projects that include sidewalks with brickwork. Use
    03T803(016)     with pay item: Sidewalk, Brickwork, Square Foot and/or Sidewalk, Brickwork, Rem., Square Foot


                    03T804(026) - SIGN SUPPORT FOUNDATION, CONC BARRIER, SPECIAL, TRUSS TYPE C - Use with
    03T804(026)     pay item: Sign Support Fdn, Conc Barrier, Special, Truss Type C, Each


                    03T810(006) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE C - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
    03T810(006)     Connection, Conc, Type C, Each


                    03T810(007) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE D - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
    03T810(007)     Connection, Conc, Type D, Each


                    03T810(008) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE E - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
    03T810(008)     Connection, Conc, Type E, Each


                    03T810(036) - CANTILEVER, TYPE J - Use with pay item: Cantilever, Type J, Each
    03T810(036)

                    03T810(054) - PERFORATED STEEL SQUARE TUBE SIGN BREAKAWAY SYSTEM - Use with pay
    03T810(054)     item: Perforated Steel Square Tube Sign Breakaway System, Each


                    03T810(126) - GLARE SCREEN CONN, CONC, PERFORATED STEEL SQUARE TUBE - Use with pay
    03T810(126)     item: Glare Screen Conn, Conc, Perforated Steel Square Tube, Each


                    03T810(136) - MEDIAN BARRIER CONN, CONC, PERFORATED STEEL SQUARE TUBE - Use with
    03T810(136)     pay item: Median Barrier Conn, Conc, Perforated Steel Square Tube, Each


                    03T810(172) - POST, WOOD, REM - Use with pay item: Post, Wood, Rem, Each
    03T810(172)

                    03T810(204) - SIGN, TYPE IIIB, (MODIFIED) - Use with pay item: Sign, Type IIIB, (Modified), Square
    03T810(204)     Foot


                    03T810(286) - MAST ARM, REM - Use in all traffic signal projects required to remove a mast arm. Use
    03T810(286)     with pay item: Mast Arm, Rem, Each


                    03T810(287) - MAST ARM STANDARD, REM - Use with pay item: Mast Arm Std, Rem, Each
    03T810(287)

                    03T810(300) - TRUSS TYPE E - Use with pay item: Truss, Type E, _____ Foot, Each
    03T810(300)

                    03T810(320) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE A1 - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
    03T810(320)     Connection, Conc, Type A1, Each
              03T810(321) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE A2 - Use with pay item:Bridge Sign
03T810(321)   Connection, Conc, Type A2, Each


              03T810(322) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, STEEL, TYPE A1 - Use with pay item:Bridge Sign
03T810(322)   Connection, Steel, Type A1, Each


              03T810(324) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, STEEL, MODIFIED TYPE B - Use with pay item: Bridge
03T810(324)   Sign Connection, Steel, Modified Type B, Each


              03T810(325) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, STEEL, MODIFIED TYPE F - Use with pay item: Bridge
03T810(325)   Sign Connection, Steel, Modified, Type F, Each


              03T810(326) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, STEEL, TYPE G - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(326)   Connection, Steel, Type G, Each


              03T810(327) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, STEEL, TYPE H - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(327)   Connection, Steel, Type H, Each


              03T810(328) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, STEEL, TYPE I - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(328)   Connection, Steel, Type I, Each


              03T810(329) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, STEEL, TYPE J - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(329)   Connection, Steel, Type J, Each


              03T810(330) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE K - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(330)   Connection, Conc, Type K, Each


              03T810(331) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE L - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(331)   Connection, Conc, Type L, Each


              03T810(332) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE M - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(332)   Connection, Conc, Type M, Each


              03T810(333) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE O - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(333)   Connection, Conc, Type O, Each


              03T810(334) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE P - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(334)   Connection, Conc, Type P, Each


              03T810(335) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE Q - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(335)   Connection, Conc, Type Q, Each


              03T810(336) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE R - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(336)   Connection, Conc, Type R, Each


              03T810(337) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE S - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(337)   Connection, Conc, Type S, Each


              03T810(338) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE T - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(338)   Connection, Conc, Type T, Each


              03T810(339) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE U - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(339)   Connection, Conc, Type U, Each


              03T810(340) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE V - Use with pay item: Bridge Sign
03T810(340)   Connection, Conc, Type V, Each
              03T810(341) - BRIDGE SIGN CONNECTION, CONC, TYPE W - Use with pay item:Bridge Sign
03T810(341)   Connection, Conc, Type W, Each


              03T810(343) - DRILLED SHAFT SIGN STRUCTURE FOUNDATION - Use with pay item: Fdn, Truss
03T810(343)   Sign Structure Type _____ inch Dia, _____, Foot and Fdn, Cantilever Sign Structure Type ____, ____
              inch Diam, _____, Foot


              03T810(A10) - REMOVAL - OVERHEAD SIGN SUPPORT FROM CONCRETE MEDIAN BARRIER - Use
03T810(A10)   in projects requiring signing that include removal of all overhead sign supports mounted partially or fully
              within a concrete median barrier or similar concrete structure. Add 7000 pay item: Removal - Overhead
              Sign Support from Concrete Median Barrier, Each


              03T810(A20) - INSTALL STOP SIGN LOUVER - Use in projects requiring signing that include STOP sign
03T810(A20)   louvers as shown on the plans and detailed in this provision. Add 7000 pay item: Install Stop Sign Louver
              , Each


              03T810(A30) - SIGN SUPPORT RETAINING WALL CONNECTION - Use in projects requiring signing
03T810(A30)   that include sign supports on retaining walls according to the details provided in the plans and as
              specified in this special provision. Add 7000 pay item: Retaining Wall Connection, Type W1, W2, W3 or
              W5, Each


              03T810(A40) - SIGN SUPPORT FDN, CONC BARRIER, TRUSS, MODIFIED - Use in projects requiring
03T810(A40)   signing that include median barrier truss foundations as shown on the plans and detailed in this special
              provision. Add 7000 pay item: Sign Support Fdn, Conc Barrier, Truss Type ______ , Modified, Each.


              03T810(A50) - CANTILEVER FOUNDATION, MODIFIED - Use in projects requiring signing that include
03T810(A50)   modified cantilever foundations as shown on the plans and detailed in this special provision. Add 7000
              pay item: Cantilever Fdn, Type _______ , Modified, Each.


              03T810(A60) - TRUSS CONNECTION, HANGER MOUNT, SIGN CONNECTION, WALL MOUNT - Use
03T810(A60)   in projects requiring signing that include truss and sign connections and in accordance with Standard
              Plan Series VIII-540M and Series VIII-550M except as modified herein. Add 7000 pay item: Truss
              Connection, Hanger Mount, Each and/or Sign Connection, Wall Mount, Each.


              03T810(A70) - TRUSS CONNECTION, WALL MOUNT, CANTILEVER CONNECTION, WALL MOUNT -
03T810(A70)   Use in projects requiring signing that include wall mounted end supports for overhead trusses and
              cantilevers and in accordinace with the MDOT Sign Support Typical Plans. Add 7000 pay item: Truss
              Connection, Wall Mount, Each and/or Cantilever Connection, Wall Mount, Each.


              03T810(A80) - TRUSS, TYPE C, MODIFIED 51' - 6" - Use in projects requiring signing that include Truss,
03T810(A80)   Type C modfied to a length of 51'-6" and in accordance with Standard Plan Series VIII-540E except as
              modified by the project plans. Add 7000 pay item: Truss, Type C, Modified, 51'-6", Each.


              03T810(A90) - TRUSS FOUNDATION ANCHOR BOLTS REPLACEMENT - Use in projects requiring
03T810(A90)   signing that include Truss Foundation Anchor Bolt replacement. Add 7000 pay item: Truss Fdn Anchor
              Bolts, Replace, Each.


              03T810(B20) - RETROREFLECTIVE SHEETING FOR PERMANENT TRAFFIC SIGNS - Use in all traffic
03T810(B20)   signing projects requiring permanent TYPE IV retroflective sheeting signs.


              03T810(B30) - ENTIRE REMOVAL OF OVERHEAD SIGN SUPPORT FOUNDATIONS - Use in all traffic
03T810(B30)   signing projects where complete removal of Overhead Sign Support (Truss and/or Cantilever)
              Foundations and Overhead Sign Support Foundations in Median Concrete Barrier Walls at location(s)
              specified on the plans, in the proposal or directed by the engineer. Add 7000 pay item: Fdn, Entire,
              Truss, Rem, Cubic Yard and Fdn, Entire, Cantilever, Rem, Cubic Yard


              03T811(A10) - RECESSING PAVEMENT MARKINGS - Use in all projects calling for recessing pavement
03T811(A10)   markings. Add 7000 pay item: Recessing Pavement Markings, Foot


              03TB811(A015) - APPLICATION OF OVERLAY COLD PLASTIC MARKINGS - 03TB811(A015) -
03T811(A15)   APPLICATION OF OVERLAY COLD PLASTIC MARKINGS - Use in the following TSC's: Traverse City,
              Cadillac, Kalamazoo, Marshall, Coloma, Jackson, Lansing and the Bay Region. The following
              Regions/TSC's do not want the special provision added: Metro, Grand and Superior Regions, Alpena,
              Grayling and Brighton TSC's. Use of this Special Provision is optional on Local Agency projects.
               03T811(A20) - THERMOPLASTIC SNOWMOBILE CROSSING - Use in all projects calling for
03T811(A20)    thermoplastic snowmobile crossing on bituminous roadways. Add 7000 pay item: Pavt Mrkg, Thermopl,
               Snowmobile Crossing, Square Foot


               03T811(A30) - WET RETROREFLECTIVE PREFORMED PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE - Use in all
03T811(A30)    projects calling for wet retroreflective preformed pavement marking tape. Add 7000 pay item: Pavt
               Mrkg,Wet Reflective Tape, ____ inch, (color), Foot


               03T811(A35) - BLACK PREFORMED PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE - Use in all projects that include
03T811(A35)    furnishing and installing black preformed pavement marking "shadow" tape. Add 7000 pay item:
               Preformed Shadow Tape, __ inch, Black, Foot


               03T811(A50) - RAISED THERMOPLASTIC RUMBLE STRIPS - Use in all projects calling for
03T811(A50)    thermoplastic rumble strips. Add 7000 pay item: Pavt Mrkg, Thermopl, Rumble Strip, Foot


               03T811(A60) - WET REFLECTIVE POLYUREA PAVEMENT MARKINGS - Use in all projects calling for
03T811(A60)    wet night retro reflectorized polyurea pavement marking lines. Add 7000 pay item: Pavt Mrkg, Wet
               Reflective Polyurea, ____ inch, (color), Foot


               03T811(A70) - LANE SEPARATOR SYSTEM - Use in all projects calling for a prefabricated Lane
03T811(A70)    Separator System. Add 7000 pay item: Lane Separator System, Foot


               03T811(A80) - MODIFIED URETHANE PAVEMENT MARKINGS - Use in all projects calling for modified
03T811(A80)    urethane pavement markings including lines, legends, symbols, crosswalks and stop bars. Add 7000 pay
               item: Pavt Mrkg, Modified Urethane, (symbol or legend), Each, and/or Pavt Mrkg, Modified
               Urethane,____ inch, Crosswalk, Foot and/or Pavt Mrkg, Modified Urethane,____ inch, Stop Bar, Foot
               and/or Pavt Mrkg, Modified Urethane,____ inch, Cross Hatch (color), Foot and/or Pavt Mrkg, Modified
               Urethane,____ inch, (color), Foot


               03T812(200) - TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS AND STREET LIGHTING (PORTABLE POWER
03T812(200)    SOURCE) - Use in all traffic signal projects requiring a Portable Power Source to operate temporary
               traffic signals and lighting facilities. Use with pay item:TS System-Oper, Temp (Portable Power Source),
               Lump Sum


               03T812(215) - TEMPORARY PORTABLE TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEM - Use with pay item: TS System,
03T812(215)    Portable, Temp, Furn, Each and TS System, Portable, Temp, Oper, Each


               03T812(A010) - TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIER ENDING DETAIL - Use in all projects calling for
03T812(A010)   Temporary Concrete Barrier Ending, Detail 1-5. Use with 7000 pay item: Temp Attenuator, Furn, Each,
               Temp Attenuator, Oper., Each, Temp Attenuator, Adj and Relocated, Each. Requires use of WZD150
               and WZD175 Special Details.


               03T812(A05) - WORK ZONE PAVEMENT MARKING SYSTEM, TYPE R - Use on construction projects
03T812(A05)    where wet night reflective work zone pavement marking system,type R is called for. Add 7000 pay item:
               Work Zone Pavement Marking System,Type R (color), Foot


               03T812(A20) - TEMPORARY RUMBLE STRIPS (Orange) - Use in all projects calling for temporary
03T812(A20)    rumble strips. Add 7000 pay item: Temporary Rumble Strips (Orange), Foot


               03T812(A30) - TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKING, TYPE R, BLACK OR GRAY TAPE - Use in all
03T812(A30)    projects calling for temporary pavement marking, Type R, preformed black tape. Add 7000 pay item:
               Pavt Mrkg, Type R, _ inch, (color) Temp, Foot


               03T819(001) - BRACKET ARM, CLAMP ON - Use with pay item: Bracket Arm, Clamp On, _ Foot, with _
03T819(001)    Foot Rise, Each and Bracket Arm, Clamp On, Rem, Each


               03T819(255) - HANDHOLE, SQUARE, 4 FOOT - Use with pay item: Hh, Square, 4 Foot, Each
03T819(255)

               03T819(259) - HANDHOLE, ROUND, 3 FOOT DIAMETER - Use with pay item: Hh, Round, 3 foot Dia.,
03T819(259)    Each
              03T819(418) - CABLE, SEC, TRIPLEX, 1, 3/C #4 - Use with pay item: Cable, Sec, Triplex, 1, 3/C #4,
03T819(418)   Foot


              03T819(420) - COMMUNICATIONS CABLE - Use in all traffic signal projects requiring hardwire traffic
03T819(420)   signal interconnect. Use with pay item: Cable, Shielded, 300V, 1, 6 Twisted Pair #16, Intercn, Feet


              03T819(511) - CONCRETE POLE, FIT UP, TS CABLE POLE - Use in all traffic signal projects required to
03T819(511)   fit up a concrete cable pole. Use with pay item: Conc Pole, Fit Up, TS Cable Pole, Each


              03T819(516) - STEEL POLE, FIT UP, TS CABLE POLE - Use with pay item: Steel Pole, Fit Up, TS Cable
03T819(516)   Pole, Each


              03T819(601) - CONDUIT, DIRECTIONAL BORE, (number), __ Inch - Use in all traffic signal projects that
03T819(601)   include Conduit, Directional Bore. Use with pay item: CONDUIT, DIRECTIONAL BORE, (number), __
              Inch, Foot


              03T819(608) - CONDUIT, JACKED BORED, (number), _ Inch. Use with pay item: Conduit, Jacked
03T819(608)   Bored, (number), _ inch, Foot


              03T819(A10) - DEWATERING (BJ-4) - Use in all traffic signal projects requiring controlling large volumes
03T819(A10)   of ground water from entering the excavation area for traffic signal pole foundations.


              03T819(A20) - CASING BACKFILL (BJ-5) - Use in all traffic signal projects requiring casings greater than
03T819(A20)   12 inches in diameter.


              03T820(002) - POLE GUY - Use with pay item: Pole Guy, Each
03T820(002)

              03T820(015) - 24 x 30 INCH DISAPPEARING LEGEND CASE SIGN - Use in all traffic signal projects
03T820(015)   requiring a 24 x 30 disappearing legend (fiber optic) one-way case sign. Use with pay item: Case Sign,
              Disappearing Legend, 24 inch by 30 inch, Each


              03T820(017) - LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) CHANGEABLE MESSAGE CASE SIGN - Use with pay
03T820(017)   item: Case Sign (LED), Changeable Message, (number) Way, 24 inch by 30 inch, Each


              03T820(021) - LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED CASE SIGN - Use with pay
03T820(021)   item: Case Sign (LED), (number) Way, ___ inch by ___ inch, Each and Case Sign (LED), (number) Way,
              __ inch by __ inch, Retrofit Assembly, Each


              03T820(027) - CONDUIT REPAIR - Use with pay item: Conduit Repr, Under Pavt, Foot, and/or Conduit
03T820(027)   Repr, Under Sidewalk or Earth, Foot


              03T820(030) - CONTROLLER AND CABINET, REM - Use with pay item: Controller and Cabinet, Rem.,
03T820(030)   Each


              03T820(031) - 24 - 48 CIRCUIT DIGITAL NEMA TYPE TRAFFIC CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY - Use with
03T820(031)   pay item: Controller and Cabinet, Digital Type, Each and/or Controller and Cabinet, Digital Type,
              Delivered, Each and/or Controller and Cabinet, Digital Type, Master, Each and/or Controller and Cabinet,
              Digital Type, Master, Delivered, Each


              03T820(035) - 4 OR 16 PHASE DIGITAL ACTUATED NEMA TYPE TRAFFIC CONTROLLER
03T820(035)   ASSEMBLY - Use with pay item: Controller and Cabinet, Solid State Actuated, Each and/or Controller
              and Cabinet, Solid State Actuated, Delivered, Each


              03T820(037) - CONTROLLER AND CABINET, SALV - Use with pay item: Controller and Cabinet, Salv,
03T820(037)   Each


              03T820(040) - SOLID-STATE, PRETIMED, INTERVAL ORIENTED TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLERS -
03T820(040)   Use with pay item: Controller and Cabinet, Solid State, TBC, Each and/or Controller and Cabinet, Solid
              State, TBC, Delivered, Each
               03T820(045) - CONTROLLER FOUNDATION, BASE MOUNT - Use with pay item: Controller Fdn, Base
03T820(045)    Mount, Each


               03T820(0450) - TRAFFIC SIGNAL, BAG AND UNBAG - Use in all projects when required to cover (bag)
03T820(0450)   or remove (unbag) a traffic or pedestrian signal face assembly or a case sign face to accommodate
               maintaining traffic requirements. Use with pay item TS, Bag, Each and/or TS, Bag, Rem, Each


               03T820(046) - CONTROLLER FOUNDATION, REM - Use with pay item: Controller Fdn, Rem, Each
03T820(046)

               03T820(050) - SOLID-STATE FIXED TIME TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLERS - Use in all traffic signal
03T820(050)    projects requiring temporary solid-state pretimed fixed traffic signal controllers. Use with pay item:
               Controller, TS, Each


               03T820(051) - GPS TIME SYNCHRONIZATION MODULE - Use with Pay Item: GPS Module, Each
03T820(051)    and/or GPS Module, Rem, Each


               03T820(053) - GUY, REMOVAL - Use in all traffic signal projects required to remove anchor, strut or pole
03T820(053)    guys. Use with pay item: Guy, Rem, Each


               03T820(060) - EXPLORATORY TRENCHING - SIGNALS- Use with pay item: Exploratory Trenching for
03T820(060)    Signal Cable, Foot


               03T820(069) - SOLID-STATE FLASHING BEACON CONTROLLER AND CABINET, SALV - Use with
03T820(069)    pay item: Flsh Beacon, Controller and Cabinet, Solid State, Salv, Each


               03T820(070) - SOLID-STATE FLASHING BEACON CONTROLLER AND CABINET - Use with pay item:
03T820(070)    Flsh Beacon, Controller and Cabinet, Solid State, Each


               03T820(071) - SOLAR POWER FLASHING BEACON, SINGLE OR DUAL - Use with pay item: Flsh
03T820(071)    Beacon, Solar Power, Each; Flsh Beacon, Solar Power, Rem, Each; Flsh Beacon, Solar Power, Dual,
               Each; Flsh Beacon, Solar Power, Dual, Rem, Each


               03T820(090) - METERED SERVICE - Use with pay item: Metered Serv, Each and/or Metered Serv,
03T820(090)    Rem, Each


               03T820(A010) - TRAFFIC SIGNAL WORK - Use in all projects that include traffic signal work.
03T820(0A10)

               03T820(106) - PEDESTAL FOUNDATION, REM - Use with pay item: Pedestal Fdn, Rem, Each
03T820(106)

               03T820(111)-PEDESTAL, UNDER GROUND SERVICE - Use with pay item: Pedestal, Underground
03T820(111)    Serv,_, Each; Pedestal Underground Serv, Rem, Each


               03T820(115) - POWER CO. (EST. COST TO CONTRACTOR) - Use with pay item: Power Co. (Est. Cost
03T820(115)    to Contractor), Dollar


               03T820(123) - PUSHBUTTON PEDESTAL, ALUM - Use with pay item: Pushbutton Pedestal, Alum,
03T820(123)    Each and Pushbutton Pedestal, Rem, Each


               03T820(136) - SERVICE DISCONNECT, REM. - Use in all traffic signal projects required to remove the
03T820(136)    service disconnect switch. Use with pay item: Serv Disconnect, Rem, Each


               03T820(138) - SERVICE DISCONNECT, SALV - Use with pay item: Serv Disconnect, Salv, Each
03T820(138)
              03T820(145) - STEEL POLE, REM - Use with pay item: Steel Pole, Rem, Each
03T820(145)

              03T820(146) - STEEL POLE, REM (EMBEDDED) - Use in all traffic signal projects that include Steel
03T820(146)   Pole removal including embedded foundation. Use with pay item: Steel Pole, Rem (Embedded), Each


              03T820(176) - TRAFFIC SIGNAL, 4TH LEVEL ARROW, REM - Use with pay item: TS, 4th Level Arrow,
03T820(176)   Rem, Each


              03T820(183) - SYSTEM MASTER, ON STREET, DELIVERED - Use in all traffic signal projects requiring
03T820(183)   a on-street system Master controller. Use with pay item: System Master, On St., Delivered, Each


              03T820(184) - CABINET, REM. - Use in all traffic signal projects required to remove a cabinet. Use with
03T820(184)   pay item: Cabinet, Rem, Each


              03T820(185) - RISER, REM - Use in all traffic signal projects requiring removal of riser pipe. Use with pay
03T820(185)   item: Riser, Rem, Each


              03T820(243) - ACCESSIBLE PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL SYSTEM - Use in all traffic signal projects that
03T820(243)   include remove or install of an Accessible Pedestrian Signal System. Use with pay item: Pedestrian
              Signal System, ____, ____, Each and Pushbutton Station, ____, Each


              03T820(247) - TS, LENS - Use with pay item TS, Lens, Each and/or TS, Lens, Rem, Each
03T820(247)

              03T820(250) - MAST ARM MOUNT SIGNAL BRACKET 1-WAY STAINLESS STEEL BAND MOUNT -
03T820(250)   Use with pay item: TS, One Way Mast Arm Mtd, Each


              03T820(260) - WARNING SIGN - Use in all traffic signal projects where flashing sign optical beacons are
03T820(260)   to be used. Use with pay item: Warning Sign, Each and/or Warning Sign, Rem, Each


              03T820(265) - SCHOOL SPEED LIMIT SIGN, REM AND SALV - Use with pay item: School Speed Limit
03T820(265)   Sign, Rem, Each and/or School Speed Limit Sign, Salv, Each


              03T820(270) - SIGN, CHANGEABLE MESSAGE, FIBER OPTIC, OPEN-CLOSED - Use with pay
03T820(270)   items:Sign, Changeable Message, Fiber Optic, Open-Closed, Each and/or Sign, Changeable Message,
              Fiber Optic, Open-Closed, Rem, Each and/or Sign, Changeable Message, Fiber Optic, Open-Closed,
              Salv., Each


              03T820(306) - LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) OPTICALLY PROGRAMMED TRAFFIC SIGNAL - Use
03T820(306)   with pay item: TS, _ Way _ Mtd (LED), Optic, Each and TS, _ Way _ Mtd, _ (LED), Optic, Each.


              03T820(313) - LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) VEHICLE TRAFFIC SIGNALS - Use in all traffic signal
03T820(313)   projects where (LED) traffic signals are mounted on span wire, mast arms, poles, pedestals, or warning
              signs. Use with pay item: TS, ____ Way ___ Mtd (LED)_____, Each and/or TS, 4th Level, ____(LED)
              _____, Each


              03T820(336) - LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) COUNTDOWN PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC SIGNALS - Use
03T820(336)   in all traffic signal projects that include installing Light Emitting Diode (LED) Countdown Pedestrian Traffic
              Signals in a traffic signal installation. Use with pay item: TS, Pedestrian, ____ Way ____ Mtd. (LED)
              Countdown, Each


              03T820(337) - LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC SIGNALS - Use in all traffic
03T820(337)   signal projects where (LED) pedestrian signals are mounted on poles or pedestals. Use with pay item:
              TS,Pedestrian, ___ Way ___Mtd (LED), Each


              03T820(369) - TS, ANTENNA, SALV - Use with pay item: TS, Antenna, Salv, Each
03T820(369)
              03T820(371) - TS, ANTENNA - Use with pay item: TS, Antenna, Each and/or TS, Antenna, Rem, Each
03T820(371)

              03T820(373) - SIGN OPTICAL - Use with pay item: Sign Optical (LED), Each and/or Sign Optical, Rem,
03T820(373)   Each


              03T820(374) - STEEL TRUSS ARMS - Use with pay item: Bracket, Truss, With __ Foot Arm, Each and/or
03T820(374)   Bracket, Truss, Rem, Each


              03T820(380) - VIDEO TRAFFIC DETECTION SYSTEM - Use with pay item: Video Traffic Detection
03T820(380)   ________, Each and/or Video Traffic Detection ________, Rem, Each


              03T820(385) - BRACKET, TRUSS, SALV - Use with pay item: Bracket, Truss, Salv, Ea
03T820(385)

              03T820(390)- WIRELESS INTERCONNECT FOR SIGN MOUNTED FLASHER - Use in all traffic signal
03T820(390)   projects that include install or remove a Wireless Interconnect to operate advance warning sign optical
              flashing beacons. Use with pay item: Wireless Intercn, Sign Mtd Flasher, ____, Each


              03T820(393) - WIRELESS INTERCONNECT FOR CLOSED LOOP TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEM - Use
03T820(393)   with pay item: Wireless Intercn, Closed Loop, ____, Each


              03T820(401) - TRAFFIC SIGNAL UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM - Use with pay item: TS
03T820(401)   Uninterruptible Power System, Each and/or TS Uninterruptible Power System, Rem, Each


              03T820(405) - WIRELESS INTERCN, SIGN MTD FLASHER, SALV - Use with pay item: Wireless
03T820(405)   Intercn, Sign Mtd Flasher, Salv, Each


              03T820(408) - SPLICE BOX - Use in all traffic signal projects that include install or remove of a Splice
03T820(408)   Box. Use with pay item: Splice Box, Each and/or Splice Box, Rem., Each


              03T820(410) - BREAKER BOX - Use in all traffic signal projects requiring the installation or removal of a
03T820(410)   breaker box. Use with pay item: Breaker Box, Each and/or Breaker Box, Rem, Each


              03T820(412) - CONCRETE POLE, REM - Use with pay item: Conc Pole, Rem, Each
03T820(412)

              03T820(415) - EMERGENCY PRE-EMPTION, REM AND SALV - Use with pay item: Emergency Pre-
03T820(415)   emption, Rem, Each and Emergency Pre-emption, Salv, Each


              03T820(420) - WIRELESS VEHICLE DETECTION SYSTEM - Use with pay item: Wireless Vehicle
03T820(420)   Detection System, Rem & Salv, Wireless _____, Each


              03T820(430) - CASE SIGN, NON-ILLUMINATED - Use with pay item: Case Sign, _ Way, _ inch by _
03T820(430)   inch, Non-Illuminated and/or Case Sign, Non-Illuminated, Salv and/or Rem, Each


              03T820(A10) - SOLID-STATE FLASHING BEACON CONTROLLER (CAP TYPE) - Use in all traffic signal
03T820(A10)   projects requiring a cap type solid-state flasher controller to be used for providing flashing sign optical
              beacons. Add 7000 pay item: Flsh Beacon, Controller and Cabinet, Solid State (Cap Type), Each


              03T820(A50) - STROBE LIGHT - Use in all traffic signal projects requiring strobe lights which are used for
03T820(A50)   advance warning temporary installations. Add 7000 pay item: Strobe Light, Each


              03T820(A70) - ALUMINUM VEHICULAR TRAFFIC SIGNALS AND MOUNTING ASSEMBLIES - Use in
03T820(A70)   all traffic signal projects requiring eight inch or 12 inch aluminum vehicular traffic signals of the adjustable
              face type and mounting assemblies.
                03T820(C80) - TAPERED STEEL POLE (14 FOOT) - Use in all traffic signal projects required to install a
03T820(C80)     14-foot tapered steel signal pole. Add 7000 pay item: Tapered Steel Pole, Each and Tapered Steel Pole
                Fdn, Each


                03T820(E10) - TRAFFIC SIGNAL SECONDARY CABLE - Use in all traffic signal projects in Oakland
03T820(E10)     County (RCOC) required to install secondary service cable.


                03T820(E20) - TRAFFIC SIGNAL CABLE AND WIRE - Use in all traffic signal projects in Oakland County
03T820(E20)     (RCOC) required to install traffic signal cable and wire for signal systems in underground conduit, as
                aerial cable supported by a messenger, or for installation in buildings.


                03T820(E30) - TRAFFIC SIGNAL AUTOSCOPE CABLE - Use in all traffic signal projects in Oakland
03T820(E30)     County (RCOC) required to install traffic signal autoscope cable.


                03T820(E40) - AUTOSCOPE CAMERA - Use in all traffic signal projects in Oakland County (RCOC)
03T820(E40)     required to install, salvage or remove an Autoscope Camera. Add 7000 pay item: Autoscope Camera,
                ________, Each


                03T820(E50) - MAST ARM STD, SALV - Use in all traffic signal projects in Oakland County (RCOC)
03T820(E50)     required to install a salvaged mast arm on an existing or new foundation. Add 7000 pay item: Mast Arm
                Std, Salv, Each


                03T920(A30) - PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIALS - Use in projects calling for Permanent and/or
03T920(A30)     Temporary Pavement Markings.


                03TC820(0440) VIDEO TRAFFIC DETECTION CAMERA, SALV - Use with pay item: Video Traf
03TC820(0440)   Detection Camera, Salv, Each


                03TC820(A035) TWO-WAY ILLUMINATED STREET NAME SIGNS (LED) - Use in all traffic signal
03TC820(A035)   projects requiring an illuminated street name sign to be installed, salvaged or removed. Use with pay
                item: Street Name Sign, Two Way, Illuminiated, _, Each and/or Street Name Sign, Two Way, (LED),
                _foot, Each
                                     MICHIGAN
                            DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                    SPECIAL PROVISION
                                            for
                                  CONCRETE CURB, SPECIAL

DD:JLB                                              1 of 1                 C&T:APPR:JFS:JTL:11-03-01

  a. Description. This work shall consist of constructing the exposed aggregate
     concrete curb as shown on the plans. All work shall be according to the Standard
     Specifications for Construction, except as modified herein.

  b. Materials and Construction Methods. Concrete shall be MDOT grade P2 in the
     Standard Specifications for Construction.

     All aggregate used in concrete mixture shall originate geologically only from a
     natural source, be a natural color and the size of pea gravel.

  c. Construction. All joints and discontinuities in forms shall be sealed against
     leakage. Formed surfaces shall be Type A. Forms shall be removed within 24
     hours, or as soon as permitted by the Engineer, provided the concrete is of sufficient
     strength and hardness and provided that curing and protection operations are
     maintained. The top, bevels and sides of the curb shall be finished with proper
     finishing tools according to Section 802 of the Standard Specifications for
     Construction. ½” expansion joints shall be aligned with expansion joints in sidewalk
     or every 20 feet or according to Engineer. The curb shall be protected with an
     acrylic non-gloss sealer per manufacturer’s recommendations and according to
     Engineer.

  d. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured for Concrete
     Curb, Special will be measured by the foot and paid for at the contract unit price for
     the following contract item (pay item).

     Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                          Pay Unit

     Concrete Curb, Special ................................................................................... Foot

  Concrete Curb, Special will be measured and paid for in place by the foot and includes
  all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to complete the work according to this
  special provision.
                                      MICHIGAN
                             DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                    SPECIAL PROVISION
                                            for
                             STEEL LANDSCAPE EDGING, 4 INCH

DES:NA                                                1 of 1                    C&T:APPR:JAR:DMG:03-31-03

a.   Description. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing steel landscape edging as
     shown on the plans, in accordance with the MDOT Standard Specifications for Construction
     and according to the Engineer.

b.   Materials. The material shall be 3/16 inch x 4 inch steel landscape edging in 10 or 20-foot
     lengths, finished in weather resistant green or black paint. Tapered steel stakes driven
     through slots in the strip at 30-inch intervals will be 16 inches long. Joint sections will have
     interlocking joints double staked. No plastic or aluminum edging will be accepted.

c.   Construction Methods. The edging will conform to the bed outlines shown on the plans
     and according to the Engineer and Roadside Development Section. Edging shall be 2
     inches above finish grade.

d.   Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured will be paid for at the
     contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

     Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                                 Pay Unit

     Steel Landscape Edging, 4 inch...................................................................................Foot

     Payment for Steel Landscape Edging, 4 inch shall include all materials, equipment, and
     labor to complete the work in accordance with the plans, standard specifications, and this
     special provision.
                                    MICHIGAN
                           DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                  SPECIAL PROVISION
                                         FOR
                              TEMPORARY TREE PROTECTION

DES:NA                                            1 of 1              C&T:APPR:JAR:DMG:03-31-03

a.   Description. Protective Fence shall be provided where directed by the Engineer
     to protect existing trees and plants and as shown on plans to create plant and
     material staging area.

b.   Materials and Construction. Plastic safety fence or wooden snow fence
     supported by posts, placed max. 8’ o.c. shall be placed around trees at the drip
     line and placed loosely around low branched plants. Where plants are in groups,
     the entire group shall be enclosed with snow fence.

     Fencing shall be placed prior to the start of any construction activity, and be
     removed only when all remaining work is completed. Fence shall be maintained and
     kept upright and taut until it is no longer needed and removed.

     This work shall include furnishing and placing fencing, and removal and disposal of
     fencing and posts upon completion of other items of work on this contract.

c.   Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured will be paid for at
     the contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

     Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                       Pay Unit

     Temporary Tree Protection.............................................................................. Foot

     Payment for Temporary Tree Protection shall include all materials, equipment and
     labor to install, maintain and remove this item of work.
                                       MICHIGAN
                              DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                           SPECIAL PROVISION
                                                   for
                                             WOOD FENCE

DES:JB                                                 1 of 1                C&T:APPR:JAR:DMG:07-14-03

a. Description. Furnish all materials and labor required to complete the construction of the
   wood fence at the locations and according to the details shown on the plans and this
   special provision.

b. Materials. Conform to subsection 912.10 of the Standard Specifications for
   Construction, as applicable, with the following additions and exceptions.

   1. 2 x 6 inch fencing and rail boards - 0.40 pcf pressure treated, S4S, No.2 common or
      better Ponderosa Pine.

   2. 4 x 6 inch structural posts - minimum 0.60 pcf pressure treated No.2 Southern
      Yellow Pine or approved equal.

   3. All steel hardware must be galvanized.

   Cut all lumber to the sizes shown on the plans and pressure treat with chromate copper
   arsenate (CCA) preservative as specified in subsection 912.10 of the Standard
   Specifications for Construction. Field treat as specified by subsection 912.04 of the
   Standard Specifications for Construction.

c. Construction. Complete this work in a craftsman-like manner.

d. Measurement and Payment. This work will be paid for at the contract unit price for the
   following contract item (pay item).

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                              Pay Unit

       Wood Fence ................................................................................................... Foot

Payment for Wood Fence includes all materials, equipment and labor required to complete
the work as described.
                                      MICHIGAN
                             DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                          SPECIAL PROVISION
                                                 FOR
                                          LANDSCAPE FABRIC

DES:JLB                                                 1 of 1                    C&T:APPR:JAR:DMG:04-05-04

  a. Description. This work shall consist of supplying and placing landscape fabric at location
     shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer. Work will be done in accordance with
     the MDOT Standard Specifications for Construction and as described below.

  b. Materials. Select geotextile landscape fabric from Table 910-1 of the Standard
     Specifications for Construction.

  c. Construction. Place landscape fabric parallel to the building, minimizing seams. Overlap
     6 inches minimum and secure with stakes according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

  d. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured will be paid for at the
     contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

     Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                                   Pay Unit

     Landscape Fabric............................................................................................ Square Foot

  Landscape Fabric will be measured at the contract unit price square foot. This shall be
  payment in full for all materials, equipment and labor required to furnish and place at locations
  shown on the plans and as directed by Engineer.
                                  MICHIGAN
                         DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                             SPECIAL PROVISION
                                    FOR
                     PAVEMENT SEALANT AND TAR EMULSION

DES:JB                                       1 of 2               C&T:APPR:MF:GMM:06-03-02

  a. Description. This work shall consist of applying a two-coat emulsified coal-tar pitch seal
     coat system to protect new HMA surfaces at the rest area. Furnish all materials, labor, and
     equipment necessary to install pavement sealant and tar emulsion at the locations shown
     on the plans, according to manufacturers recommendations, and according to Engineer.

  b. Construction. The Contractor shall apply an even coating of primer and two applications of
     the coating (refined coal tar emulsion slurry) to all areas shown on the plans and as directed
     by the Engineer (a minimum of 30 days after pavement installation). The Contractor shall
     submit Manufacturers Spec Data Sheet and a letter from the manufacturer stating applicator
     is certified. Application shall occur when pavement temperature is at least fifty (50) degrees
     F and air temperature is fifty (50) degrees F and rising. Apply coating only during dry
     weather and when rain is not expected within eight (8) hours after application is completed.

  c. Warranty. Prior to final payment, submit two (2) year written dual warranty by materials
     manufacturer and Contractor. In the event of abnormal wear, flaking or chipping, the
     manufacturer shall provide materials and Contractor to re-coat affected areas at no cost to
     the Department during the 2-year warranty period.

  d. Materials.

     1. Bituminous Material - The bituminous material shall be an emulsified coal - tar pitch
        meeting the requirements of ASTM C136, D490, D2939, D3320 and D5727.

     2. Sand - Sand shall be washed dry silica free of dust, trash, clay, organic materials or
        other contaminants. Gradation: To have an American Foundry Society grain fineness
        number that is no less than fifty (50) and no more than seventy (70), when tested in
        accordance with ASTM C136.

     3. Sealer - Sealer shall be a high solids refined coal - tar emulsion containing hot blended
        rubber.

     4. Crack Sealant - Crack sealant shall be hot applied, elastomeric type that is compatible
        with pavement coating.

     5. Pavement Primer - Pavement Primer shall be acrylic based that is compatible with
        pavement coating.

     6. Oil Spot Primer - Oil Spot Primer shall be water based that is compatible with
        pavement coating.
DES:JB                                             2 of 2                                            06-03-02

       7. Mixing Water - Water shall be potable and free from harmful soluble salts. Temperature
       of the water shall be a minimum of fifty (50) degrees F.

  e. Preparation of Surfaces - Aged Pavement. Inspect existing pavement surfaces for
     conditions. Repair any damaged portions of pavement and seal all cracks with joint sealer.
     Clean pavement prior to applying primer coat and coating. Protect adjacent curbs, walks
     and other items from receiving primer and coating. Clean oil spots and treat with oil spot
     primer. Apply a diluted mixture of one (1) part primer and two (2) parts water at the rate of
     0.03 to 0.06 gallons per square yard.

  f.   Equipment. Use equipment that keeps the mixture homogeneous at all times and is
       capable of applying the required coating weights evenly over entire width of application
       mechanism in order to provide a uniformly coated surface.

  g. Installation. New pavement must cure a min. of 30 days prior to installation. Clean
     pavement prior to applying primer coat and coating. The primer shall be a mixture of one
     (1) part primer and two (2) parts water at the rate of 0.03 to 0.06 gallons per square yard.
     Apply all coats uniformly at a rate of 0.14 to 0.17 gallons per square yard per coat using
     diluted material. Allow each coat to cure sufficiently to take traffic without scuffing. Allow
     final coat to cure a minimum of twenty four (24) hours under good drying conditions before
     removing barricades. Clean primer and coating from all surfaces other than those requiring
     primer and coating

  h. Measurement and Payment. Pavement Sealant and Tar Emulsion will be measured by
     area in square yards and paid for at the contract unit price square yards.

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                       Pay Unit

       Pavement Sealant and Tar Emulsion..............................................................Square Yard
                                    MICHIGAN
                           DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                 SPECIAL PROVISION
                                        FOR
                         TURF ESTABLISHMENT, PERFORMANCE

TSC:BAY:KZ                                      1 of 5               C&T:APPR:DMG:JAR:02-03-03

    a. Description. Section 816 of the Standard Specifications for Construction is deleted and
replaced by this special provision. The Contractor shall be responsible for the performance and
quality of turf growth in the areas indicated on the plans and as identified by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall comply with all state and federal laws and regulations in completing this work.

   The Contractor shall establish a durable, permanent, weed-free, mature, perennial turf. The
work consists of fundamental turf work, including but not limited to topsoiling, seeding, mulching,
erosion control, maintenance, and repair of turf as described herein during the life of the contract
and during the life of any supplemental performance bond which may ensue.

   The Contractor shall choose and implement proven turf establishment industry practices;
provide all necessary labor and equipment; select and provide all turf establishment materials; and
control erosion at all times.

    The Contractor shall be responsible for a site analysis and its interpretation for their own use to
ensure compliance with this specification. The site analysis will take into consideration topsoil
needs, fertilizer and pH requirements, seed mix, existing and future soil moisture levels, slopes and
grades, required erosion control items and devices, maintenance requirements, local highway snow
deicing practices, and any other characteristics that influence and affect turf establishment.

    Section 107.11 of the Standard Specifications for Construction is revised relative to the
Contractor’s responsibility for the repair of turf establishment work as follows. The Contractor shall
be responsible, at no additional cost to the contract, for the repair of turf establishment work
occasioned by storm events less than or equal to a 50-year storm event as documented by
climatological data submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. All other portions of Section
107.11 remain unchanged.

   All herbicide applications shall be made by a commercial applicator licensed in the State of
Michigan. All individuals applying pesticides shall possess a valid Michigan Department of
Agriculture commercial pesticide applicator’s certificate for the appropriate category. All application
procedures and materials shall meet all federal, state and local regulations.

    At least 10 days prior to start of turf establishment, the Contractor performing the turf
establishment work shall provide the Engineer with documentation that they will meet one or both of
the following requirements.

   A. At least one person employed by the Contractor and assigned to the job site shall have a
      degree or certificate in Turf Management, Horticulture, or related field.

   B. At least one person employed by the Contractor and assigned to the job site shall have at
      least five (5) years of experience in roadside turf establishment.
TSC:BAY:KZ                             2 of 5                                              02-03-03

    b. Materials. The Contractor shall use topsoil, seed, mulch, pesticide, herbicide and/or mulch
blankets and erosion control materials as necessary to fulfill this specification and as indicated in
the work plan. The Contractor may use additional materials as necessary to meet the standards set
forth for turf establishment in this special provision. The use of any sod on the project requires the
prior approval of the Engineer and if approved, may be used at limited site locations only.

   Selection of all materials is the responsibility of the Contractor with the following minimum
conditions.

   1. Soil. The Contractor shall provide furnished or salvaged topsoil which may be blended
      compost that will provide vigorous growth. It shall be humus bearing and of not less than 4
      inches in depth. It shall be free of stones larger than 2 inches in diameter and other debris.
       The finished slope shall be according to subsection 205.03.N of the Standard
      Specifications for Construction.

   2. Seed. The Contractor shall use a seeding mixture that is composed of a blend of four or
      more species of perennial grass. All species and their cultivars or varieties shall be
      guaranteed hardy for Michigan

       The following is a list of recommended species of perennial grasses: Kentucky Bluegrass,
       Perennial Ryegrass, Hard Fescue, Creeping Red Fescue, Chewings Fescue, Turf-type Tall
       Fescue, Buffalo grass, and Alkaligrass-Fults Puccinellia distans. The cultivars or varieties
       of grasses selected shall be disease and insect resistant and good color. No one species in
       the blend shall be more than 25 percent of the mixture by weight. No one species in the
       blend shall be less than 5 percent of the mixture by weight. No grass species selected shall
       be considered noxious or objectionable, such as Quack Grass, Smooth Brome, Orchard
       Grass, Reed Canary Grass, and others.

       A. The seed shall be legally saleable in Michigan. The seed product shall not contain more
          than 10 percent inert materials. The seed source shall be from an MDOT approved
          certifier.

       B. The species and varieties of seed shall be adapted to all site conditions, to the site use,
          and to the soils, moisture, and local climate. Site use may include but is not limited to
          detention pond, wildlife habitat, playground, wetlands, forested wetland, rural roadside,
          urban roadside and highly maintained front yard.

       C. At least two of the species in the mixture to be planted within fifteen (15) feet behind the
          curb or the shoulder shall be salt tolerant.

   3. Mulch. Seeded areas shall be mulched to promote germination and growth of seed and to
      mitigate soil erosion.

   4. Herbicides. The Contractor shall furnish and apply herbicide(s) as needed. It shall be the
      Contractor’s responsibility to select the herbicide(s) and the rate at which it will be used.
      The work and herbicide(s) shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the application of the
      material.

   c. Construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work and any and all construction
TSC:BAY:KZ                             3 of 5                                                07-09-04
methods used in completing this work. Any part or parts of MDOT standard specifications or
standard plans chosen to be implemented by the Contractor shall not imply responsibility on the
part of MDOT for acceptability of the Contractor’s construction methods or for the quality of the
Contractor’s work outcome at any time.

   1. Inspection of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all inspection of turf
      establishment work.

       The Contractor shall use a Contractor’s Daily Report approved by the Engineer to report
       inspections made and to document turf establishment work performed on this project. The
       Contractor’s Daily Report shall be completed and submitted to the Engineer when any work
       performed under this special provision is in progress.

       The Contractor’s Daily Report shall be accompanied by all necessary materials
       documentation including tests slips, certifications, etc.

       The Engineer shall determine the acceptability of these reports in terms of their
       completeness and accuracy. The Engineer reserves the right to verify all submitted
       measurements and computations. Failure by the Contractor to submit acceptable and
       timely reports to the Engineer may result in withholding of progress pay estimates on turf-
       related items until such time as reports are submitted in an acceptable and timely fashion.

       The Engineer reserves the right to inspect the project for any reason in accordance with
       subsection 104.01 of the Standard Specifications for Construction, including the fulfillment
       of other inspection requirements such as soil erosion and sedimentation control, NPDES,
       etc. These inspections made by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the
       inspections required by this special provision or the Contractor’s responsibilities for erosion
       control and turf establishment.

   2. Erosion Control. Erosion shall be controlled at all times according to Section 208 of the
      standard specifications. Control of soil erosion is the responsibility of the Contractor.
      However, sedimentation controls shall be placed as indicated on the plans or as directed by
      the Engineer. The site shall be continuously monitored by the Contractor for needed
      erosion repair from any cause as addressed in the contract documents. All eroded areas
      shall be returned to their original grade within seven (7) days of the erosion occurrence.

       If sedimentation occurs in drainage structures or any watercourse or water containment
       area, corrective action shall be taken immediately and all disturbed areas contributing to this
       sedimentation shall be restored within 24 hours of erosion occurrence. Sediment deposited
       as a result of the Contractor’s inability to control the soil erosion shall be removed at the
       Contractor’s expense.

       The Contractor shall reimburse the Department for any costs levied against the Department,
       such as fines, environmental costs, costs for remedies required, or any other costs as a
       result of the Contractor’s failure to comply with this specification and with all federal, state,
       and local laws.


   3. Erosion Repair. The Contractor is responsible for all repair and liable for all consequences
TSC:BAY:KZ                         4 of 5                                               07-09-04
     (legal, monetary, or other) associated with erosion or sedimentation damage to finished or
     unfinished work.

     All erosion occurrences and the repairs made by the Contractor shall be reported to the
     Engineer in the format and at the frequency required by the Engineer. Any erosion,
     displacement, or disturbance to ongoing or completed work by any cause shall be repaired
     by the Contractor at no additional cost to the contract unless otherwise noted herein.


     The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for all traffic control and safety measures
     required to repair and protect damaged turf areas. Any eroded area that may affect the
     support of the roadbed or safety of the public shall be repaired within 24 hours of the
     erosion occurrence.

     Protection devices such as barriers, directional sign/signals, temporary fence, or any other
     safety measures shall be placed by the Contractor immediately after any erosion damage
     occurs that has the potential of endangering the public. In these instances, the Contractor
     shall, within 24 hours of the occurrence of the damage, provide the Engineer with a written
     summary of the immediate action taken and describing the repairs made and the safety
     measures taken.

  4. Final Acceptance and Supplemental Performance Bond.

     A. Final Acceptance Parameters. Before final acceptance of the turf establishment work,
        all of the following minimum parameters shall be met throughout all exposed areas of
        the project designated on the plans or identified by the Engineer as turf establishment
        areas. There shall be no exposed bare soil and the turf shall be fully germinated,
        erosion free, weed free, disease free, dark green in color and in a vigorous growing
        condition.

        The Engineer will notify the Contractor of the dates and times of all acceptance
        inspections. The Contractor may accompany the Engineer while these inspections are
        being made. If the Contractor does not agree with the decision made by the Engineer,
        the Contractor can request an inspection by a mutually agreed upon third party. A joint
        inspection, including the Engineer, the Contractor, and the third party, will be scheduled.
         All expert fees and expenses charged by the third party will be agreed to before the
        inspection and will be shared equally by the Contractor and the Michigan Department of
        Transportation.

     B. Supplemental Performance Bond. In the event that all contract items of work are
        completed, including the placement of all turf establishment items of work, and the final
        acceptance of the project is delayed because the final acceptance parameters for the
        turf establishment work have not been fully met, the Contractor may propose to the
        Engineer the use of a supplemental performance bond.

        The bond serves to secure the successful completion of turf establishment work and
        fulfillment of all final acceptance parameters for the turf establishment work. The
        supplemental performance bond must be in all respects satisfactory and acceptable to
        MDOT and executed by a surety company authorized to do business with the State of
        Michigan.
TSC:BAY:KZ                                  5 of 5                                                        07-09-04
            The bond shall be in an amount equal to 50 percent of the turf establishment work
            contract items covered by this special provision. The bond shall remain in place until
            final acceptance of this turf establishment work. At the discretion of the Engineer, the
            bond may be reduced on a prorated basis as portions of the areas designated for turf
            establishment on the project meet the final acceptance parameters.

            Prior to commencement of any work during the bonded period necessary to meet the
            acceptance parameters, the Contractor shall apply for a permit to work within MDOT
            right-of-way using Form 2205. The permit fee and an individual permit performance
            bond shall not be required. The permit insurance requirements, however, shall apply.




d. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured will be paid for at the
contractunit price for the following contract item (pay item):

   Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                                Pay Unit

   Turf Establishment, Performance..........................................................................Square Yard

   Turf Establishment, Performance shall be measured in place by area in square yards. All
materials, labor, and equipment required or selected by the Contractor to install, maintain, inspect,
repair, and meet the acceptance parameters for turf establishment specified in this special
provision, including preparation, updating, and submittal of the Contractor’s work plan and
Contractor’s Daily Reports, will not be paid separately but will be considered included in the
contract unit price bid for Turf Establishment, Performance.

    The supplemental performance bond and all costs associated with turf establishment work
performed during the bonded period mutually agreed with the Engineer, will not be paid for
separately. These costs which may include, but are not limited to, mobilization, traffic control
devices, and the required permit insurance are considered to be included in the unit price bid for
Turf Establishment, Performance.

   Repairs made to damaged turf establishment areas as a result of a documented storm in
excess of a 50-year storm event will be paid for as extra work as described in Section 109.07 of the
Standard Specifications for Construction.

    The following schedule of payment applies to work performed according to this special
provision. Upon completion of topsoil surfacing stage, fifty percent of the bid price for Turf
Establishment, Performance will be paid to the Contractor. Upon completion of all other work
necessary to comply with this special provision and to meet all final acceptance parameters for Turf
Establishment, Performance or at such time as the supplemental performance bond is accepted
by the Department, fifty percent of the bid price for Turf Establishment, Performance will be paid.
                                 MICHIGAN
                        DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                  SPECIAL PROVISION
                                         FOR
                                  RIVER ROCK, 2 INCH

DES:JB                                     1 of 1                C&T:APPR:JAR:DMG:03-23-04

  a. Description. This work shall consist of furnishing and placing 2 inch river rock at the
     locations shown on the plans, in accordance with the MDOT Standard Specifications for
     Construction, Roadside Development Section, or as directed by the Engineer.

  b. Materials. The river rock will be 1 ¾ inch to 2 inch native Michigan brown/gray river rock.
     The material shall be clean and round in shape. A sample of the rock shall be submitted to
     the Engineer for approval prior to delivery.

  c. Construction. The river rock shall conform to the bed outlines shown on the plans and
     according to the Engineer and the Roadside Development Section. River rock shall be
     placed over the landscape fabric at a minimum depth of 6 inches level with the top of the
     steel landscape edging.

  d. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured will be paid for at the
     contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

     Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                           Pay
                                                          Unit

     River Rock, 2 inch…………………………………………………………………….Cubic Yard

  Payment for River Rock, 2 inch shall include all equipment, labor and materials to complete
  the work as described.
                                 MICHIGAN
                        DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                 SPECIAL PROVISION
                                        FOR
                               SHREDDED BARK MULCH

DES:JB                                     1 of 1                C&T:APPR:JAR:DMG:01-27-04

  a. Description. This work shall consist of furnishing and placing a thickness of 5 to 6 inches
     of Shredded Bark Mulch at the locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

  b. Materials. The Shredded Bark Mulch shall be as specified in subsection 917.14.A of the
     MDOT Standard Specifications for Construction. No woodchips will be permitted on this
     project.

  c. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured will be paid for at the
     contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item).

     Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                            Pay
                                                          Unit

     Shredded Bark Mulch………………………………………………………………….Cubic Yard

     Shredded Bark Mulch at 5 to 6 inch thickness will be measured by area in cubic yards, and
        will be converted to cubic yards for payment at the contract unit price which includes
        furnishing and placing.
                                         MICHIGAN
                                DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                                 Special Provision
                                                       For
                                                    ASH URN

DD:JLB                                                    1 of 1
                                                                                C&T:APPR:EMB:JKG 11-03-01

a. Description. Furnish in place a pre-cast ash urn as described in this special provision.
   Ash urns shall be located as shown on the plans.

b. Materials. The Ash Urn shall be pre-cast concrete 13 inches square, by 22 inches
   high, by 11 inches square at the base shall have exposed aggregate finish. The
   aggregate shall be natural rounded washed gravel from MDOT approved sources a
   maximum of 3/8 inch in size. The container shall be reinforced with No. 10, 6 inch x 6
   inch galvanized wire mesh, and the concrete shall be a 6-bag mix, with a 4-inch
   maximum slump and cured for 28 days to 500 P.S.I. A chamfered base shall be at the
   bottom of the container to minimize chipping.

c. Construction Methods. Precast Concrete Ash Urns shall be placed as shown on the
   plans and as directed by the Engineer.

d. Shop Drawing. Complete shop drawings shall be submitted for this item. Contractor
   shall provide six sets of drawings to the Engineer prior to manufacturing ash urns.

e. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured for Ash Urn, will be
   paid for at the contract unit price for all the following contract item (pay item).

   Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                                      Pay Unit

   Ash Urn................................................................................................................ Each

   Ash Urn, Precast Concrete will be measured at the contract unit price each, which
   shall be payment in full for the above-described item furnished and placed.
                            MICHIGAN
                   DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                             SPECIAL PROVISION
                                    FOR
                                FLAG POLE

DD:JLB                                1 of 2           C&T:APPR:EMB:JKG:11-03-01

  a.     Description. Furnish and erect, at location shown on the plans, one (1)
         cone tapered aluminum flagpole complete with all fittings and flag as
         described below.

  b.     Materials. The flagpole shall be a ground set model, 30 feet in height above
         the top of curb, by 33 feet overall. The outside butt diameter shall be six
         inches, the taper portion 13 feet 9 inches and the outside top diameter 3-1/2
         inches. The flagpole shall be constructed from 6063T6 aluminum tubing,
         having a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 30,000 p.s.i., minimum ultimate
         yield strength of 25,000 p.s.i. and be designed to withstand 90 m.p.h. winds.

         1. Halyard. Flagpole shall be provided with an internal halyard system.
         The system shall include a special revolving truck, direct drive reel winch with
         aluminum operating handle, painted steel door opening reinforcement sleeve
         and winch mounting table, flush pivoting or hinged access door with cylinder
         lock and the same finish as the flagpole. Also the system shall have 3/32
         inch stainless steel halyard cable, swivel snaps with white vinyl covers, nylon
         retaining loop, and halyard counter weights.

         The winch shall be equipped with friction brake and locking device which
         allows display of flag at any position on the pole. The nylon retaining loop
         assures 360 degree flying of the flag without wrapping around the pole, and
         easy movement when raising and lowering the flag.

         2. Flash Collar. The flash collar shall be cast aluminum and shall be no
         more than 14 inches in diameter by 2-1/2 inches high, and secured in place.

         3. Finish. The flagpoles and all metal fittings shall have a hard coat
         anodized finish applied to all surfaces. The color shall be DARK BRONZE.

         4. Foundation. The foundation shall be of the galvanized corrugated steel
         type. Specific specifications shall be as recommended by the flagpole
         manufacturer. The concrete ( MDOT Grade P2) quantity for the foundation is
         included in the item Flagpole and will not be paid for separately. The
         reinforcing steel shall be # 4 bars as shown on the plans.

         5. Flag. The flag shall be 6' x 10' nylon with sewn stripes and embroidered
         stars, canvas heading and 6 rows of stitching at the fly end.
DD:JLB                                                   2 of 2                C&T:APPR:EMB:JKG:11-03-01

                6. Shop Drawings. Complete shop drawings shall be submitted for the flag-
                pole, the halyard systems, the flash collars and the foundation details. The
                Contractor shall provide six sets of drawings to the Engineer prior to ordering
                the flag-pole and related systems.

  c.       Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured for Flagpole,
           which shall include all material, equipment and labor required to complete the
           work will be paid for at the contract unit price for the following contract item (pay
           item):

       Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                                 Pay Unit

       Flag Pole ........................................................................................................ Each

  Flag Pole, will be measured at the contract unit price each, which shall be payment in
  full for the above described item furnished and placed.
                                        MICHIGAN
                               DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                            SPECIAL PROVISION
                                                    for
                                              PICNIC STOVE

DES:JLB                                                  1 of 1                    C&T:APPR:JKG:JTL:07-24-02

  a. Description of Work. This work shall consist of supplying and placing a Picnic Stove at
  the locations indicated on the plans, or as directed by the Project Engineer. Work shall be
  done in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Construction.

  The Picnic Stove shall mount on a steel post and revolve 360 degrees to obtain proper
  draft. When assembled, the grate, sides and bottom shall form a single unit. The post
  shall be secured by a concrete footing. The finished height shall be 36" to the top of the
  picnic stove. The picnic stove shall be factory pre-assembled and mounted to the post
  when concrete footing is properly cured.

  b. Materials. Grate - Shall be constructed of 1/2" steel rod to obtain an overall size of 18-
  1/8" x 15-1/2". The cooking area shall contain 280 square inches and be adjustable to
  three levels and tilt back for easy filling of charcoal. Two springs shall be welded to front of
  grate to provide safe handling.

  Side and Back - One piece formed 10 gauge galvanized steel, with die cut notches for grate
  to set on and adjust.

  Bottom - Formed 7 gauge hot roll steel, and shall rivet to the sides to form one unit.

  Support Post - 2-3/8" O.D. galvanized steel pipe. A 5/16" steel plate shall be welded to top
  of post for securing flange to stove on site.

  c. Construction. Concrete Pad - Shall be as shown on the plans and be paid for by the
  contract pay item, Sidewalk, Conc, 4 inch, including a 12" x 12" x 12" footing.

  d. Shop Drawing. Complete shop drawings shall be submitted for this item. Six sets of
  drawings shall be provided to the Engineer.

  e. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured for Picnic Stove will be
  measured and paid for in-place at the contract unit price for the following contract item (pay
  item):

     Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                                    Pay Unit

     Picnic Stove......................................................................................................... Each

  The item Picnic Stove shall include furnishing materials, equipment and labor required to
  install the complete picnic stove assembly. The concrete pad shall be considered to be
  included in the Concrete Sidewalk, 4 inch pay item.
                                MICHIGAN
                       DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                SPECIAL PROVISION
                                       FOR
                              PICNIC TABLE, SPECIAL

DD:RWM:JB                                1 of 2                           06-19-01
                                                         C&T:APPR:EMB:JKG:06-22-01

a.   Description. This work shall consist of supplying and placing a Pedestal Type
     Picnic Table at the locations indicated on the plans, as directed by the Engineer.
     Work shall be done in accordance with the MDOT Standard Specifications for
     Construction.

b.   Materials. The pedestal table shall be rectangular, consisting of three 2" x 10" x 6'
     top planks and two 2" x 10" x 6' seat planks. The table shall be supported by a
     single central steel frame. The central post and frame shall be secured to the
     concrete pad as shown on the plans. The finished table top shall be no more than
     34" above the finish pad surface and no less than 28" to the bottom of the table top,
     to meet barrier free requirements. The table shall be factory pre-assembled.

     1.     Central Steel Frame. The central frame shall be a 5 3/8" x 5 3/8" steel post
            with a galvanized finish. The post shall have a 3/8" x 16" x 16" base plate to
            surface mount, as shown on the plans. The under top frame shall be welded
            to the central post.

     2.     Seat Supports. Each of the two seats shall be supported by a 3 1/2"
            diameter steel member designed to resist lateral torsion and deflection when
            fully loaded. The seat support shall have a galvanized finish. The seat
            support shall fasten to the central post with carriage bolts that face into the
            central post and are non-removable once the table is assembled. The under
            seat supports and fastener plates shall be welded to the seat supports.

     3.     Hardware. All hardware required to secure the seat supports to the central
            post and the top and seat planks to the frame shall be hot dipped galvanized
            carriage bolts of the sizes specified by the manufacturer.

     4.     Top & Seat Planks. The top and seat planks shall be 100% recycled post
            consumer plastic. All planks shall measure 2" x 10" x 6' and shall be cedar
            color. The color and surface texture of all top and seat planks shall be
            submitted for approval prior to installation. The finish surface shall be a
            rough closed pore texture, on both sides and both edges. Exposed saw cut
            ends are acceptable.

     5.     Concrete Pad. The concrete (MDOT Grade P2) shall meet the requirements
            in Section 803 of the MDOT Standard Specifications. The additional
            thickness of concrete shall be as shown on the plans.
DD:RWM:JB                                            2 of 2                                               06-19-01

c.     Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured for Picnic Table,
       Special will be paid for at the contract unit price each.

      Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                            Pay Unit

      Picnic Table, Special ...................................................................................... Each

Picnic Table, Special will be measured by the pay unit each.

This shall be payment in full for all material, labor and equipment required to furnish and
place tables at locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The concrete
pad will be paid for separately as Sidewalk, Conc, 4 inch. Additional concrete and steel
reinforcing will be included in the pay item.
                                MICHIGAN
                       DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                SPECIAL PROVISION
                                       FOR
                                TRASH CONTAINER

DES:NA                                   1 of 2          C&T:APPR:JAR:GCT:04-18-03

  a. Description. Furnish in place a pre-cast trash container as described in this special
     provision. The location on the site shall be as per plans and as directed by the
     Engineer.

  b. Materials. The materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with Sections
     701,901, 902 and 903 of the MDOT Standard Specifications for Construction.

     1. Concrete container. The precast concrete Trash Container shall be 30-1/2
        inches outside diameter, by 36 inches high with a 3 inch wall thickness. Top of
        the container to be recessed to encompass 1-1/2 inch sidewall of the 27-1/4 inch
        diameter weighted lid. Top of container shall be canted, service entrance to
        have a rolled fluted design providing smooth edges and a contour that
        accentuates the service entrance to measure 7 inches x 12-1/2 inches inside, 8-
        1/4 inches x 15 inches outside. Container to have two 3/8 inch nylon inserts
        located 3 inches from the top of the container and 3/4 inch wide x 5/16 inch deep
        indent. A chamfered base shall be at the bottom of the container to minimize
        chipping.

     2. Concrete Mix. Concrete must be a minimum 28 day test strength of 5300 psi,
        consist of Type 1 cement, coarse aggregate shall be 3/8 inch washed gravel
        from MDOT approved sources or approved equal. Catalog cuts or detail sheets
        must be provided to Engineer for approval.

     3. Texture and finish. Container exterior shall be exposed aggregate with a
        consistent finish and shall have a medium etch. Exposed finish shall be
        achieved by using a chemical abrasion resistant retarder and water blasting to
        limit bruising of the aggregate surface. Exposed surface shall be coated with
        weather proof clear acrylic concrete coating. Entrance shall not be exposed
        aggregate, exterior surfaces are to have concise delineation between exposed
        aggregate and smooth concrete edges. The container top edge shall be
        exposed aggregate with plain concrete beveled exterior finish.

     4. Liner. A 30 gallon galvanized liner shall be provided with the Trash Container.

     5. Fiberglass Lid. The fiberglass lid shall be 1/4 inch wall thickness with a tan
        color achieved though gelcoating, equipped with a securing chain affixed to the
        concrete container and fitted with a 3 inch brass belwith handle located 5 inches
        centered from the outside edge. The lid shall also be weighted to prevent
        blowing off.
DES:NA                                               2 of 2                C&T:APPR:JAR:GCT:04-18-03

  c. Construction Methods. Precast trash container shall be placed at locations shown
     on the plans or approved by the Engineer.

  d. Shop Drawings. Complete shop drawings shall be submitted for this item. Six sets
     of drawings shall be provided to the Engineer prior to manufacturing containers.

  e. Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured for Trash
     Container will be paid for at the contract unit price for the following contract item
     (Pay Item).

     Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                             Pay Unit

     Trash Container.............................................................................................. Each

  Trash Container with a 30 gallon galvanized Liner and weighted Fiberglass Lid will be
  measured at the contract unit price each, which shall be payment in full for the above
  described item furnished and placed. The concrete pad will be paid for separately as
  Sidewalk, Conc, 4 inch.
                                        MICHIGAN
                               DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                              Special Provision
                                                     for
                                             WIRE GRID BENCH

DD:jb                                                   1 of 1                                    12-01-03
                                                                                    C:APPR:MLL:GJB 1-16-97

a.      Description. Furnish in place benches as described in this Special Provision, at
        the locations shown on the plans.

b.      Materials. Benches shall be straight 3-seat wire grid units. All benches shall be
        seat units with backs.

        The bench seats shall be constructed with a wire grid panel of 5/8" steel frame
        with 1/8" cross-wire 2” o.c. inserted in a 7/8" steel frame. Steel grid shall be zinc
        plated and shall have a polyester powder coat finish.               Color shall be
        selected/approved by the Landscape Architect through the Engineer.

        The seat support, horizontal bar, and leg support shall be zinc plated steel tube
        with a polyester powder coat finish to match grid seats.

        Seat support shall be embedded in the sidewalk (curb) according to the
        manufacturer’s specifications and the details shown on the plans. Install cover
        plate and anchor support with epoxy grout.

c.      Shop Drawings. Complete shop drawings shall be submitted for this item. Six
        sets of drawings shall be provided to the Engineer.

d.      Measurement and Payment. The completed work as measured will be paid for
        at the contract unit price for the following contract item (Pay Item).


        Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                             Pay Unit

        Wire Grid Bench ............................................................................................. Each

The item Wire Grid Bench will be measured and paid for in-place at the contract unit
price each, which will include all materials, labor and equipment required to install the
benches. Sidewalks and curbs will be paid for separately.
                                   MICHIGAN
                          DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                     SPECIAL PROVISION
                                            FOR
                                     REMOVING BUILDING

DES:JB                                           1 of 1              C&T:APPR:DMG:JTL:06-06-02

  a.     Description. This work shall consist of demolishing and removing one rest area
         toilet building and appurtenances located on the existing rest area facility.

  b.     Construction Methods. The removal shall be in accordance with State and
         Local regulations and requirements and as directed by the Engineer. The toilet
         structure shall be completely removed from the site by the Contractor. Concrete
         slabs, sidewalk curbing, basement, abandoned septic tank(s) and foundation
         walls shall also be removed. Any excavated areas shall be backfilled in
         accordance with sub-section 204.03 of the MDOT Standard Specifications for
         Construction and/or as directed by the Engineer.

         MDOT retains the right to salvage any existing rest area items prior to removal of
         the facility. Items may include, but are not limited to: Picnic tables, map cases,
         well controls/pumps, tanks, hand dryers, water meters, irrigation system controls,
         vacuum breakers, counter tops, etc. The Contractor shall contact the Region
         Resource Analyst, Steve Houtteman (616-451-8881) a minimum of two weeks
         prior to scheduled removal of the above or like items.

  c.     Measurement and Payment. The work as measured will be paid for at the
         contract unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

         Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                               Pay Unit

         Remove Building ............................................................................. Lump Sum

  The work of Remove Building includes all material, equipment and labor necessary to
  remove the toilet building, basement, underground tanks, sidewalk curbs, foundations,
  slabs and any other items near to or associated with building and backfill disturbed
  areas as required and/or as directed by the Engineer.

  All other material not salvaged by MDOT shall become property of the Contractor, and
  shall be removed from the site and disposed of in accordance with the MDOT Standard
  Specifications.
                                MICHIGAN
                       DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                SPECIAL PROVISION
                                       FOR
                               REM MISC SITE ITEMS

DES:JB                                   1 of 1             C&T:APPR:JAR:DMG:05-10-04

  a. Description. This work shall consist of removing concrete pads, sidewalk curbs,
     landscape items, tanks, piping and other site items determined by Engineer located
     at the existing rest area facility and disposed of off site. Remove trash containers,
     benches, picnic tables, handicap signs, informational/historic signs, memorial
     plaques, rocks and dog run signs and leave on site for future use according to
     Engineer.

  b. Construction. The removals shall be as required in State and Local regulations and
      requirements and as directed by the Engineer. Tanks shall be knocked down in
      place and filled with sand to provide 3 feet of cover. Water lines shall be capped
      below grade. Any concrete slabs, walls / foundations and piping shall also be
      removed as disposed of off site. Any excavated areas shall be backfilled in
      accordance with Section 206 of the MDOT Standard Specifications for Construction
      and/or as directed by the Engineer.

  c. Measurement and Payment. The work as measured will be paid for at the contract
     unit price for the following contract item (pay item):

     Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                   Pay Unit

     Rem Misc Site Items………………………………………………………..Lump Sum

  Rem Misc Site Items will be measured as lump sum. The work shall include all
  material, equipment and labor necessary to remove tanks, piping, signs, picnic tables,
  trash containers, benches, concrete slabs, landscape items, and sidewalk curbs.
  Benches, picnic tables, trash containers, handicap signs, informational / historic signs,
  memorial plaques, rocks and dog run signs that are in good condition shall remain
  property of MDOT and shall be re-installed per this special provision at locations
  according to the Engineer.
                                     MICHIGAN
                           DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

                                    SPECIAL PROVISION
                                           FOR
                                      SITE GRADING

DES:JB                                       1 of 1              C&T:APPR:JAR:DMG:03-23-04

a. Description. The work necessary for the item Site Grading shall be done in accordance with
   Section 205 of the 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction, details in the plans, and as
   specified herein and as directed by the Engineer.

b. Materials. Embankment required shall meet the requirements of Class II material as specified
   in Table 902-3 of the 2003 Standard Specifications.

c. Construction. The item Site Grading consists of all excavation, embankment, and grading
   between the parking areas required to construct the, sidewalks, picnic table pads, stoves,
   dumpster pads, flagpole, extended water outlets, well, benches, trash container pads and
   concrete curb, special to the details shown in the plans. Excavation includes stripping and
   stockpiling of topsoil. All earthwork shall be done in such a manner as to provide positive
   drainage.

   Surplus or unsuitable material shall be disposed of in accordance with subsection 205.03.P of
   the 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction. Any loading and hauling of material
   required for disposal of surplus or unsuitable material shall be included with the work required
   for the item Site Grading.

   Embankment required shall meet the requirements of Class II material as specified under
   subsection 205.04.F of the 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction.

d. Measurement and Payment. Site Grading will be measured within the limits shown on the
   plans. The completed work as measured will be paid for at the contract unit price for the
   following contract item (pay item):

Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                     Pay Unit

       Site Grading……………………………………………………………………Lump Sum

   All materials, labor, equipment required to complete Site Grading which includes excavation,
   embankment, grading, stripping and stockpiling of topsoil, disposing of unsuitable material will
   be considered included in the contract unit price bid for Site Grading.
                                            MICHIGAN
                                   DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION


                                           SPECIAL PROVISION
                                                  FOR
                                       SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING

                    Mailing Address:               Grand Ledge Rest Area
                                                   Michigan Department of Transportation
                                                   4001 I 96
                                                   Lake Odessa, MI 48849

DD-RZ/DRS                                                                                                          04-25-11

SCOPE OF WORK: The work under this contract includes the furnishing of all material,
labor, equipment and incidental items required to construct a new toilet building. Major
items of work are reinforced concrete, brick veneer and stress-skin panel walls, masonry
walls, stress-skin panel roof framing, truss roof framing, finished roofing, aluminum
windows and doors, specialty items, painting, and ceramic tile work in addition to
mechanical, electrical and related work. All work shall be done in accordance with these
specifications and accompanying drawings, Local Codes, State Codes, The Americans with
Disabilities Act and the Michigan Department of Transportation 2003 Standard
Specifications for Construction.

The work, as described in the following index, consists of constructing the building and is to
be considered one item of work which will be paid for as LS (Lump Sum).

Other items of work, as called for on the drawings, but not herein described, may be
specified elsewhere in this Proposal.

                                               SPECIFICATION INDEX


General Requirements ..........................................................................               Division 1
Site Work ...............................................................................................     Division 2
Concrete ................................................................................................     Division 3
Masonry ................................................................................................      Division 4
Metals ....................................................................................................   Division 5
Carpentry ..............................................................................................      Division 6
Temperature and Moisture Control .......................................................                      Division 7
Doors, Windows and Glass ....................................................................                 Division 8
Finishes .................................................................................................    Division 9
Specialties .............................................................................................     Division 10
Heating and Ventilating .........................................................................             Division 14
Mechanical - Plumbing ..........................................................................              Division 15
Electrical ................................................................................................   Division 16
Basis of Payment ..................................................................................           Division 20
                                                    SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                               GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – DIVISION 1

The 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction will become a part of this contract, in
particular Division 1, and will govern in all conditions unless accepted herein.

Temporary Utilities: This Contractor will provide and maintain temporary toilet, water,
electric power and heat for the use of all trades. The temporary utilities will be removed
upon final completion of the work.

Protection of State Property: The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the
State property in the area of his work during the period of construction and he shall
exercise care to prevent damage. Damage resulting from the Contractor’s operations shall
be repaired at Contractor expense.

Permits, Licenses, and Fees: The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary
permits, licenses and inspections and shall comply with all applicable cities, township and
State ordinances, laws and regulations, the National Electric Code and any standards of
the local utility companies. In any case of conflict, the above regulations shall govern. The
Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the appropriate authority for inspections.

The Engineer/Architect shall be advised by the Contractor of any changes required to
conform to the above laws or regulations before undertaking such changes. Upon
completion, the Contractor shall furnish all intermediate and final certificates of inspection.

Guarantee: The Contractor shall furnish the state with a written guarantee to remedy any
defects due to faulty materials or labor which appear in the work within one year from the
date of final acceptance be the state.

Omissions: The drawings and specifications are intended to include all work and materials
necessary for completion of the work. Any incidental item of material, labor of detail
required for the proper execution and completion of the work and omitted from either the
drawings and specifications or both, but obviously required by governing codes, local
regulation, trade practices, operational functions, and good workmanship, shall be provided
as a part of the contract work without extra charge, even though not specifically detailed or
mentioned.

Inspection:     The Michigan Department of Transportation will designate an
Engineer/Architect for this project. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to notify
the Engineer/Architect of the date construction is to start and to contact the
Engineer/Architect periodically during the course of the work, so as to insure that the work
is being performed in accordance with the provisions of this contract. The authority of the
Engineer/Architect will be as noted in the 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction
Section 104.
                                                                        SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                                   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – DIVISION 1

Progress Meetings: Meetings on the job shall be held periodically, as directed by the
Engineer/Architect, to discuss the various phases and progress of the work. The
Contractor shall be represented by a person with full authority to act on all matters
pertaining to the work.

Approval of Materials and Shop Drawings: All materials shall be delivered to the
Engineer/Architect for his inspection and approval. Materials used in this building will be
approved by visual inspection, certification and shop drawings. No materials shall be
delivered to the site unless the item is clearly marked by the manufacturer, or supplier, with
sufficient information thereon to fully identify the item, such as brand name, trademark,
model number, a grade mark stamp or by delivery ticket, etc. If delivered materials are as
specified herein and so marked, they shall be considered to be complying with the
requirements of certification. Shop Drawings, as required, shall be submitted in SIX
COPIES, together with a transmittal letter from the Contractor to the Engineer/Architect,
who will forward them to the Design Division for approval. Four Shop Drawings reviewed
by the Design Division will be returned to the Engineer for distribution.

Shop Drawings may be complete drawings, catalog sheets, samples, or brochures
indicating the manufacturer's name, model or size number, type, quantity, etc., which shall
show and describe in detail the construction and operating characteristics of the equipment
or the description of the materials and shall be so marked to explicitly indicate the proposed
items. The approval of Shop Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility to correct errors or omissions or to provide adequate field measurements as
may be required.

It shall be the Contractors responsibility to call attention to all deviations from the plans,
specifications and details. If deviations have not been clearly identified, they will not be
considered as part of the shop drawing approval.

The following items shall be approved by certification or by Shop Drawings. All others will
be approved by visual inspection.

Architectural Shop Drawings and/or Samples Required:
Aluminum Doors & Frames ...................................................................                     Shop Drawings
Aluminum Windows & Frames ..............................................................                        Shop Drawings
Automatic Door Hardware .....................................................................                   Shop Drawings
Baby Changing Stations.........................................................................                 Shop Drawings
Brick .......................................................................................................   Samples
Disappearing Stairs ...............................................................................             Shop Drawings
Display Cases .......................................................................................           Shop Drawings
Drywall/Fire Resistant ...........................................................................              Shop Drawings
Fasteners - Rest Room Security Hardware............................................                             Shop Drawings
Floor Mats ..............................................................................................       Shop Drawings
Foundation Plan (reinforcing) .................................................................                 Shop Drawings
Grab Bars ..............................................................................................        Shop Drawings
                                                                        SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                                   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – DIVISION 1

Architectural Shop Drawings and/or Samples Required (Continued):
Hand Dryers ........................................................................................... Shop Drawings
Hardware................................................................................................ Shop Drawings
Insulation ............................................................................................... Shop Drawings
Janitor Shelf .......................................................................................... Shop Drawings
Lavatory Bowls ...................................................................................... Shop Drawings
Lavatory Counter top Unit ..................................................................... Shop Drawings
Masonry Wall Tile Backer Board .......................................................... Shop Drawings
Paint/ Color Chart................................................................................... Shop Drawings
Roofing .................................................................................................. Shop Drawings
Roof Trusses (Standard) ........................................................................ Shop Drawings
Sanitary Napkin Disposal ...................................................................... Shop Drawings
Signs & Lettering .................................................................................... Shop Drawings
Soap Dispensers ................................................................................... Shop Drawings
Soffits (Aluminum) .................................................................................. Shop Drawings
Stain/Color Chart.................................................................................... Samples
Steel Shelving ....................................................................................... Shop Drawings
Stress Skin Panel Walls & Lobby Roofing.............................................. Shop Drawings
Tile, Ceramic, Wall Tile .......................................................................... Shop Drawings
Timber Trusses, Lobby & Hardware ...................................................... Shop Drawings
Toilet Paper Dispensers ........................................................................ Shop Drawings
Toilet Partitions (Solid Phenolic) ............................................................ Shop Drawings
Trash Containers.................................................................................... Shop Drawings

Electrical Shop Drawings Required:
Air Ventilation System ...........................................................................              Shop Drawings
Boiler ......................................................................................................   Shop Drawings
Booster Pumps.......................................................................................            Shop Drawings
Conduit Schedule 40 PVC......................................................................                   Shop Drawings
Convenience Outlets & covers ...............................................................                    Shop Drawings
Disconnect Switches ..............................................................................              Shop Drawings
Emergency Exit Lights............................................................................               Shop Drawings
Enclosed Circuit Breakers ......................................................................                Shop Drawings
Exhaust Fans & Timers ..........................................................................                Shop Drawings
Grilles ....................................................................................................    Shop Drawings
Hand Holes ............................................................................................         Shop Drawings
Light Standards ......................................................................................          Shop Drawings
Light Fixtures & Lamps...........................................................................               Shop Drawings
Panel Boards & Circuit Breakers ............................................................                    Shop Drawings
Photo-Electric Controls...........................................................................              Shop Drawings
Pipe & Duct Insulation ............................................................................             Shop Drawings
Pump Hydronic Heating .........................................................................                 Shop Drawings
Radiant Floor Heating ............................................................................              Shop Drawings
Switches & Outlets .................................................................................            Shop Drawings
Temp. Control Thermostats....................................................................                   Shop Drawings



Electrical Shop Drawings Required cont.:
                                                                         SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                             GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – DIVISION 1
Well Switches & Covers ......................................................................... Shop Drawings
Well Pump Controls................................................................................ Shop Drawings
Wire & Cable .......................................................................................... Shop Drawings
Lift Station Controls ............................................................................... Shop Drawings

Mechanical Shop Drawings Required:
Air Admittance Valves ...........................................................................             Shop Drawings
Air Purgers ............................................................................................      Shop Drawings
Air Handling Unit with Cooling Coil.........................................................                  Shop Drawings
Aquastat Controls...................................................................................          Shop Drawings
Automatic Faucets..................................................................................           Shop Drawings
Back Flow Preventers ............................................................................             Shop Drawing
Booster Pumps ......................................................................................          Shop Drawing
Drinking Fountains ...............................................................................            Shop Drawing
Cleanouts ..............................................................................................      Shop Drawing
Closet Carriers ......................................................................................        Shop Drawing
Expansion Tank......................................................................................          Shop Drawing
Fire Suppression System with hydraulic calculations ............................                              Shop Drawing
Floor Drains ...........................................................................................      Shop Drawing
Flush Valves ..........................................................................................       Shop Drawing
Grilles & Registers..................................................................................         Shop Drawing
Hose Bibbs ............................................................................................       Shop Drawing
Hydro-pneumatic Tanks & Controls ......................................................                       Shop Drawing
Lagoon Structures ..................................................................................          Shop Drawing
Lift Station ..............................................................................................   Shop Drawing
Louvers ..................................................................................................    Shop Drawing
Low Water Cutoff ...................................................................................          Shop Drawing
Outdoor Outlets......................................................................................         Shop Drawing
Pipe Insulation & Plastic Covering .........................................................                  Shop Drawing
PVC Pipe and Fittings ...........................................................................             Certification
Pressure Tanks, Vacuum Breakers & Valves.........................................                             Shop Drawing
Pump - Well............................................................................................       Shop Drawing
Pump for Hydro. Heating........................................................................               Shop Drawing
Septic Tanks ..........................................................................................       Shop Drawing
Service Sink ..........................................................................................       Shop Drawing
Service Sink Faucets..............................................................................            Shop Drawing
Shock Absorbers ...................................................................................           Shop Drawing
Tempering Valves .................................................................................            Shop Drawing
Thermometer .........................................................................................         Shop Drawing
Toilet Seats ............................................................................................     Shop Drawing
Trap Primer Valves & Distribution Units .................................................                     Shop Drawing
Unions ...................................................................................................    Shop Drawing
Urinals ...................................................................................................   Shop Drawing
Valves ...................................................................................................    Shop Drawing
Water Closets ........................................................................................        Shop Drawing




Mechanical Shop Drawings Required:
                                                                        SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                            GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – DIVISION 1
Water Heater ......................................................................................... Shop Drawing
Water Meter .......................................................................................... Shop Drawing
Wall Hydrants ........................................................................................ Shop Drawing
Well Pump Controls ............................................................................... Shop Drawing

"As-Built" Drawings: Upon final completion the Contractor shall furnish to the
Engineer/Architect, two complete sets of drawings marked, signed and dated by him,
which shall indicate dimensional changes, construction features, pipe routing,
underground utility locations, etc., which shall show the actual installation. The
Engineer/Architect will return one set to the Region Maintenance Office, one to the
Design Division and place one set in the building. As-Built drawings shall be acceptable
to the Engineer

"OR APPROVED EQUAL" CLAUSE:
Products and materials specified in this Proposal are so named to establish a standard
of quality, methods of operation or appearance consistent with predetermined
requirements. Therefore, the Contractor shall be held to furnish the specified items
unless, after execution of the Contract, substitutions are necessary to expedite the
work, in which case he may submit a written request for consideration to the
Engineer/Architect. The judgment of the Engineer/Architect as to whether or not the
item is "equal” will be binding. Any request for substitution shall be accompanied with
complete specifications covering the proposed item.

Operational Literature and Equipment Guarantees: The Contractor shall furnish to
the Engineer/Architect two copies of all operating instructions, repair part lists,
equipment manuals, equipment guarantees, warranties and automatic control diagrams
normally required and furnished by the manufacturer. The Engineer/Architect shall
return one copy to the Region Office and place one copy in the Building.
Manufacturer’s instructions shall be strictly followed unless higher standards are noted
on the drawings or in these specifications.




                                                    *****
                                                       SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                                  SITE – DIVISION 2

Furnish all labor and equipment as may be required to prepare the building site such as
demolition, clearing, grubbing, excavating, backfilling and rough and finish grading, as
shown on the drawings and as herein specified. Operations shall be conducted so that
material outside of the limits of construction will not be disturbed. The Contractor shall
visit the site for familiarization of the existing field conditions, pertinent building data,
and to understand the intent of the contract documents.

Topsoil Stripping: Existing topsoil may be stripped from the construction area for
re-use and stockpiled as directed by the Engineer/Architect.

Excavation: All excavations shall be made to the called for depth of proposed footings.
 The excavation shall be filled with Class II granular fill, compacted in accordance with
the 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction Section 206, with the fill and ground
surface leveled off to receive concrete footings, and shall be free of debris. Excess
excavation, without authorization, shall be filled with 2500 p.s.i. commercial grade
concrete at Contractor's expense. Unsound soil conditions shall be reported
immediately and all excavations shall be inspected and approved by the region soils
engineer before footings are poured.

Excavation shall be sufficiently made so that no work rests on soil which is not capable
of withstanding the soil pressure of 2500 lbs. per square foot. If the Contractor is in
doubt as to the capacity of the soil at the bottom of the footings or other work, he shall
ask for further instructions from the Architect-Engineer; and failing to do this, he shall be
responsible for any damage to the building due to settlement. Before forms are placed
for footings, the bottom of all footing excavations shall be thoroughly tamped with a
mechanical tamper.

Coordinate a Footing Check by the Departments region soils engineer prior to pouring
the footings. Open excavations with a cut slope angle not steeper than 1V:1H
(45 degrees) will not be acceptable.

Potential exists for a high water table at this location: The Contractor shall take all
necessary precautions to keep the excavations clear of water during construction.
Suitable pumping equipment shall be available for use at all times.

Shoring: The Contractor shall install shoring as necessary to safely maintain
excavated banks for the protection of workers and to prevent undermining of adjacent
areas of construction. Any injuries or damage resulting from failure of shore members
or a non observance of these requirements shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
without additional cost to the State.

Dispose of excavated material as directed by the Engineer/Architect. Provide sufficient
shoring and bracing of existing structures, existing piping, and excavations until new
framing, supports, and foundations are placed and secured.
                                                      SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                                 SITE – DIVISION 2

Backfilling: If called for on the plans, backfill below footings with Structural
Embankment Granular Material, Class II, installed in accordance with the 2003
Standard Specifications for Construction, Sections 205, 206,& 902. Class III granular
material shall be evenly spread in layers of not more than 6 inches in depth and
machine compacted to not less than 95% of maximum unit weight. Prior to
compaction, the fill area shall be brought to its optimum moisture content.

Backfill placed above bottom of footing shall be Granular Material Class III, compact all
fill to 95% maximum unit density at optimum moisture content by means of a hand
operated vibratory machine. Place backfill simultaneously at each side of foundation
walls and compact in 6" layers after the walls have attained sufficient strength to bear
compaction. Backfill against unit masonry walls shall in no case be placed earlier than
48 hours after the masonry is completed. Walls of any types or other parts of the
structure damaged or showing excessive displacement as a result of the backfilling
operations shall be repaired or removed and rebuilt by the Contractor without additional
cost to the State as directed by the Architect-Engineer.

Outside the structure, backfill to within 4 inches of the finish grade where seeding is to
occur, or to within 5 inches of the finish grade where sod is to occur. Material shall
contain no stones larger than 6". Stones larger than 2" will not be permitted in the top
6" of fill.

Slope Restoration: This work shall consist of leveling all disturbed or graded areas that
are within the construction limits and placing topsoil, seed, mulch, fertilizer, and
anchoring mulch where called for on the plans or designated by the Architect-Engineer.

Finish Grading: Clean topsoil shall be used for coverage over backfill at proposed
lawn areas, lightly raked and spread in a three inch minimum layer and graded to
conform to present grade levels, ready for seeding. Topsoil removed from these areas
may be used for finish grading. All materials shall meet the requirements in Section 816
of the 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction. All stone, rock, and debris larger
than 1" diameter shall be removed from disturbed areas before seeding and mulching.

The entire area within the construction limits shall be blended to provide a mowable
lawn when work is complete. Transition areas between new, existing, and undisturbed
ground shall be smooth and uniform in appearance. The grade shall slope away from
building walls.

Water Control: Do not allow surface water or direct precipitation to accumulate in
excavations or on exposed subgrades. Remove water to prevent softening of
foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changed detrimental to stability of
subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, suction and discharge lines,
and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from
excavations. Convey water removed from excavations and precipitation to collection or
run-off area. Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversion
methods outside excavation limits for structure. Do not use trench excavations as
temporary drainage ditches.
                                                       SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                                  SITE – DIVISION 2

Foundation drain tile with geotextile-wrap: Provide and connect proposed drain tile
at foundation to possible existing drain and/or existing storm drain. The foundation drain
pipe shall be a 6 inch diameter perforated pipe or tubing, meeting the requirements
specified in Section 909, 910 of the 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction with
the following exceptions and additions; pipe perforations may be holes or slots and may
be in 3 or 4 lines spaced around the circumference of the pipe at 120 or 90 degrees
respectively, or may be spaced in the bottom segment of the pipe in accordance with
AASHTO M 36. A top locating strip or embossment is not required.

The geotextile wrap for encasing the pipe shall be of an approved material, such as
nylon, polypropylene, fiberglass, or polyester and shall be either woven, heat bonded,
knitted, or of continuous fibers. The fabric shall completely cover and be secured to the
pipe. Knitted polyester fabrics shall weigh at least 3.0 ounces per square yard; other
filter fabrics shall weigh at least 3.5 ounces per square yard. Fabric weight will be
determined on the fabric in its "as used" condition. Geotextiles shall be strong and
tough and shall have a porosity such that all soil particles finer than 0.025 mm will pass
through the fabric and all particles larger than 0.106 mm (No. 140 sieve) will be
retained. Geotextiles shall be stored and handles carefully and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Torn or punctured Geotextiles shall not be used
unless repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect-Engineer.

Connect foundation drain to 6” under drain subgrade paid for separately ten foot outside
building limits.

The geotextile-wrapped under drains shall be installed as specified in Section 909, 910
of the 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction. Back fill with 34R material around
the pipe unless called for differently on the plans.

Foundation Soil Preparation: Exposure to environmental moisture may weaken the
soils at the footing bearing level if the foundation excavations remain open for too long a
time. Place foundation concrete the same day those excavations are dug whenever
possible. If the bearing soils are softened by surface water intrusion or exposure, the
softened soil must be removed from the foundation excavation bottom immediately prior
to placement of concrete. Excavation must remain open overnight or if rainfall becomes
imminent while the bearing soils are exposed, place a 2-to-4-inch thick "mud-mat" of
"lean" (3000 psi) concrete on the bearing soils before the placement of reinforcing steel.


Permits: Obtain any required permits for ground water withdrawal and dewatering
discharge and be responsible for all costs of discharge. Obtain permission from
appropriate agencies for discharge of water to existing facilities, either on-or-off-site.

All costs for water control and corrective and preventative measures for moisture
susceptible subgrade, including power for pumping if required. Disposal and "lean"
concrete are included in the contract and are not subject to adjustment by change order.
                                           *****
                                                                         SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                                               CONCRETE – DIVISION 3

Furnish all materials and labor to install concrete and reinforcing work as shown and
herein specified.

Follow these 2003 Michigan Department of Transportation Standard Specification for
Construction Sections:
    Portland cement Concrete Pavement .................................................................... 601
    Concrete Quality Assurance .................................................................................. 605
    Foundation Piling ................................................................................................... 705

Cast in Place Concrete: shall be a commercial grade developing a minimum
compressive strength of 3500 p.s.i. at 28 days. Maximum slump shall be 5 inches.
Coarse aggregate shall be Class 6AA, conforming to 2003 Standard Specifications.
Proportioning, transportation, cold and hot weather protection and delivery records shall
be as directed by the Engineer/Architect. No additives will be permitted without the
approval of the Engineer/Architect. Exterior concrete flatwork shall have 5%, + 1%, air
entrainment admixture agent in mix.

Cast in place concrete shall comply with the following specifications, standards and
codes: ASTM-C138, ASTM-C143, ASTM-C192, and ACI-318, ACI-306, ACI-305, ACI-
211.

Forms: Forms may be of metal or wood, sufficiently strong to prevent distortion. Build
true to lines, shapes and dimensions as shown. Form coating shall not stain or harm
exposed concrete surfaces. Formwork shall with all standards of the “Recommended
Practice for Concrete Formwork–ACI -347 and ACI-301”. Remove forms only as
directed.

Reinforcing Steel: Bars shall be new billet deformed steel conforming to ASTM A-615,
Grade 60, free from excessive rust, oil or other foreign substances; complete with
chairs, ties or spacers as may be required for proper installation. Lap No. 4 bars 12
inches at splices. Bend all bars at corners and lap bars 12 inch minimum at splices.

Fabric Reinforcement: Welded steel wire fabric shall be 6 inch by 6 inch mesh, No. 10
ga. wire. Welded wire fabric shall comply with ASTM-A185. Install at mid-slab depth
and lap 6 inches at splices.

Perimeter Insulation: See Moisture Control-Division 7.

Expansion Joint Filler: Install molded bituminous fiber material, 1/2" thick, to full slab
depth where floor slabs abut walls.

Joints: All contraction joints shall be placed and made according to industry standards.
Saw cuts shall be made when the concrete has hardened enough that no excess
raveling or spalling occurs but before random cracks develop. Clean all joints, including
the surface of the concrete next to the joint groove, with appropriate tools and
equipment to remove slurry, stones, or other foreign materials.
                                                    SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                          CONCRETE – DIVISION 3

Placing and Finishing: Place concrete immediately upon delivery and deposit
continuously until unit of operation is completed. Fill forms completely and prevent
voids and surface defects by vibrating with suitable tools during placement.

As soon as concrete has set sufficiently, float surface with compactor power floats.
Then steel hand trowel surface, burnishing to smooth, hard, dense finish, free from
trowel marks.

Surfaces which are to remain exposed shall have a dense steel trowel finish free of
trowel marks. Concrete sub floors supporting mosaic finished floor shall be screeded
with a surface variation not to exceed 1/4" in ten feet, unless otherwise noted.

Concrete grade entrance slabs shall slope 1/4" per foot away from building and shall be
steel trowelled and cross-broom with a fine nylon brush. If necessary, exposed
concrete surfaces shall have form marks ground smooth. All joints shall be 1 inch deep
and edges finished with a 1/4 inch radius tool.

Protection and Curing: Protect new concrete work from loads or traffic until
sufficiently set. Cure concrete slabs by keeping continuously wet for 5 days, or as
otherwise directed by the Engineer/Architect.

Cold Weather Protection: Concrete work during the cold weather season requires
that protection be provided. Measures shall be taken to prevent damage to the
concrete by protecting the grade from freezing, by heating aggregates and water to
produce concrete with a minimum temperature of 70oF, by using insulating blankets
and/or temporary heat under enclosures, as may be directed by the Engineer/Architect.

1/2" Wall Tile Backer Board: Furnish and install 1/2" thick Moisture-resistant Util-A-
Cret, United States Gypsum or Durock Concrete Backer board or approved equal.
Install backer board in as long as lengths as possible, using 1-1/2" galvanized screws
spaced 8" o.c. Install on interior rest room walls over stress skin panel wall wrap all
window jambs, heads and sills where ceramic wall tile is to be installed. Board must
meet ANSI A 118.9. Finish backer board seams and joint to receive wall tile pre
manufactures recommendations.

Radiant Floor Heating: Encase radiant floor tubing in concrete flooring, pull up to top
1/3 of concrete slab. See Heating & Ventilating - Division 14.




                                         *****
                                                    SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                           MASONRY – DIVISION 4

Construct all masonry work, install loose metal lintels, set anchor bolts, door and
window frames, build in work of other trades and neatly patch damaged areas as may
be required.

Face Brick: Select an exterior building brick conforming to ASTM C 216-00, Grade
SW, type FBS, standard size. In preparing his bid, the Contractor shall estimate the
cost of the brick at $550.00 per thousand, unloaded and stacked at the building site. If
brick selected costs more or less than the amount specified, an amount equal to the
difference in cost will be added to or deducted from the contract price.

The quantity of face brick required shall be the amount installed in the work as
determined by the Engineer/Architect.

Actual brick will be selected by the Roadside Development Section. Ends of brick sills,
heads, and jambs shall be a solid brick; no exposed frogs will be permitted.

Concrete Masonry Units: Units shall be Grade A quality hollow load bearing units
having a compressive strength of 800 p.s.i. of gross area per unit, aged not less than 60
days and meeting ASTM C 90-00, Grade N-1. Special shapes such as lintels, corner
block, etc., as may be required, shall be provided. Precast concrete lintels shall have 8
inches of bearing on each side of openings.

Mortar: For concrete block - Type M conforming to ASTM C-270:
  1 pt.- Portland cement, ASTM C-150, Type 1, grey
  1 pt. - Masonry cement, ASTM C-91
  4 1/2 to 6 pts. sharp sand by volume.

For brick - Type N conforming to ASTM C-270:
1 part Portland cement, ASTM C-150, Type 1,
2 part Hydrated Lime, ASTM C-207, Type S
4 1/2 to 6 part sharp sand (amount of sand to be 3 times combined volume of cement
and lime).

Prepared masonry cements meeting the above requirements, as manufactured by
Medusa, Brixment, Atlas, or approved equal, are acceptable.

Mortar Color: Mortar color shall be natural.

Wall Flashing: See Moisture Control-Division 7.

Installing Concrete Masonry Units: Set each course of concrete block in running
bond with full 3/8 inch bed and head joints. Joints shall be struck concave where
exposed. Masonry wall shall not vary more than 1/8" per 8’-0” height.

Block Wall Reinforcement: Masonry walls shall be reinforced with No. AA 610 3 Wire
Blok-Trus or No.AA580 Adjustable Econo-Cavity Lok, as manufactured by AA Wire
Products. Comparable items of Dur-O-Wal or Wire Bond, are acceptable.
                                                      SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                             MASONRY – DIVISION 4

Brick Veneer Wall Ties: Furnish and install galvanized adjustable Wire brick ties, ties
must be embedded at least 5/8" into the bed joint from the air space and must have at
least 5/8" cover of mortar to the exposed face. Place ties so that the portion within the
bed joint is completely surrounded by the mortar. Install 16" o.c. maximum horizontally
and vertically. All brick ties and tie anchors shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A 153.

Precast Concrete Lintels: Furnish and install precast concrete lintels of size and
shape as shown or as specified. Reinforce lintels with 4 - #4 horizontal reinforcing bars
4 - #3 at 3" each side of opening and 4 -#4 at 3" vertically. Provide for at least 8"
bearing each end unless otherwise indicated.

Installing Face Brick: Set each course of face brick in running bond, unless otherwise
shown, with full bed and head joints. Joints may be finished concave, raked, grapevine,
or otherwise as directed by the Engineer/Architect.

Sloping brick sills shall have joints struck concave. All mortar joints shall be struck so
as to be fully adhered to adjoining brick. Cracked, checked, or broken face brick shall
not be used.

Install running brick band as shown on drawings, and as specified. Project grade
soldier course and the two (2) rowlock courses a minimum of 1" out beyond the
standard running brick, or as detailed.

Install weep holes 24 inches on center horizontally at the base of the brick veneer walls
around entire building. Holes shall be approximately 1/4 inch diameter formed of
greased sash cord, cut flush with brick. Care shall be taken to keep weep holes and
flashing free of mortar.

Protection: All masonry materials shall be protected against damage before and
during installation. Masonry shall not be installed unless the air temperature is 36oF or
above.

Heating of units to remove frost or excessive moisture shall not exceed 140oF. Protect
finished work against freezing for not less than 48 hours. Tops of uncompleted walls,
at the conclusion of the day's work, shall be covered with tarpaulins or 15# Roofer's Felt
securely held in place. When work is resumed, top surfaces shall be cleaned of loose
mortar and, if drying weather, thoroughly wet. Upon completion, patch damaged areas
caused by other trades and tuck point as required, leaving work in perfect condition.
                                                    SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                           MASONRY – DIVISION 4

Masonry Cold Weather Construction: The 'Recommended Practices and Guide
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction', latest edition, published by the
International Masonry Industry, all Weather Council shall be followed. A copy of this
guide shall be on the job site whenever masonry work is taking place and shall be made
available to the Engineer/Architect. Materials shall be stored and protected to prevent
moisture from entering. Masonry sand shall be thawed before using. Masonry units
shall be heated to above freezing before using without overheating. Mortar, at point of
use, shall be maintained at not less than 40oF by use of under-board heaters or by more
frequent mixing of smaller mortar batches. A thermometer shall be made available for
use by the Engineer/Architect at all times.

Cleaning: All exposed masonry shall be cleaned. Thoroughly wet surfaces with clear
water and scrub with stiff bristle brushes using a solution of Acme Brick "Easy Clean,"
"Tough Clean," Craft Klean, or Sure Klean 600," mixed as per manufacturer's directions,
followed immediately by a thorough rinsing with clear water. All doors, windows, lintels,
other corrodible parts and sills shall be protected during cleaning.

Concrete block which is to remain exposed shall be cleaned by wire brush, or other
approved method.




                                         *****
                                                     SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                              METALS – DIVISION 5

Materials: Furnish and install all materials necessary and incidental to complete the work
as shown. All steel shall be new, straight and free of loose mill scale, rust and foreign
matter and shall conform to ASTM A36, latest edition. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and
Bars: ASTM A 36. Galvanized sheet and strip: ASTM A526 with G90 coating.
Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185, as indicated.

Quality assurance:
Welders shall be certified in accordance with American Welding Society Standards. In
addition the following reference standards shall govern:
   • AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction, "Specification for the Design,
       Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings".
   • AWS: American Welding Society Standard Code, D10.
   • AWS: American Welding Society, "Specifications for Iron and Steel Arc-welding
       Electrodes".
   • AWS: American Welding Society, "Code for Arc-and Gas-Welding in Building
       Construction".
   • ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
   • Federal Specifications TT-P-57B and TT-86-A.

Welding: Welders shall be certified in accordance with American Welding Society
Standards. Cut out and replace defective welds. Use electric-arc process with coated rods,
not fluxed, to produce a shielded arc.

Ensure that surface seams and joints to be welded are free of rust, scale, grease and other
foreign material.

Make welds free of craters, occlusions, cracks and porosity with physical and chemical
characteristics equal to or better than those materials being welded.

Increase length of fillet welds indicated on drawings by at least twice weld size. Length
indicated is the minimum effective length and must be increased to allow for beginning and
ending weld.

Miscellaneous:
Fasteners: Appropriate type and grade required by place of installation. Provide stainless
steel or zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use.

Generally, provide the following unless indicated otherwise.
Bolts and nuts: hexagon head type complying with ASTM A307, Grade A.
Washers: plain carbon steel complying with Federal Specification #FF-W-92.
Lock washers: helical spring type carbon steel complying with Federal Specification #FF-W-
84. Toggle bolts: tumble-wing type complying with Federal Specification #FF-B-588.
Furnish masonry anchorage devices complying with FF-S-325.
                                                    SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                             METALS – DIVISION 5

Miscellaneous cont.: Non-metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Pre-mixed, non-metallic,
non-corrosive, non-staining product contained selected silica sands, Portland cement,
shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CRD-
C621.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

                    •   Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co.
                    •   Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals
                    •   Masterflow 713; Master Builders
                    •   Five Star Grout; U.S. Grout Corp.
                    •   Upcon; Upco Chem. Div., USM Corp.
                    •   Propak; Protex Industries, Inc.

Arc-welding electrodes: AWS (Reference Standard C above), ASTM A-233 Class E-70,
suitable for the positions and other conditions of intended use.

Loose Steel Lintels: Install steel lintels of sizes shown. Openings shall have one
angle for each 4 inches of wall thickness, unless otherwise noted. If size is not noted,
use the following:

For clear spans up to 5'       - 3 1/2"x 3 1/2"x 5/16"
For clear spans up to 7'       - 4"x 3 1/2" x 5/16"
For clear spans up to 9'       - 5"x 3 1/2" x 3/8"
For clear spans up to 10'      - 6"x 3 1/2" x 3/8"

Provide for 6 inch bearing at each end. Prime coat steel with zinc chromate, or
approved equal, before installation.

Glue Laminated Truss Gusset Plates & Clip Angles: Furnish and install as shown,
complete with bolts, nuts and washers. Apply one coat rust inhibitive primer as describe
below and one coat of finish flat black paint. After installation gusset plates and clip
angles shall receive one additional coat of flat black paint. Remove all sharp edges.

Bolts, Nuts and Washers for the gusset plates and clip angles shall comply with ASTM
A-307, all Lag Bolts to meet FS-FF-B-561 Specifications. All shear plates and split rings
shall meet current National Design Specifications for Wood Construction.
                                                     SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                                METALS – DIVISION 5
Steel Vanity & Baby Changer Supports: Furnish and install as shown, complete with
bolts, nuts, washers and expansion anchors. Prime coat and finish paint (2) two coats
of flat black paint as specified below. Remove all sharp edges.

The work includes all structural steel complete with required bracing, welds, washers, nuts,
bolts, shins, anchor bolts, leveling plates, base plates, bearing plates, cap plates and other
related accessories.

Finishing: Paint for shop priming and field touch-up: Federal specification TT-P-57B, Type I,
or TT-86-A, Type 3, or one of the following:

    1.        Tnemac #99 Red Metal Primer manufactured by Tnemac Co., Inc.,
              North Kansas City, Missouri.

    2.        Rust-Oleum X-60 red base metal primer zinc chromate primer manufactured
              by Rust-Oleum Corp., Evanston, Illinois.

    3.        Other types lead-free, abrasion resistant, rust-inhibitive type, as approved equal
              by Architect prior to bids and selected for compatibility with substrate and finish
              paint system indicated in Section 9.




                                            *****
                                                      SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                           CARPENTRY – DIVISION 6

Furnish and install all rough and finish carpentry work plumb, level and true to line in a
good quality workmanlike manner. Install various specialties and items as specified.

Rough Lumber: Lumber shall be Construction Grade Spruce Pine Fir, No. 2, Southern
Pine, or better, with minimum FS = 1500# and E = 1,760,000, well seasoned, sound and
free from excessive warp.

All lumber shall be dressed S4S (surfaced four sides) according to ASTM D 245. All lumber
sizes are nominal.

Preservative treated wood products: Preservative treated wood products shall meet
the requirements of the current American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA)
standard for pressure treatment, C1 & C2. Do not use chemicals containing chromium
or arsenic. Also follow the American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) standards:
C1, C2, P5, E13, M4 and U1. Provide treated material that has been produced under
quality assurance program conducted be an American Lumber Standard Committee
(ALSC) recognized agency.

Manufactured Roof Trusses: Furnish and install prefabricated wood trusses and wood
outriggers at eaves consisting of metal plate connected members which are fabricated from
dimension lumber and which have been cut and assembled prior to delivery to the job site.
Trusses shall be placed 24" O.C. or as shown on the plans. Conventional trusses shall be
designed to provide a clear attic space over the janitor and utility rooms, bottom cords in
this area shall be 2" x 12" minimum.

Quality Assurance: TPI Standards:         Comply with applicable requirements and
recommendations of the following Truss Plate Institute (TPI) publications:

"Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses".
"Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Parallel Chord Wood Trusses".
"Commentary and Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses".
"Commentary and Recommendations for Bracing Wood Trusses".
"Quality Control Manual".

Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "National Design
Specification for Wood Construction" published by N.F.P.A.

Lumber Standard: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable rules of the respective grading
inspecting agencies for species and grade of lumber indicated.

Connector Plate Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide truss connector plates manufactured
by a firm which is a member of TPI and which complies with TPI quality control procedures for
manufacture of connector plates published in TPI "Quality Control Manual".
                                                           SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                                CARPENTRY – DIVISION 6

Manufactured Roof Trusses cont.: Uniformity of Manufacture for Connector Plates:
Provide metal connector plates from a single manufacturer.
Product Data: Submit fabricator's technical data covering lumber, metal plates, hardware,
fabrication process, treatment (if any), handling and erection.

Submit certificate, signed by an officer of fabricating firm, indicating that truss to be supplied for
project comply with indicated requirements.

Submit shop drawings showing species, sizes and stress grades of lumber to be used; pitch,
span, camber configuration and spacing for each type of truss required; type, size material,
finish, design value, and location of metal connector plates; and bearing and anchorage
details.

To the extent engineering design considerations are indicated as fabricator's responsibility,
submit design analysis and test reports indicating loading, section modulus, assumed
allowable stress, stress diagrams and calculations, and similar information needed for analysis
and to ensure that trusses comply with requirements.

Provide shop drawings, which have been signed and stamped by a structural engineer
licensed to practice in the state of Michigan.

Delivery, storage and handling: Handle and store trusses with care, and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending,
overturning or other cause for which truss is not designed to resist or endure.

Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying
work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
metal connector plates which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
               • Gang Nail Systems, Inc.
               • Robbins Manufacturing Co.
               • Truss Connectors of America
               • Truswall Systems Corp.
               • Teco Products

Lumber: Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency.

Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as
required by PS 20, for dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

Provide seasoned lumber with maximum moisture content at time of dressing indicated below:
19%
                                                        SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                             CARPENTRY – DIVISION 6

Lumber Species: Any softwood, at Fabricator's option, as required to comply with other
requirements. Any grade of lumber fulfilling requirements indicated for species, stress ratings,
and moisture content. Stress Rating: Provide lumber, which has been graded or tested and
certified, at indicated moisture content.

Connector Plate Material: Metal complying with following requirements, unless otherwise
indicated; not less than "0.036" thick, coated thickness (Contractor's option if more than one
metal indicated). Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 446, Grade A, Coating G60.

Electrolytic Zinc Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591, Coating Glass C, with minimum structural
quality equivalent to ANSI/ASTM A 446, Grade A.

Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish indicated, complying
applicable Federal Specifications for nails, screws, bolts, nuts and washers and anchoring
devices.

Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles and sizes to produce close fitting joints with
wood-to-wood bearing in assembled units.

Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness and anchorage details
required for types of joint designs indicated.

Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure
uniformity and accuracy of assembly with close fitting joints. Position members to product
design camber indicated.

Connect truss members by means of metal connector plates accurately located and securely
fastened to wood members by means indicated or approved.

General execution: Erect and brace trusses to comply with recommendations of
manufacturer and the Truss Plate Institute.

Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other, located
accurately at design spacing indicated.

Hoist units in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required,
applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator, exercising care not to damage
truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.

Provide temporary bracing as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel and in location
indicated, until permanent bracing is installed.

Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated.

Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain design
spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply with other
indicated requirements. Do not cut or remove truss members.
                                                        SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                             CARPENTRY – DIVISION 6

Laminated Timber Trusses and Beams: Furnish and install timber trusses and
beams constructed of Select Structural Grade Douglas Fir-Larch or Southern Yellow
Pine. Finished appearance shall be Architectural Grade. Laminated truss members
and beams shall meet the requirements of the American National Standard for Wood
Products & Structural Glued Laminated Timber (ANSI/AITC) A190.1-2000 and
American Institute of Timber Construction Standard Specification 117. The truss
members shall be of sizes shown, fabricated to the Product Standard PS 56-73 and to
the Inspection Manual, AITC 200, by an AITC licensed laminator.

Laminated truss members and beams shall have one coating of a clear penetrating
sealer, be wrapped for protection, stored off the ground and protected from the weather
until installed and will receive two additional finish coats of clear exterior protective
sealant (to be determined after brick and roof color selection). Color will be selected by
the Roadside Development Section in the shop drawing process.

Description of work:
Design intent of glued laminated structural units is shown on drawings. The manufacturer is
responsible for the final design as approved per shop drawings.

Glued laminated timber is hereby defined to include wood members fabricated from 1" or 2"
nominal thickness lumber glued face-to-face.

Design and furnishing of all connector plates, gussets and clip angles for glue-laminated timber
is the responsibility of laminated timber fabricator. Design intent is shown on Drawings.

Painting all exposed steel connector plates, gussets, clip angles, etc. is the responsibility of
laminated timber fabricator.

Quality Assurance:
Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with requirements of the American National
Standard for Wood Products and Structural Glued Laminated Timber (ANSI/AITC) A190.1-
1992 and American Institute of Timber Construction Standard Specifications117. The truss
members shall be of sizes shown, fabricated to the Product Standard PS 56-73 and to the
Inspection Manual, AITC 200, by an AITC licensed laminator.

Manufacturer Qualification: Provide factory-glued structural units, produced by an
AITC-licensed firm, qualified to apply the AITC "Quality Inspected" mark.

Factory mark each piece of glued laminated structural units with AITC Quality Inspected mark.

Installer: Glued laminated structural unit manufacturer, or a firm licensed by manufacturer.




Design by Manufacturer: Where portions of final design for glued laminated timber members
                                                       SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                               CARPENTRY – DIVISION 6
are indicated as manufacturer's responsibility (any element of design consideration), comply
with applicable provisions of AITC 117 - "DESIGN, Standard Specifications for Structural
Glued Laminated Timber of Softwood Species".

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data, specifications and installation instructions covering
lumber, adhesives, fabrication process, preservative treatment, accessories and protection.

Submit certification, signed by an officer of the manufacturing firm, indicating glued laminated
timbers comply with requirements of PS 56.

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, showing full dimension of each member and layout of
entire structural system. Show large-scale details of connections, connectors and other
accessories. Indicate species and stress grade of lumber, type of glue, and other variables in
required work.

To the extent engineering design considerations are specified as manufacturer's responsibility,
show loading, section modulus, assumed allowable stress, stress diagrams and calculations,
and similar information needed for analysis.

Provide shop drawings, which have been signed and stamped by a structural engineer
licensed to practice in the state of Michigan.

Delivery, storage, handling:
Keep glued laminated structural units dry during delivery, storage, handling, and erection, by
maintaining factory-applied protective covering in weather tight and light-proof condition, or by
applying other weather tight protection. Maintain protective covering until building enclosure is
completed to extent necessary for protection of interior work, and until final finishing of exterior
work is ready to proceed. Do not store in areas of either excessively high or excessively low
relative humidity; comply with manufacturer's instructions.

Time delivery and installation of work to avoid extended on-site storage, and to avoid delaying
work of other trades whose work must follow erection of glued laminated work.

Glued Laminated Structural Units:
Lumber: Comply with PS 56 and applicable lumber association standards cited therein for
grades required to achieve for allowable stress, appearance, fabrication limitations and
species.

Stress Values: Provide glued laminated timer members sized as shown on drawings that
meet or exceed following stress values:
             • Bending (Fc), 2400 psi.
             • Horizontal shear (Fv), 94 psi.
             • Compression perpendicular to grain (Fc-tension face), 218 psi.
             • Compression perpendicular to grain (Fc-compression face), 385 psi.
             • Modulus of Elasticity (E), 1,600 psi.

Glued Laminated Structural Units cont.:
Lumber Species: Southern Yellow Pine or Select Structural grade Douglas Larch.
                                                          SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                               CARPENTRY – DIVISION 6

Adhesive: Comply with PS 56, using wet-use (waterproof) adhesive, unless otherwise
indicated.
End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard transparent, colorless wood sealer, effective in retarding
transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts.

Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard translucent penetrating wood sealer, which will
not interfere with application of wood stain and transparent finish, or paint finish, as indicated.

Finish for Trusses: Two coats of either clear exterior stain or clear protective sealant to be
selected by the Architect.

Finish for Connectors, Gusset Plates, Clip Angles, etc.: One coat of finish paint over one coat
of rust inhibiting primer. After installation, second coat of finish paint shall be applied.

Fabrication: Comply with PS 56 in providing units indicated; where dimensions are not
completely documented, provide manufacturer's standard sizes and shapes required to fulfill
indicated performances.

Appearance Grade: Provide Architectural Grade timbers, complying with AITC 110.

Factory applied protection:
Before shipping or exposing to outdoor conditions, individually wrap each member with
manufacturer's standard, opaque, durable, water-resistant, plastic-coated paper covering, with
water-resistant seams.

Comply with AITC 108 "Standard for Heavy Timber Construction" and manufacturer's
instructions. Install miscellaneous steel connectors, anchors, and accessories as indicated.

Handle and temporarily support members to prevent visible surface damage.

Do not remove wrapping on individually wrapped members until it will serve no useful purpose,
including protection from the weather, soiling and damage from work of other trades.

Coordinate removal of wrapping with finishing work specified in the Division 9 sections. Retain
wrapping wherever it can serve as a painting shield.

Repairs damaged surfaces and finishes after completion of erection and removal of
wrappings, or replace damaged members as directed where damage is beyond satisfactory
repair.

Advise Contractor of necessary limitations on heating, ventilating and air conditioning in
building, in order to avoid damage or deterioration of glued-laminated.


Structural Stress Skin Panels (Exterior Walls, & Lobby Roof): Provide all materials,
labor, and equipment to install Structural Panels as shown on the drawings and as
specified.
                                                       SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                            CARPENTRY – DIVISION 6

The panels shall be a pressure laminated composite panel of approved 7/16" (min.)
OSB skins (both sides of panels) and 9 1/2" (Lobby Roof) and 5 1/2" (Exterior Walls) at
one (1) pound density expanded polystyrene (EPS) Borate treated core. The panels
shall be a minimum of eight feet (8') wide and in as long lengths as possible. The
deflection for the roof panels shall be L/360. Where the roof panels are to have a
finished fascia attached a 2"x 10" edge blocking. The same manufacturer shall supply
all panel headers, connections, LVL splines, approved fasteners, stress plates, seam
tape (required), construction adhesive, foam sealants and miscellaneous hardware
required to complete the work. The panel manufacturer shall certify that the panels
have been inspected by a third party quality control testing laboratory. The panel
manufacturer shall also certify that the panels have been tested in accordance with
ASTM E-72, ASTM E-119, ASTM E-84, UBC 17-5, BOCA approved, and UL Listed and
have been manufactured with a Borate treated insect repellent. All structural stress skin
roof and wall panels shall be accompanied with verified structural calculations by a
registered Architect or professional Engineer qualified to perform such work.

The OSB shall be identified with an APA performance rating mark, with an exposure 1
durability rating. Minimum physical properties shall be tested and described in APA
PRP-108.

Installation shall be in strict accordance with the panel manufacturer recommendations.
The panels may require some field cutting for correct installation.

All roof and wall panel connection joints shall be made with solid LVL’s or SYP
(Southern Yellow Pine #1 structural grade or approved equal).

Fasten roof panels to timber trusses or beams with manufacturer approved zinc
galvanized screws. Penetration shall be a minimum of three inches (3") into structural
support. Screw length shall be a minimum of twelve inches (14"), with sixteen inch (16")
spacing on all supports or as recommended by the panel manufacturer.

Apply a continuous bead of adhesive/sealant ¼” to 3/8” diameter in the six locations
shown on the plans.

Install 12” wide seam tape on top of all lobby trusses. Place seam tape backing paper
side up staple to top of glue-lam truss after panels are set, peel backing paper from
each side of truss flaps and stick them to panel surface.

Install 6” wide seam tape full height on wall panels’ interior joints.

All roof and wall fasteners shall be corrosion resistant as supplied or approved by the
panel manufacturer. Splines if used in joining panels shall be supplied by the panel
manufacturer.

Structural Stress Skin Panels (Exterior Walls, & Lobby Roof) cont.: All construction
adhesive and foam sealant shall be compatible with all components of the panel and
                                                  SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                          CARPENTRY – DIVISION 6
adjacent materials as supplied and approved by the panel manufacturer. Install all
caulk, adhesive and sealants per manufacturer's details.
Adhesives shall be an approved laminating adhesive having an in use temperature
range of -40F to +250F.

The Contractor has the option of installing and finishing the 1"x 6" T&G lobby ceiling
boards before the roof panels are installed. If the boards are installed beforehand, lay
out all seams to rest on the timber supports. If the finish ceiling boards are installed
after the panels have been installed, butt 1" x 6" to beams and finish with quarter round
trim.

Protection of Panels: When storing panels, do not allow them to come into ground
contact. Stored panels shall remain dry. The Contractor shall not allow panels to be
stored in an unsupported manner. Improper storage may cause tolerance problems in
the field. Roof panels must be fully protected from weather by roofing materials to
provide temporary protection at the end of the day or when rain or snow is eminent.
The Contractor shall remove and replace all walls and or roof panels that have become
excessively wet or damaged before proceeding with installation of additional panels, at
the Contractor's expense.

Finish Molding Lumber: Attach with finish nails, countersunk and puttied. Interior
ceiling molding shall be 9/16"x 2-3/4" crown mold of Clear White Pine. All laps shall be
mitered. Similar moldings may be substituted, with approval of the Engineer/Architect,
due to availability of moldings called for. Attach with finish nails, countersunk and
puttied. Plywood for access panels, display cases and other exposed interior uses shall
be Douglas Fir A/C, exterior grade.

Finished Lobby Ceiling & Cap Boards: boards shall be 1" x 6" T&G, V-joint #1
Common grade White Pine, furnish molding and trim as required to finish all work of
White Pine. Drill holes for nails if necessary to prevent splitting ends of boards and trim
lumber. The Contractor shall furnish a 2’x 2’ finished sample with two coats of
polyurethane finish before any fabrication of the ceiling. No butt seams between timber
trusses use full length boards. See Division 9 for finishing.

Electric Panel Mounting Boards: Install 3/4 inch A/C exterior plywood panels, of
sizes shown, to walls using toggle bolts, or other approved means. Prime coat and
paint same as adjacent walls. Plywood shall be placed over finished drywall.

Lavatory Counter Unit Undercounter Panels: Furnish and install four equal panels of
3/4 inch thick solid phenolic. Phenolic material, pattern and finish shall match toilet
partitions. Install finished panels to knee braces using No. 12 oval head machine bolts
and finish stainless steel washers, tap steel framing member. Install 16 ga. stainless
steel continuous hinge full lengths of each panel.



Finish Drywall Ceilings & Drywall Walls: shall be 5/8 inch thick sag resistant drywall,
conforming to ASTM C36-00. Install in as long lengths as possible, following
                                                    SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                            CARPENTRY – DIVISION 6
manufacturer's directions. Fasten with drywall screws in lengths required to extend 5/8
inch into supporting member. Supply 1 1/4" x 1 1/4" heavy gauge galvanized steel
perforated corner beads, J-bead, reinforcing tape compound. Supply wood bed trims all
around the ceilings in the Utility

Room, Janitors Room and the Janitors Closet, paint the same as the ceiling. Install
wood trim and paint the same as the ceiling.

Drywall Applications - butt all joints but do not force together. Drywall screws spacing
shall be a maximum of 16 inches c.c., and not less than 3/8" from the edge of the panel.
Do not break the face paper except for screw holes; depress screw head beyond
panel's surface plane. Install corner beads on all exterior corners. Apply joint taping
compound to corner beads, screws and joints. Apply joint topping and sand. Leave all
surfaces smooth, even and ready for finish painting. All products except screws/nails
and anchors shall be made by the same manufacturer U.S. Gypsum, Gold Bond or
Flintkote or approved equal. Furnish 4" PVC base along Janitor and Utility room drywall
walls only.

Rough Hardware: Furnish and install all nails, screws, bolts and other fasteners as
may be required to complete the work. Furnish top plate anchor bolts, 1/2" diameter by
24", complete with washers and nuts to the mason for setting. Anchor bolts shall
conform to ASTM A307 for unfinished turned bolts. All exterior fasteners shall be
aluminum, cadmium plated, galvanized or stainless steel. Rafters shall be anchored to
top plates using Teco, Simpson, or approved equal, framing anchors. Furnish any
additional anchor bolts, complete with washers and nuts, of sizes noted or required, to
anchor beams, posts, lintels or equipment.

Finish Hardware Installation: Install hardware as listed in the hardware schedule and
as may be required to complete the work. Adjust moving parts to operate freely without
binding.

Wall Tile Backer Board: Finish all joints and seams pre manufactures
recommendations. See Division 3.

Doors, Frames and Windows Installation: Install accurately, plumb and level and
anchored securely following manufacturer's directions. See Division 8.

Toilet Partition and Toilet Accessories Installation: Install partitions plumb and
square to walls. Anchor brackets to masonry walls by neatly drilling through ceramic tile
and using commercial Hilti anchors, plastic anchors are not acceptable. Adjust
hardware to operate freely and adjust hinges to hold non-handicap doors partially open
when compartments are unoccupied. Install paper holders and napkin disposal
securely. Leave no sharp edges. See Specialties-Division 10.



Display Case Installation: Install securely to wall, plumb and level. Adjust to permit
door and locks to operate freely without bind. All display cases shall be keyed alike,
                                             SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                    CARPENTRY – DIVISION 6
MVW1118 #35199 Cam Lock from Fort Lock Corp. of Thompson Lock, Lansing (517)
394-1838. See Specialties-Division 10.

Metal Shelving Installation: Install level and anchor securely. Cut out neatly as may
be required for plumbing. Smooth all rough edges. See Specialties-Division 10.

Roof & Attic Floor Sheathing: shall be 5/8" thick (19/32” actual), APA, PS2 and CSA
0325 Exposure “I” durability exterior grade sheathing, or approved equal. Install with 8d
ring-shank nails 6 inches on center at all edges and 12 inches on center at
intermediated supports, of size recommended by the manufacturer. Leave 1” minimum
gap in sheathing at ridge over janitor’s and utility rooms for ventilation.




                                         *****
                                             SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                            TEMPERATURE AND MOISTURE CONTROL – DIVISION 7

Foundation Wall & Concrete Subfloor Insulation: Furnish and install Styrofoam SM
rigid insulation board, as manufactured by The Dow Chemical Co., or EPS rigid
insulation board, manufactured from BF-Grade Styrofoam Expandable polystyrene, by
Michigan Foam Products Co., Arvron Co., or approved equal, in thicknesses as shown.
Install 2-1” rigid insulation boards under concrete subfloor and all around exterior
foundation wall, full height and under entire concrete subfloor slab horizontally as shown
on the plans. Overlap all board insulation seams a minimum of 12” and tape all seams.
 Bubble foil type insulations are not an acceptable alternative.

Ceiling Insulation (Blown In & Batt): Where called for furnish and install 14 inch thick
(Min. R38) blown in cellulose insulation where shown on the plans and 12” batt in
janitor/utility room ceilings under attic floor. Lay 12" batt insulation on lobby ceiling
where attic and lobby meet. Provide for 1 inch ventilation at exterior walls between
insulation and underside of roof sheathing by using cardboard inserts, tubing or other
approved means. Install 4-mil poly vapor film to bottom side of joists before installing
insulation over gypsum board ceilings. Insulate on lobby ceiling where attic and lobby
meet. Insulate over all mechanical, electrical, lighting, access holes and air handling
ducts, following manufacturers recommended installation clearances over electrical
equipment and lighting fixtures. Install ½” plywood insulation blocking material between
all roofs rafters also install around all light fixture 16” minimum height blocking material
as shown on the plans. Care shall be taken to prevent loose insulation material from
going into the soffit area. Place 1”x 4” insulation retaining board full length, both sides
of attic areas.

The insulation manufacturer shall certify that the batt and cellulose insulation complies
with the following: ASTM C-739, ASTM C-755, ASTM C-1015, ASTM Standard C-739-
00, CPSC Standards 16 CFR Parts 1209 & 1404 non-corrosive in accordance with
ASTM Standard C-739-00.

As tested by federally required methods, the maximum anticipated density of cellulous
insulation after long-term settling of dry application is determined by ASTM C-739-00 to
be 1.6 lb/ft3

Cellulose insulation must be a minimum 85% recycled, natural cellulose fiber. Be
treated with dry and liquid fire retardants that penetrate and strengthen the fibers while
providing permanent flame resistance.

Insulation meets or exceeds all necessary fire safety requirements conducted in
accordance with ASTM standards: Critical Radiant Flux: >0.12 w/cm2, Smoldering
Combustion: <15%, Flame Spread (ASTM E-84): 15, Smoke Developed (ASTM E-84):
5, Fuel Contribution (ASTM E-84): 0

Building Codes: meet the following building code requirements for thermal insulating
materials: BOCA, CABO, ICBO, ICC, SBCCI, & the Model Energy Code.
                                            SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                           TEMPERATURE AND MOISTURE CONTROL – DIVISION 7

Masonry Flashing & Weep holes: Furnish and install 3 ounce copper coated
Sisalkraft paper flashing above and as near to grade as possible at the bottom of the
walls, above all openings, and beneath sills. Weep holes shall be located in the head
joints immediately above all flashing. Clear, open weep holes should be spaced no
more than 24inches o.c. Weep holes formed with wick materials or with tubes shall be
spaced at a maximum of 16" o.c. Were the brick veneer continues below the flashing
at the base of the wall, the space between the veneer and the backing shall be grouted
to the height of the flashing. Flashing shall be securely fastened to the backing system
and extend through the face of the brick veneer. The flashing shall be turned up at least
8 inches or as shown on the plans. Flashing shall be carefully installed to prevent
punctures or tears. Where several pieces of flashing are required to flash a section of
the veneer, the ends of the flashing shall be lapped a minimum of 6 inches and the
joints properly sealed. Where the flashing is not continuous turn it up into the head joint
at least 2 inches to from a dam. Take care to keep weep holes, flashing, and cavity
open and free of mortar or other debris.

Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Furnish and install Elk Corporations asphalt wood shake
style shingle as indicated on the plans and as specified, including ridge cap, ridge
ventilation, drip edges, flashing, all fasteners and accessories necessary for a complete
installation. Supply a 340 lbs per square minimum weight, 50 year warranty duration,
110 MPH wind warranty and fungicide protected shingle. All shingles, ridge caps and
ridge ventilation stripes shall be the product of one manufacture.

Furnish complete roofing system including but not limited to ventilation, leak barrier
waterproof underlayment, quality shingles, eave, valley, ridge protection, metal flashing
ventilation and ridge cap shingles. As manufactured by GAF Corp., Elk Corp.,
CertainTeed or approved equal.

This work will also include a limited warranty coverage includes all major components
and provides materials and installation labor if there is either a manufacturing defect of
misapplication of your roof system. This limited warranty includes a technical inspection
from manufactures technical inspector. Roofing system must be installed by
manufactures master elite certified roofing contractor.

Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the roofing
system products specified in this section, with minimum of 50 years experience.

Installer Qualifications: Certified and trained by shingle manufacturer for steep slope
installation, certified to install enhanced warranty projects with minimum of 10 years
experience. The shingle manufacturer shall certify that the roofing system complies with
the following: ASTM B 209, ASTM D 3018, ASTM D 3161, UL 790 and UL 997.

The Contractor will submit product data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to
be used, showing compliance with requirements. Two complete sets of color cards
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Manufacturer's
installation instructions, showing required preparation and installation procedures.
                                            SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                           TEMPERATURE AND MOISTURE CONTROL – DIVISION 7


The contractor will coordinate a pre-installation meeting: For this project a pre-
installation meeting is required.

     Meeting Timing: This meeting is to take place at the start of the roofing installation.
     No more than 2 weeks into the roofing project.

     Meeting Attendance: Meeting to be called for by manufacturer certified contractor.
     Meeting’s mandatory attendees: Manufacturer certified contractor or equal,
     manufacturer’s steep slope technical representative (not a sales agent). Non-
     mandatory attendees: Owners representative, A/E representative.

     Meeting Topics: Certified Contractor and Manufacturer’s technical representative
     to review all pertinent requirements for the specified warranty. Set schedule for
     final inspections.

     Final Inspection: Upon completion of project, and full payment to contractor and
     manufacturer for enhanced warranty, a final inspection is to be conducted by a
     manufacturer’s roofing inspector. Enhanced warranty items are to be reviewed, as
     well as manufacturer’s inspection checklist.

Delivery, Storage, and handling: Store all roofing products in manufacturer's
unopened labeled packaging until ready for installation.

Store products in a covered, ventilated area, at temperature not more than 110 degrees
F (43 degrees C); do not store near steam pipes, radiators, in sunlight.

Delivery, Storage, and handling cont.: Store bundles on flat surface to maximum
height recommended by manufacturer; store rolls on end.

Warranty: Provide manufactures best warranty.

When submitting request for substitution, provide complete product data specified
above under Submittals, for each substitute product.

Materials: Shingles: 50 year minimum limited warranty, granular surfaced glass fiber
mat reinforced asphalt shingles complying with ASTM D 3018 and ASTM D 3161; UL
790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label. Style: GAF Timberline Ultra, Elk
Corp. with matching hip and ridge or approved equal. Color as selected by
Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

Roof Protection Membrane: Self-adhesive rubberized asphalt sheet, with strippable
release film. Total Thickness: 58 mils (1.5 mm), Product: GAF Weather Watch; bonded
to skid-resistant fine granules. Product: GAF StormGuard, Elk Corp. bonded to skid-
resistant polyethylene. Install one layer of ice shield on the entire roof and a second
layer up all valleys and at all eaves 24” inside wall as shown on the plans.
                                             SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                            TEMPERATURE AND MOISTURE CONTROL – DIVISION 7


Materials cont.: Nails: All roof fasteners shall be as recommended by manufacturer
standard round wire shingle type, zinc-coated steel or aluminum; 10 to 12 gauge,
barbed or deformed shank, with heads 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) to 7/16 inch (11 mm) in
diameter; length sufficient to penetrate at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood or just
through plywood or oriented strand board.

Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I or II. Ridge Vent: GAF COBRA Ridge Vent.
Soffit Vents: GAF Cobra Fascia Vent or appropriate alternative intake ventilation.
Passive Ventilation: GAF MasterFlow on roof passive ventilation. Metal Flashing: 0.032
inch (0.8 mm) aluminum sheet, complying with ASTM B 209. Use metal flashings at: a.
Eave edges, and rake edges.

All roof penetrations shall be flashed according to manufactures recommendations with
aluminum matching roof shingle color. The contractor shall submit shop drawing and
follow the manufactures recommendations for flashing all roof penetrations.

Execution and Examination: Do not begin installation until roof deck has been
properly prepared.

Verify that deck is dry, sound, clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, and
projections.

Preparation: Clean deck surfaces thoroughly prior to installation of eave protection
membrane.

Install ridge vent along entire length of ridges: Cut continuous vent slot through
sheathing, stopping 6 inches from each end of ridge. Install ridge vent material full
length of ridge, including uncut areas. Butt ends of lengths of ridge vent material and
join using plastic cement. Install eave vents in sufficient quantity to equal or exceed the
ridge vent area, calculated as specified by manufacturer.

Installation of shingles: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
requirements of local building code. Avoid breakage of shingles by avoiding dropping
bundles on edge, by separating shingles carefully (not by "breaking" over ridge or
bundles), and by taking extra precautions in temperatures below 40 degrees F.

Handle carefully in hot weather to avoid damaging shingle edges. Secure with 6 nails
per shingle as per manufacturer’s instructions.

Make hips and ridges using shingles required by manufacturer.

At ridges, install ridge shingles over ridge vent material; use nails of specified length; do
not drive nails home, leaving 3/4 inch slot open between ridge and roof shingles.
                                             SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                            TEMPERATURE AND MOISTURE CONTROL – DIVISION 7


Preparation cont.: Make valleys using "closed cut valley" technique:
1. Run the first, and only the first, course of shingles from the higher roof slope across
   the valley at least 12 inches.

2. Run all courses of shingles from the lower roof slope across the valley at least 12
   inches and nail not closer than 6 inches (150 mm) to center of valley.

3. Run shingles from the upper roof slope into valley and trim 2 inches from center of
   valley.

Protection: At the end of all work days protect exposed roof with tarpaulins. Protect
installed products until completion of project.

Aluminum Soffit, Fascia & Trim: Furnish and install .032 ga. aluminum fascias and
trim. The fascia shall have center stiffener rib or be seamed two pieces to prevent oil
canning. Soffits shall be full ventilation panels; fascia and trim shall be preformed
ribbed in as long of length as possible. Furnish all fasteners and accessories necessary
for a complete installation. Soffit panels shall be 12" wide with a "vee" groove every 6"
center to center and furnished in as long a length as possible. Finish shall be Kynar
500 fluoropolymer coating factory applied with a finished color selected by shop
drawing. All aluminum shall be the product of one manufactures the same material,
gauge, finish and color. All fasteners shall be as recommended by manufacturer, match
color of aluminum panels and be designed to resist wind uplift.

Caulking: Materials shall be a one-part, uniform mixture free from lumps and course
particles, non-staining sealant, equal to Grace-Horn "Horncatex", Sonneborn
"Sonlastic", Dow Corning "780", G.E. Silicone Construction Sealant, or approved equal.
 Back-up material shall be compatible with sealant to insure against any significant color
change.

Caulk around all door frames, interior and exterior, window frames, toilet fixtures, pipes,
etc., and at junctures of dissimilar materials, as may be required, or as directed. Color
shall match or harmonize with background.

Joints greater than 3/8 inch in depth shall be partially filled with glass mat, untreated
jute, expanded polyethylene, polyvinylchloride, or a compatible rubber gasket before
applicant of sealant. Prime coat surfaces shall be caulked as may be required.

Caulking, where exposed, shall be neatly finished with a slightly concave surface, free
from wrinkles and drips. Clean adjacent surfaces immediately following caulking and
leave work in clean condition.


                                          *****
                                                   SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                            DOORS, WINDOWS & GLASS – DIVISION 8

Furnish all necessary materials, labor and equipment for the complete installation of
doors, frames and windows, with related hardware, as shown and as specified herein.

All exposed surfaces of doors, windows and framing members shall be free of scratches
or other serious blemishes. Aluminum moldings shall be given an Architectural Class 1
Anodic coating with integral color conforming to the Aluminum Association Standard AA-
M12 C22 A42. Color shall be Permanodic #40 Dark Bronze.

Set all units level, square and plumb, anchor securely in place, seal joints between
building and frames with harmonizing caulking, and make final adjustments for free and
normal operation of all items. Maximum door clearance after erection shall not be more
than 1/8" at head and jamb; 3/4" at bottom.

Protect all work after installation and, at completion, leave in clean condition.

Entrance Doors: Doors shall be Tubelite Medium Stile (6 1/2" top rail x 4" stiles x 10"
bottom rail), as manufactured by Tubelite Inc. Framing shall be of 6063-T5 aluminum
alloy with connections made by screw-and-spline, shear block joinery or approved
equal. Basic door sections shall be 1-3/4" in depth with 4" stile widths. Core of doors
shall be foamed in place polyurethane foam at 3 lbs. per cubic foot density. Meeting
stiles and bottom rails shall be weather stripped. Comparable items of Special-Late and
Kawneer may be acceptable.

Storefront Window Framing: Furnish and install fl-400t Therma Plank(2" x 4 1/2")
thermal framing. Framing shall have flush glazing to receive one inch double-pane
insulating glass. Core of window framing shall be foamed in place polyurethane foam at
3 lbs. per cubic foot density. Glazing gaskets shall be EPDM elastomeric extrusions.
Install P1275 weather strip on exterior doors. Comparable items of Special-Late and
Kawneer may be acceptable.

Aluminum Flush Doors and Frames: Doors shall be Tubelite FL400-S series Flush
Panel Doors. Face sheets shall be smooth pattern architectural, or approved equal.
Impact reinforcement for the face sheets shall be 1/8 inch thick tempered hardboard.
Core of flush doors shall be foamed in place polyurethane foam at 3 lbs. per cubic foot
density. All screws and miscellaneous fasteners shall be aluminum, stainless steel or
zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A-164. Door sections shall be 1 3/4 inches
deep with integral reglets to receive and conceal cut edges of face sheets on both sides
of doors. Top and bottom rails shall be joined to tubular door stiles by 3/8 inch diameter
steel tie rods. Face shear shall lap and interlock stiles and rails. Doors shall be
reinforced internally to receive surface applied and mortise hardware. Aluminum Flush
Door Frames shall be fabricated using screw-spline or shear block joinery at all frame
connections. Supply heavy duty door stops with minimum 3\16” thick wall and parallel
mount all arm closers. Comparable items of Special-Late and Kawneer may be
acceptable.
                                                   SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                            DOORS, WINDOWS & GLASS – DIVISION 8

Automatic Entrance Doors #1 & #2: Furnish and install series 4000 surface mounted,
Heavy Duty, Low-Energy, Electric swing door operator mechanism as manufactured by
Horton Automatics. Surface applied operator with connecting arms. The operator
header shall be mounted to the surface of the door frame or wall. Connecting hardware
shall be a double arm arrangement that can either push the door or pull the door open.

The Electric Operating Mechanism shall be Series 4000. The operator shall be shock
mounted and concealed in an extruded aluminum case 6" x 6" side access header
cover. The operator shall be readily convertible to any hand required. Opening force
shall be accomplished by a 1/8 HP D.C. permanent magnet motor working through
reduction gears to the output shaft. Gear train bearings shall be sealed ball bearing
types. Closing force shall be supplied by a field replaceable Quadracoil spring (four
independent coil springs separated by Teflon discs and enclosed in an external spring
box). Close speed control shall be accomplished by dynamic braking of the motor and
shall be fully adjustable. Operator to act as a manual closer when power is off or when
the master control unit is removed. An On/Off toggle switch shall be supplied,
mount on top of unit do not mount exposed to public. Run all electrical conduits
and wiring in window framing, no exposed wiring or conduit.

The master control unit shall incorporate an adjustable time delay of 2 to 30 seconds
(ANSI A156.19 requirement is 5 second minimum time delay). It shall provide infinite
adjustment to opening and back check speeds including adjusting the opening force
without affecting the opening speed. The master control unit shall provide for immediate
reversal of door motion without undue strain on the drive train by supplying stepped
voltage to the motor. The door shall reverse when closing if an object stops the door. A
locked door motor protection circuit will be supplied that will shut off current to the motor
if it is applied when the door is inadvertently locked or otherwise prevented from
opening.

Automatic Operation: Pushbutton switch actuates door open; door closes after time
delay expires. Operator to include the following variable adjustments so as to comply
with ANSI Standard A156.19: Opening speed - 4 to 6 seconds; Closing speed - 4 to 6
seconds.
Opening and closing force, measured 1" out from the lock stile of the door, not to
exceed 15 pounds of force to stop the door when operating in either direction.

Activating Device: shall be marked Press to Open and located on each side of the
opening as per ANSI Safety Standard A117.

Furnish and install C521-2 push button switches jamb mount with black face plates and
red button 2 3/4" x 4 1/2". Electrical: 120 VAC, 60 cycles, 1 phase, 15 amps. Non-North
American voltages can be 240 VAC (operator must have 240 volt power supply). Two
low-voltage wires shall be furnished to connect push button/plate switch to the operator.
 Electrical: General or electrical contractor to install all wiring to operator on a separate
circuit breaker routed into header. Operator Construction shall be Electromechanical.

Site Verification of Conditions: Installer must verify that base conditions previously
installed under other sections are acceptable for product installation according to with
                                                       SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                            DOORS, WINDOWS & GLASS – DIVISION 8
Automatic Entrance Doors #1 & #2 cont.: manufacturer's instructions. Notify the
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of
work. Don’t start work until all negative conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable
to the installer and manufacturer.

Adjustment: Installer to adjust operator and controls for optimum condition and safety.

Advice Contractor of precautions required through the remainder of the construction
period, to ensure that doors will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal
weathering) at the time of acceptance.

Floor anchors shall be welded inside each jamb with holes provided for floor anchorage.
Minimum thickness of floor anchors shall be 14 gauge, galvanized. Frames for
installation in masonry walls shall be provided with adjustable jamb anchors of the wire
type. Three anchors per jamb minimum.

Doors and frames shall be reinforced, drilled, and topped to receive 4 1/2" hinges,
cylindrical locksets, strike plates, push plates, pull handles, and closers specified in the
Door Schedule. Provide welded steel reinforcing plates with the following minimum
thickness: Butt Hinges - 7 gauge, Strike plates and lockset - 12 gauge, Surface applied
hardware - 14 gauge

Glass: Glass shall be new, best quality, delivered and installed with labels thereon
which shall remain intact until final cleaning, glass shall conform to the CPSC Safety
Standard (16 CFR 1201) and ANSI Z97.1.

Glazing at lobby entrance doors shall be 1" thick insulating tempered safety glass, tinted
light bronze color. Glazing shall be two 1/4" thick tempered safety glass lites separated
by a 1/2" air space. The outboard glazing shall be tinted light bronze with clear float
glass at the inboard glazing and a low-E coating on surface #3 of the glazing assembly.

Toilet room window glazing shall consist of two pieces of 1/4" obscure patterned
tempered safety glass lites separated by a 1/2" air space.

Glass for vision lites in interior doors shall be a single piece of 1/4" obscure tempered
safety glass. Glass shall be manufactured by PPG, LOF, C-E, Guardian, AFG, or
approved equal.

Good glazing practices as recommended by FGMA, AAMA and SIGMA shall be
followed using glazing compounds recommended by the glass and window
manufacturers.
                                                    SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                           DOORS, WINDOWS & GLASS – DIVISION 8
Hardware: Furnish all materials, labor and miscellaneous items necessary to install all
finish hardware as indicated or required to complete the work. Hardware shall be
template fitted, installed by competent mechanic, adjusted to operate freely and
correctly at time of completion.

The Contractor shall furnish Sargent 1 1/8” Mortise lock cylinders with LA key blank with
Adamsrite cam. The Michigan Department of Transportations Maintenance Division will
take all cylinders to a locksmith for keying.

All doors shall have three hinges per leaf. Hardware for the aluminum entrance doors,
and where specified elsewhere, shall be Tubelite and/or meeting Tubelite quality
standards. All hardware finish shall be Permanodic #40 Dark Bronze, US10, or
matching color. All closers shall be LCN 4040 Super Smoothie. The Contractor shall
request local manufacturer's representative of LCN to inspect for correct installation.

Door and window specifications are based on Tubelite comparable items form
Special-Late and Kawneer are acceptable.

                               Entrance Doors #1, & #2

Tubelite Pr.3/o x 7/o - 2" pair.
Tubelite P-025 BB Butt Hinges anodized dark bronze finish.
Tubelite P-1420 (Adams-Rite MS-1850A-505) locksets, P-1408 face plate, anodized
dark bronze finish.
Tubelite P-059 top and bottom flush bolts, anodized dark bronze finish.
Tubelite P-1589 Wire Pull, anodized dark bronze finish.
Tubelite P-1588 Push Bar, anodized dark bronze finish.
Tubelite P-0019 1/2" x 4" aluminum threshold, mill finish.
LCN 4040H-Cush parallel arm overhead surface closer, 100o door opening, 4110-cush
18 drop plate, LCN #33 Finish.
Tubelite P-1275 Bottom sweeps, dark bronze finish.
Automatic surface mounted, swing door operator mechanism as manufactured by
Horton Automatics, see specification.


                             Family Toilet Room Door #3

Tubelite 3/o x 7/o - 1 3/4" Flush Door (NO VISION LITE) Insulation Filled.
Tubelite P-025 BB Butt Hinges anodized dark bronze finish.
Yale Mortise Privacy Lock SL8700, keyed from lobby side.
LCN 4040H-Cush parallel arm overhead surface closer, 100o door opening, 4110-cush
18 drop plate, LCN #33 finish.
Burns #585 drop arm holder, anodized dark bronze finish.
Tubelite P-1275 Bottom sweeps, dark bronze finish.
Burns 34"x 10"x.0625" aluminum kick plate push side only, anodized dark bronze finish.
                                                SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                       DOORS, WINDOWS & GLASS – DIVISION 8
                         Toilet Room Doors #4, #5, #6 & #7

Tubelite 3/o x 7/o - 1 3/4" Flush door w/vision lite Insulation Filled.
Tubelite P-025 BB Butt Hinge anodized dark bronze finish.
Sergeant Cylinders LN (Adams-Rite MS-1850A-505) locksets,
P-1409 face plate dark bronze finish.
Tubelite P-1589 Wire Pull, 4"x 12"Push Plate anodized dark bronze finishes
LCN 4040H-Cush parallel arm overhead surface closer,100o door opening, 4110-cush
18 drop plate, LCN #33 finish.
Tubelite P-1275 Bottom sweeps, dark bronze finish.
Burns 34"x 10"x.0625" aluminum kick plate push side only, anodized dark bronze finish.
Burns #531 wall mounted stop with hook, mount on masonry wing walls.



                                   Utility Doors #8

Tubelite 3/6 x 7/o - 1 3/4" Flush Door Insulation Filled.
Tubelite P-025 BB Butt Hinges, anodized dark bronze finish.
Sergeant Cylinders LN (Adams-Rite MS-1850A-505) locksets,
P-1409 face plate dark bronze finish.
Tubelite P-1589 Wire Pull,
4"x 12"Push Plate anodized dark bronze finishes.
LCN 4040H-Cush parallel arm overhead surface closer, 100o door opening, 4110-cush
18 drop plate, LCN #33 Finish.
Tubelite P-1275 Bottom sweeps, dark bronze finish
Burns 34" x 10" x .0625" aluminum kick plate, push side only, anodized dark bronze
finish.
Burns #585 drop arm holder, anodized dark bronze finish.


                                      Doors #9

Tubelite 3/o x 7/o - 1 3/4" Flush Door Insulation Filled.
Tubelite P-025 BB Butt Hinges, anodized dark bronze finish.
Sergeant Cylinders LN. (Adams-Rite MS-1850A-505) locksets,
P-1409 face plate, dark bronze finish.
Tubelite P-1589 Wire Pull,
4"x 12"Push Plate anodized dark bronze finishes.
LCN 4040H-Cush parallel arm overhead surface closer, 100o door opening, 4110-cush
18 drop plate, LCN #33 Finish.
Tubelite P-1275 Bottom sweeps, dark bronze finish
Burns 34"x 10"x.0625" aluminum kickplate, push side only, anodized dark bronze finish.
Burns #585 drop arm holder, anodized dark bronze finish.
                                                SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                        DOORS, WINDOWS & GLASS – DIVISION 8
                                  Closet Door #10

Tubelite 3/o x 7/o - 1 3/4" Flush Door Insulation Filled.
Tubelite P-025 BB Butt Hinges, anodized dark bronze finish.
Sergeant Cylinders LN.
 (Adams-Rite MS-1850A-505) locksets, P-1409 face plate, dark bronze finish.
Tubelite P-1589 Wire Pull, 4"x 12"Push Plate anodized dark bronze finishes.
LCN 4040H-Cush parallel arm overhead surface closer, 100o door opening, 4110-cush
18 drop plate, LCN #33 Finish.
Tubelite P-1275 Bottom sweeps, dark bronze finish.
Burns 34"x 10"x.0625" aluminum kickplate, push side only, anodized dark bronze finish.
Burns #585 drop arm holder, anodized dark bronze finish.
Letter Slot (dark bronze finish) centered 42" max above finished floor.



                                  Janitor Door #11

Tubelite 3/6 x 7/o - 1 3/4" Flush Door Insulation Filled.
Tubelite P-025 BB Butt Hinges, anodized dark bronze finish.
Sergeant Cylinders LN. (Adams-Rite MS-1850A-505) locksets, P-1409 face plate, dark
bronze finish.
Tubelite P-0019 1/2" x 4" aluminum threshold, mill finish.
4"x 12"Push Plate anodized dark bronze finishes.
LCN 4040H-Cush parallel arm overhead surface closer, 100o door opening, 4110-cush
18 drop plate, LCN #33 Finish.
Tubelite P-1275 Bottom sweeps, dark bronze finish.
Burns 40"x 10"x.0625" aluminum kickplate, push side only, anodized dark bronze finish.
Burns #585 drop arm holder, anodized dark bronze finish.




                                       *****
                                                      SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                              FINISHES – DIVISION 9

Tile Work: Furnish and install wall tile as shown. Installation shall be as recommended
in the Handbook for Wall Tile Installation, latest edition, as published by the Tile Council
of America, Inc. Furnish Master Grade Certificate signed by both the Manufacturer and
the tile sub-contractor. Deliver all products to the job site in unopened containers with
grade seals unbroken and labels intact. Maintain temperature at 50oF minimum during
work and for 7 additional days. The tile color selection will be made by Design Division
during the shop drawing process.

Ceramic Rest Room Wall Tile: shall be 4"x 4" x 5/16" ceramic tile, as manufactured by
Crossville Company and the accent tile shall be 4"x 4" x 5/16" designer accents ceramic
tile. Install tile following Installation Method W244-03 as detailed in the Handbook.
Similar items of Franciscan or American Olean are acceptable. Provide 4" x 4" cove
base all around rest rooms where shown on the plans

Walls shall be tiled from floor to ceiling including window sills, jambs, heads and cove
base. Walls shall have a five row, three color accent stripe that runs around interior rest
rooms and at the location shown on the plans and in the final shop drawings. Accent tile
color and pattern shall be determined by the shop drawings. All tile "in" corners square,
"out" corners bull nose. Variations in masonry and panel walls shall be leveled as
required to provide a flat plane for wall tile not to exceed 1/8 inch in 8 feet.

Setting bed for all concrete block walls shall be 1Flex Crack Isolation Mortar Crack
Isolation System & Bonding Mortar, Cement-modified polymer mortar, as manufactured
by TEC Specialty Products, Inc. Flexible mortar shall provide up 1/4 inch (6mm) crack
isolation when tested in shear deflection in accordance with ANSI 118.12 up to 1000
P.S.I. compressive point loads on tiles.

Setting bed for stress skin panel wall shall be a standard, TEC Specialty Products, Inc.
or Latex-Portland Cement mortar, both setting beds shall be the product of one
manufacture.

Finish surface of wall tile shall be checked with a three foot straightedge and any
variation corrected. Provide waterproof tile adhesive as recommended and guaranteed
by tile manufacturer specifically for purpose used. Grout with Portland cement type
colored grout, wet or dry-cure formulation as appropriate, to harmonize with wall tile
selected, as manufactured by TEC, or approved equal.

Furnish and install tile expansion joints as shown on the plans, joint to be filled with
manufactures recommended silicone sealant in all vertical corners full height of wall.
Sealant color shall match grout. Install tile joints following details in the Handbook.
Furnish and install aluminum tile edging around rest room mirrors.
                                                       SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                               FINISHES – DIVISION 9

12" x 12" Floor & Lobby Wall Tile: Furnish and install 12" x 12" Porcelain tile of
standard grade quality (Lobby wall tile will have a Polished finish), with 6" x 8" cove
base all around where shown on the plans, inner and outer corner and bull nose trim as
needed for a complete installation. The tile shall conform to requirements of ANSI A
137.1.

Install tile following Tile Council of America Handbook latest edition. Matching tile cove
base, bull nose edges and trim pieces if required shall be supplied by the same
manufacture that supplies the standard porcelain tile. The tile shall meet the following
ASTM Standards: Warpage ASTM-C485 .15%, Water Absorption ASTM-C373 .40%,
Bond Strength ASTM-C482 66 psi, Breaking Strength ASTM-C648 365 psi, Abrasive
Hardness ASTM-C501 234, Chemical Resistance Acid & Base ASTM-C-650, Stain
Resistance ASTM-CTI-T-72, Coefficient of Friction Dry & Wet ASTM-C1028 above .6,
PEI Abrasion ASTM -C1027 +50,000 cycles, Facial Dimension ASTM C499 (Range
.20% Max.).

The minimum width for the perimeter joints is ¼”. If the joint will be exposed, then it
should be treated with a suitable flexible sealant. All expansion joint material shall be
from one manufacturer.

Cleaning Tile Surfaces: Prior to final acceptance or payment for tile installation, the
following manufacturer’s directions for cleanup shall be followed in order to receive
approval:

1. Rough cleanup may begin as soon as grout is worked into joints, however, waiting 15
to 30 minutes allows the grout to settle, which contributes to a better finished result.

2. Each cleaner shall have one COLD water bucket for a nylon scrub pad and another
COLD water bucket for the flannel or towel.

3. Use nylon scrub pad soaking wet in a vigorous circular motion for initial cleanup.
USE PLENTY OF COLD WATER BUT DO NOT LEAVE EXCESS WATER OR FROTH
ON THE SURFACE, OR ALLOW TO FLOW INTO UNGROUTED JOINTS.

4. For vertical joints, apply water evenly to tile with a bottle sprayer or mister, then use
scrub pad. This will prevent water soaked pad from dripping onto floor.

5. Use moderately wet flannel or towel to drag surface to remove excess dirty water.
Rinse the towel frequently in a clean pail of water.

6. Change the cleaning water frequently-dirty water makes for extra work.

7. DO NOT OVERWORK JOINTS!! Tiles do not have to be perfectly clean. Light haze
can be removed the next day.
                                                     SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                             FINISHES – DIVISION 9

Cleaning Tile Surfaces cont.:
8. Approximately 1 to 2 hours after grouting, grout will begin to stiffen and become like
putty. Check finish for smoothness. If rough or uneven, dress the joints with a solution
of soapy water (use liquid detergent like Dawn or Joy) and a rounded edge sponge.
Press lightly.

9. Wash the installation 12 to 24 hours after grouting using detergent solution (Spic-n-
Span, Trisodium Phosphate) to remove haze or residue. DO NOT ALLOW GROUT
FILM TO REMAIN ON SURFACE FOR MORE THAN 24 HOURS!!

10. If stubborn haze film remains, the Contractor shall be required to use denatured
alcohol or methyl alcohol to remove it. DO NOT USE ACIDS OR LATICRETE TC
50/500.

Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating Systems: Furnish necessary material, labor, and
equipment required to prepare designated areas and install a Decorative Mosaic Floor
Coating System.

Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Obtain wall and Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System
materials from a single manufacturer with a minimum of five years verifiable experience
providing materials of the type specified in this section.

Contractor’s Qualifications: Installation must be performed by a manufacturer certified
contractor with skilled mechanics having not less than three (3) years satisfactory
experience in the installation of the type system as specified in this section, and must be
certified in writing by the manufacturer of the Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System.

Floor System Thickness Verification: At MDOT’s discretion and under our supervision, the
contractor shall take two 1” random cores per 1,000 sq. ft. through the system into the
substrate to verify proper system thickness. Cored areas less than specified thickness
shall be removed and replaced or increased in thickness by the installing contractor, in a
manner that does not affect the performance or integrity of the system. Cored areas which
comply with the recommended system thickness shall be built-up to match the surrounding
surface elevation prior to applying the seal coat(s). Cores taken and patched will be
noticeable: therefore, cores should be taken from areas where aesthetics are less critical.
Cost associate with repair of cored areas that comply with specification thickness are the
responsibility of the owner.

Warranty: The contractor and the manufacturer shall furnish a standard guarantee of the
Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System for a period of one year after installation. The
labor and material guarantee shall include loss of bond and wear-through to the concrete
substrate from normal use.
                                                      SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                              FINISHES – DIVISION 9

Not included in the warranty are damage due to structural design deficiencies, including but
not limited to slab cracking from lateral, vertical or rotational movement, and gouging or
other damage due to fork lifts, other equipment, delaminating caused by vapor
transmission, Acts of God, or other elements beyond the scope of protection of this system
nor causes not related to the system materials.

In case of a warranty claim, MDOT will notify the contractor in writing within 30 days of the
first appearance of problems covered under this warranty. The owner will provide free and
unencumbered access to the area during normal working hours for warranty rework.
Property protection is also the owner’s responsibility. Remedy is limited to direct repair of
the Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System.

Submittal: Submit manufacturer’s specifications on cured system and individual
components of the Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System, including physical properties
and performance properties and tests described in Part 2.01 B and submit Material Safety
Data Sheets. Each individual component of the system will be evaluated on the basis of
these standards. For any tests not listed in the manufacturer’s standard nationally
published data, the manufacturer must supply the missing data accompanied by the
independent testing laboratory’s test results which prove compliance in accordance with the
referenced standard(s). Furnish two sets of this information. Manufacturer’s standard color
chart shall also be submitted and must afford the owner color selection from at least 25
standard colors and computerized custom color matching shall be available upon request.
Furnish two sets of this information.

The contractor shall submit a 6” x 6” cured system sample which the contractor has made
for verification purposes and finish texture approval.

The contractor shall furnish a list of projects using either specified material or equivalent
that they have installed during the last two years. Information shall include, project name,
square footage, owner contact name with owner’s address and phone number. Also, the
contractor shall furnish resumes detailing the experience of key project personnel, including
supervisors and mechanics.

It is the intention of this Section to provide the products as named. Substitutions will be
considered only when received by MDOT at least five days prior to the date set for receipt
of bids. Upon receipt of any such submission, the MDOT will determine whether or not the
proposed product is an equal. In the event the MDOT determines that a proposed system
is an approved equal, he will issue an addendum and notify all bidders at least 48 hours
prior to receipt of bids. No substitutions will be considered after contract bid date.

The contractor shall submit a copy of the manufacturer’s packing slip, tagged for this
specific job, along with calculations, signed by an officer of the primary material supplier
demonstrating that the quantity of material furnished for the project will achieve the
specified coverage and mil thickness.
                                                 SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                           FINISHES – DIVISION 9
 Material Delivery, Handling, and Storage: Primary system materials shall be delivered
in the manufacturer’s undamaged, unopened containers. Each container shall be clearly
marked with the following:

           •   Product name(s) and./or number(s)
           •   Manufacturer’s name
           •   Component designation (A, B, etc.)
           •   Product Mix Ratio
           •   Health and Safety information
           •   CHEMTREC Emergency Response information

Material Delivery, Handling, and Storage cont.: Provide equipment and personnel to
handle the materials by methods which prevent damage.

The contractor shall promptly inspect direct jobsite material deliveries to assure that
quantities are correct, comply with requirements, and are not damaged.

The contractor shall be responsible for materials furnished by him, and he shall replace, at
his own expense, such materials that are found to be defective in manufacturer or that have
become damaged in transit, handling, or storage.

Store all materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, with seals and labels
intact and legible. Maintain temperatures within the required range. Do not use materials
which exceed the manufacturer’s maximum recommended shelf life.

Job Conditions: The contractor shall visit the jobsite prior to the installation of the wall
and Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System to evaluate substrate condition, including
substrate moisture transmission, quantity, and severity of cracking, and the extent of
repairs needed. Substrate imperfections should be repaired only after mechanical
preparations of the substrate. Surface preparation reveals most imperfections requiring
repair. Concrete substrates shall be tested with a calcium chloride test, in multiple
locations that are representative of the total surface to be treated, to verify that the moisture
vapor transmission of the substrate does not exceed the Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating
System manufacturer’s recommendations. A wood moisture meter shall not be used for
this procedure. PH of the substrate shall be tested and must be in the 8-9 range. Cost
associated with repair, leveling, and remediation of the substrate is the responsibility of the
provider of the substrate.

The contractor should exercise care during surface preparation and system installation to
protect surrounding substrates and surfaces, as well as in-place equipment. The contractor
shall prepare the substrate to remove laitance and open the surface. Provide a minimum
10 mill profile. This shall be achieved by shot blasting. Surface profile achieved shall be
similar to medium grit sandpaper and free from bond-inhibiting contaminants. Costs
incurred that are associated with damage from negligence or inadequate protection shall be
the sole responsibility of the contractor.
                                                         SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                                 FINISHES – DIVISION 9

Job Conditions cont.: Each drain in the installation area must be raised or lowered to the
actual finished elevation of the Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System.

System must be protected by the installing contractor until it is inspected and turned over to
the owner.

The minimum slab temperature must be conditioned to 60 degrees F before commencing
installation, during installation, and for at least 72 hours after installation is complete. The
substrate temperature must be at least 5 degrees F above the dew point during installation.
Infrared readings shall be taken for slab temperature. Sling psychromitor or digital
psychromitor shall be used for dew point and wet bulb measurement.

Maintain lighting at a minimum uniform level of 50 or more foot candles in areas where the
Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System is being installed. Permanent lighting is in place
and working and will be available during the installation.

Install specialized floor mural of the State of Michigan and great lakes in the center of the
lobby area. The mural’s colors shall be selected by MDOT. Stencil will be provided by
MDOT.

Products/Materials
System Overview, The Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System as formulated consists of
General Polymers 3462 as primer, 3462 AquArmor Coating as base coat, and to be
determined Decorative Vinyl Chip Aggregate with two (2) coats of GP4844 Polyaspartic
clear urethane as top coats.

*Traction media will be required in both clear top coats. Note: media must not interfere with
aesthetics of Mosaic System.

Typical Physical Properties:
      Color                                 Custom Color Blends Available
      Abrasion Resistance                        100 mgs lost
      ASTM D 4060, CS-17 Wheel,
      1,000 cycles
      Flexural Strength                     10,000 psi
      ASTM C 580
      Adhesion                        350 psi
      ACI 503R                        100% concrete failure
      Flammability                    Self-extinguishing
                                      over concrete
       Impact Resistance              Direct, inch
       MIL-D-3134J                    pound greater than 160, passes
                                      Reverse, inch pound
                                      Greater than 80, passes
       Resistance Elevated Temperatures      No slip or flow at required
       MIL-D-3134J                    temperature of 158 F
                                                        SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                                FINISHES – DIVISION 9

Surface Preparation: Follow manufacturer’s instructions regarding preparation of
concrete substrates. Shot blast field of floor and diamond grind edges to a minimum 10 mil
profile.

Installation:    This specification covers application for horizontal floor surfaces
Note: Utility rooms (2) floors and vending closet are included in this contract.
Apply each component of the Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System in compliance with
manufacturer’s written installation instructions and strictly adhere to mixing and installation
methods, recoat windows, cure times, and environmental restrictions. The Decorative
Mosaic Floor Coating System is to be installed directly over non-moving control joints and
crack which have been treated with EPO-FLEX epoxy, and the Decorative Mosaic Floor
Coating System will terminate at the edge of isolation and expansion joints as designated
by the Architect, Engineer, or Design Professional. A high quality urethane shall be
installed between the finished floor surface and all vertical wall surfaces.
Cracks and Control Joints

After preparation, evaluation of quantity and severity of cracks in concrete will determine
the needed repairs. Original bid assumes treatment of 530 linear feet of expansion and
control joints. For information pertaining to the treatment of cracks in concrete substrates,
consult Manufacturer’s publication, Concrete 102. For information pertaining to the
treatment of control joints in concrete substrates, consult Manufacturer’s publication,
Concrete 103.

Isolation/Expansion and Other Joints Subject to Movement

All expansion joints must be honored through the flooring system. Expansion joints shall be
a minimum ¼” and a maximum ½” in width. For more information pertaining to the above,
consult Manufacturer’s publication, Concrete 105.

System Primer: 3462 AquArmor
Base Coat: 3462 AquArmor Coating-Color formula will be provided
Chip Broadcast: Decorative Vinyl Chip Aggregate – Color chips to be determined
Select Seal Coat: 4844 Poly Aspartic Clear – Two (2) coats, each coat shall include an anti-
slip component. Sample shall be provided to MDOT for approval.

Joints at Floor and Walls: All joints at the intersection of floor and walls within the restrooms
shall be sealed with a material approved by MDOT and the manufacture for such an
application. Material shall be durable, long lasting and able to withstand routine floor
maintenance activities.

Cutting, Cleaning, and Protection of Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating:
   A. Cure the Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System materials in compliance with
      manufacturer’s directions, taking care to prevent contamination during stages of the
      installation and prior to completion of the curing process.
                                                   SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                             FINISHES – DIVISION 9
   B. Protect the Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System from damage and wear during
      other phases of the construction operation, using temporary coverings as
      recommended by the manufacturer, if required. Remove temporary covering just
      prior to final inspection.

   C. Clean the Decorative Mosaic Floor Coating System just prior to final inspection,
      using materials and procedures suitable to the system manufacturer.

   D. Provide chemical resistance chart and maintenance recommendations including
      desirable cleaning products and procedures.

Painting: Furnish all materials, labor and incidental equipment required to complete all
painting and finishing, as called for or as directed, using "First Quality Line" or "Best
Grade" materials, as manufactured by Pratt and Lambert, Glidden, Pittsburgh,
Sherwin-Williams, or approved equal, delivered in original, unopened containers with
labels intact and seals unbroken. Materials shall not be reduced unless specifically
directed on label. Colors shall be as directed by the Engineer/Architect.

Surfaces to receive paint shall be smooth, dry, free of dust and any other adhering
matter, have rust, scale, or mortar removed with minor holes or cracks repaired. Stains
on wood surfaces shall be removed by sanding. Galvanized surfaces shall be treated to
receive paint if called for.

Apply materials, as necessary, for a job complete in every detail, using brush or roller
application by skilled craftsman, following manufacturer's directions and taking care not
to leave runs, laps, streaks or brush marks. No work shall be done when the air
temperature is below 40oF or during damp or humid conditions. Each coat shall be
sufficiently heavy to fully conceal the previous coat and shall be thoroughly dry and
approved before additional coats are applied.

Unless otherwise noted, all surfaces inside and out shall receive paint, or other
protective finish, except tile, non-ferrous metals, wall covering surfaces, plastic faced
surfaces, ceramic or vitreous surfaces, or any factory equipment with baked-on
enameled surfaces. All piping, flue connections, electrical conduit, supports and any
other incidental items shall be painted the same as adjoining surfaces.

All surfaces shall be fully primed or sealed except for those items, delivered with a
factory prime coat applied, which shall be touch-up primed as required or as directed.

Remove or provide protection for hardware, electrical switches and wall-plates and
other miscellaneous items as may be required or as directed. Replace upon
completion. Protect finished work with tarpaulins or drop cloths before painting.
The following work shall be finished with the type of paint and number of coats required:

Painting specification is bases on Sherwin-Williams, Pratt and Lambert, Glidden,
Pittsburgh are acceptable.
                                                      SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                              FINISHES – DIVISION 9

Miscellaneous Steel & Metal Shelving: (if not factory finished).
1st coat Zinc Chromate Primer, Sherwin Williams “Prep-Rite 200”.
2nd coat Sherwin Williams, enamel under coat, “ProMar Enamel".
3rd coat Sherwin Williams, semi gloss enamel, “ProMar Enamel".

Utility, Janitor, and Closet Walls:
Interior Walls (interior concrete block and finished gypsum board)
1st coat Sherwin Williams, Heavy Duty Block Filler (concrete block wall only).
2nd coat Sherwin Williams, Semi gloss epoxy, “Water Born Epoxy”.
3rd coat Sherwin Williams, Semi gloss epoxy, “Water Born Epoxy”.

Drywall Ceilings:
1st coat Sherwin Williams, Latex Primer, “Perp Rite 200”.
2nd coat Sherwin Williams, Satin finish, “ProMar 200 Latex Eggshell”.
3rd coat Sherwin Williams, Satin finish, “ProMar 200 Latex Eggshell”.

Exposed Exterior Wood Finishing: Apply materials, as necessary, for a job complete in
every detail, using brush application by skilled craftsman, following manufacturer's
directions and taking care not to leave runs, laps, streaks or brush marks. No work shall be
done when the air temperature is below 50oF or during damp or humid conditions. Each
coat shall be thoroughly dry and approved before additional coats are applied.

Apply two part system as developed by Sikkines Inc, Akzo or Nobel are acceptable.

Apply when surface air temperature is 50 to 95 F. Apply liberal coats, in one direction.
(Product should cover approximately 250-350 square feet per gallon). Do not apply in
direct sunlight, when surface is hot to the touch, when dew or frost is present, in wet
weather or if moisture of the wood is over 18%.

Apply product with a long-haired natural bristle brush, thoroughly coat and saturate all wood
areas to be covered following the manufactures recommendations. Good painting practices
shall be followed. Spraying of product will not be allowed. No thinning of product will be
allowed.

It will be the Projects Engineers’ final determination when the treatment process will be
started.

Exposed Interior Wood Lobby Ceiling & Glue Laminated Timber Trusses:
1st coat, Sikkens Cetol 1 penetrating natural finish”.
2nd coat Sikkens Cetol 23 Plus penetrating natural finish”.

Wood finish is based on two part system as developed by Sikkines Inc, Akzo or Nobel is
acceptable.
                                                    SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                            FINISHES – DIVISION 9

All Exposed Exterior Wood Lobby Ceiling & Glue Laminated Timber Trusses:
1st coat, Sikkens Cetol 1, natural finish”.
2nd coat Sikkens Cetol 23 Plus, natural finish, wait 24 hours minimum after first coat.”
3rd coat Sikkens Cetol 23 Plus, natural finish, wait 24 hours minimum after second
coat.” It will be the Projects Engineers’ final determination when the treatment process
will be started.

Mechanical and Electric Work (excluding factory finished equipment): Paint all
pipe and fittings (except non-ferrous metals), anchors, supports, wire ways, and other
ferrous metal equipment and accessories the same as adjacent painted surfaces.

Touch-Up Paint: One one-quart can, sealed plainly marked, of each type and color
used shall be delivered to the Engineer/Architect.

Clean-Up: Clean all surfaces of paint splatter remove all refuse and leave all areas in a
neat and clean condition when all other mechanics have finished, or as directed by the
Engineer/Architect.
                                        *****
                                                      SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                          SPECIALTIES – DIVISION 10

Furnish all materials, labor and equipment required to install in place all miscellaneous
and special equipment shown on the drawings and herein specified. All rest room
accessories shall be mounted to comply with The Americans with Disabilities Act
suggested heights. Measurements for all work shall be taken at the job. As far as
possible, all work shall be shop fitted together and delivered complete, ready to install.

All rest room toilet compartments and hardware specifications are based on Bobrick
Washroom Equipment, compatible equipment from Gamco and Comtec will be
considered.

Solid Phenolic Toilet Compartments, Urinal Screens, Counter top Panels, hand
dryer backsplash, hardware and rest room accessories; shall be manufactured by
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. and is listed to establish a standard of quality for
design, function, materials, workmanship and appearance. Other manufacturers may be
submitted for evaluation by the Engineer/Architect. The Engineer/Architect will be the
sole judge as to the acceptability of all products submitted for substitution.
Compartments shall be the products of a single manufacturer.

Show fabrication and erection of compartment assemblies, to extent not fully described
by manufacturer's data sheets. Show anchorage, accessory items and finishes.
Provide location drawings for bolt holes locations in supporting members for attachment
of compartments.

Stiles, Panels, Doors, and Screens shall be 3/4" thick, solid phenolic material with high
pressure matte finish melamine surfaces fused to core. Edges shall be black. Brown
edge will not be acceptable. Color and pattern as selected by architect from Bobrick
standard colors.

Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packing. Store all material
in original protective packaging to prevent physical damage or wetting. Handle so as to
prevent damage to finished surfaces.

Anchor counter top panels to steel frame with MVW1118 #35199 Cam Lock from Comp
Lock Corp. of Thompson Lock, Lansing (517) 394-1838. Two locks per panel See detail
sheets.

All Hardware shall be an Institutional Grade (.67) 18-8 type 304 stainless steel with satin
finish. All institutional hardware shall be concealed inside compartments with the
exception of out-swing doors. Institutional hardware shall be chrome plated, "Zamac" is
unacceptable, shall be 16-gauge (1.6mm) continuous piano hinge. All handicap Out-
swing doors shall be equipped with self-closing hinge. Fasteners that secure directly
into cores are not acceptable. Metal to metal connections shall withstand a direct pull of
over 1000 lbs per screw.

Coat hooks and bumper shall be Bobrick Model B-212 constructed of solid aluminum
with satin finish. Hard rubber bumper shall be secured to coat hook with a drive-screw.
                                                      SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                          SPECIALTIES – DIVISION 10

Rest Room Accessories cont. Locate inside all standard and handicap toilet stalls as
shown, and on the outside of large handicap stall as a door bumper.

Surface-mounted door bumper shall be Bobrick Model B-687 bright polish. Door
bumper shall be constructed of type-304 stainless steel with bright polish finish. Square
base shall be 22- gauge stainless steel. Unit shall be equipped with black neoprene
bumper secured to base by means of black nylon post. Locate two (2) on the outside of
small handicap stall as shown.

Continuous Piano Hinges shall be 16-gauge (1.6mm), hinges shall be attached to door
and stile by theft resistant, button head style, Torx driver with center pin, stainless steel
machine screws into factory installed metal inserts shall be 14-gauge (2 mm) and shall
slide on nylon tracks. Latch shall require less than 5 lb force to operate. Twisting latch
operation will not be acceptable. Latch track shall be attached to door by theft resistant,
Button Head style, Torx driver with center pin, stainless steel machine screws into
factory installed metal inserts. Latch handle shall have rubber bumper to act as door
stop. Latch shall allow door to be lifted over keeper for emergency access.

Urinal Screen brackets shall be 11-gauge (3mm) double thickness stainless steel and
extend full height of panel, secured by theft resistant, button head style, Torx driver with
center pin stainless steel screws and Hilti wall anchors.

Vandal Proof Fastens shall be concealed insofar as practicable. All exposed screws,
bolts and fasteners shall be 18-8 stainless steel, Button Head style Torx driver with
center pin for security.

Wall Anchorage: where equipment, hardware or rest room accessories are to be
anchored to walls use Hilti #219913 14 X 1 1/4" Torx HWH S/S anchors, plastic will not
accepted.

Janitor Shelf: Utility shelf with mop and broom holders and rag hooks, Bobrick Model,
B-224. Utility shelf shall be constructed of type-304 stainless steel with satin finish.
Shelf shall be 8" deep and have 1-1/2" return for maximum rigidity. Unit shall be
equipped with replaceable, spring-loaded rubber cams that will securely hold handles
from 7/8" to 1-1/4" in diameter. Shelf shall be equipped with stainless steel drying rod.

Lavatory-Mounted Soap Dispenser: shall be Technical Concepts full automatic
chrome model 401310. One shot touch-free with a 1600ml soap reservoir. Dispenser
shall be furnished with 4 Alkaline D cell batteries. Lavatory mounted soap dispenser
shall dispense liquid soaps, lotions, and detergents.

Stainless Steel Wall-mounted waste receptacle: Bobrick Model B-261. Wall-
mounted waste receptacle shall be constructed of 22-gauge (0.8-mm), type-304
stainless steel with satin finish. Bottom edges of unit shall be hemmed; unhemmed
edges will not be accepted. Minimum capacity: 1-1/2 gal.
                                                       SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                           SPECIALTIES – DIVISION 10

Toilet Paper Holders shall be Scot JRT JR Jumbo Roll Tissue System, Model
No.9564, Bobrick, or approved equal. Dispenser shall be approximately 10 3/4"x 10
3/4" x 5 1/4" in size and shall have Stainless Steel covers. System shall have a locking
system, a pull down hinged cover and 3 separate cutting edges.

Family Rest Room - Surface-mounted soap dispenser:, shall be Bobrick Model B-
4112. Surface-mounted soap dispenser shall be constructed of type-304 stainless steel
with satin finish. Container shall be drawn, 20-gauge, one-piece seamless construction
with satin finish. Container body and back plate shall be epoxy sealed to prevent
leakage and warping. Locked, hinged filler top requires special key to open. Valve shall
be operable with one hand and require less than 5 lb of force to comply with ADA
Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) and shall dispense liquid soaps, lotions, and
detergents Capacity: 40 fl. oz..

Surface-mounted sanitary napkin disposal: Bobrick Series Model B-270. Surface-
mounted sanitary napkin disposal shall be constructed of 22-gauge, type-304 stainless
steel with satin finish. Sanitary napkin disposal shall have a formed, one-piece,
seamless front. One-piece, drawn cover shall be equipped with a full-length stainless
steel piano hinge.

Family Rest Room mirror: shall be Bobrick Model B-2908 2436 Series. Mirror shall be
framed with one-piece, type-304, stainless steel angle 3/4" x 3/4". Frame shall be roll
formed construction with continuous integral stiffener on all sides. Frame shall have
beveled design on front of angle to hold mirror tightly against frame to prevent exposure
to sharp edges. Corners shall be heliarc welded, ground and polished smooth.
Exposed surfaces shall have satin finish with vertical grain. Mirror shall be No. 1
quality, 1/4" tempered select float glass select for silvering: electrolytically copper-plated
be the galvanic process. All mirror edges shall be protected with plastic filler strips.
Mirror back shall be protected by full-size, shock-absorbing, water-resistant, non-
abrasive 1/8" thick polyethylene padding. Galvanized steel back shall have integral
hanging brackets for mounting on concealed one-piece rectangular wall hangers.
Galvanized steel back shall be fastened to frame with concealed screws to permit glass
replacement; attachment by rivets or tabs is not acceptable. Mirror-shelf shall be
secured to hanger with concealed Phillips head locking setscrews in bottom of frame.

Grab Bars shall be Bobrick B-6206 x lengths shown on details with 2582 anchors and
2522-3 mounting kit as applicable. Bars shall be 18 gauge, Type 304 satin finished
stainless anchoring securely, to withstand 300 lb vertical loading.

Most Rest room product numbers indicated are those of Bobrick Washroom Equipment,
Inc. Listing of products by one manufacturer’s trade name is not intended to exclude
equivalent products by other manufacturers. However, the standard of quality in
materials, details, finish and fit shall be judged by the Bobrick items specified. Individual
items of lesser quality will not be accepted.
                                                    SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                        SPECIALTIES – DIVISION 10

Vanity Countertop Unit: Shall be manufactured by DuPont Co., Avonite Inc., Meganite
or approved equal, color shall be chosen from manufactures full line of colors . Furnish
and install one-piece (no exposed seams) 1/2" non porous polymer solid surface
polyester alloy countertop apron and 4" integral backsplash. Fasten countertop using
manufacturer's recommended adhesives and color-matched silicone sealants.
Furnish and install non-porous polymer solid surface polyester alloy machine beveled
edge sinks with side mounted overflow, flush mounted to countertop. Install with
compatible joint adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.

The countertops shall have finished appearance of 1" on all exposed sides and edges.
Center sinks as shown on the plan and 3" maximum from front edge of countertop.
Solid surface countertop, backsplash, apron and sink colors shall be selected by shop
drawings, but shall be based on the DuPont’s premium colors. Units shall be fabricated
by a certified fabricator according to the manufacturer's specifications.

Silicone caulking shall be done by a competent skilled craftsman to insure a uniform,
clean, professional job. Break all exposed edges that do not receive a 1/4" diameter
radius. Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove adhesives,
sealants, and other stains. Make plumbing connection to sinks in accordance with
Mechanical - Division 15.

Protect surfaces from damage during construction. Any damage occurring during
construction shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.

Anchor counter top panels to steel frame with MVW1118 #35199 Cam Lock from Fort
Lock Corp. of Thompson Lock, Lansing (517) 394-1838. Two locks per panel See detail
sheets.

Surface Mounted Lobby Display Cases: Large Contemporary Bulletin Board Cabinet
with hinged door. Provide all items in this section as manufactured by: Claridge
Products and Equipment, Inc. HBC Series or approved equal.

Backing shall be 3/4” A/C plywood with the ‘A’ face painted 2 coats flat black enamel.
Anchor securely to wall. Frame housing shall be heavy-gauge rectangular aluminum
with dark bronze satin anodize finish, 1-3/4" x 4" housing. Tempered glass door hung
on piano hinges. Furnish two locks per door locks shall be #MFW1118#35199, as
manufactured by the Fort Lock Corporation. Metal Trim and Accessories: Provide
aluminum extrusions as manufactured by Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. HBC
Series or approved equal. Trim shall be heavy gauge extruded aluminum and shall
meet or exceed ASTM B221 Alloy Standards. Finish etched and anodized dark bronze
satin finish. Large Door Contemporary Cabinets shall have angle hangers furnished top
and bottom.
                                                       SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                           SPECIALTIES – DIVISION 10

Surface Mounted Lobby Display Cases cont.: Deliver factory built units completely
assembled in one piece without joints, wherever possible. Follow manufacturer's
instructions for storage and handling of units before installation. Install level and plumb,
with fasteners furnished, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The
Contractor shall verify that all accessories are installed as required for each unit.

At completion of work, clean glass surfaces, plywood panels, and trim in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations, leaving all materials ready for use.

Rest Room Door Lettering: shall be installed as shown on the plans. Letters shall be
Style DN 300 die-cut white "Scotch Cal" mounted on Let-R-Set carriers for installation
as manufactured by Demp-Nock Company of Warren, Michigan, 48090, or approved
equal.

Three inch (3") high letters identifying "M E N", "W O M E N" and "F A M I L Y
R E S T R O O M" shall be installed directly to both sides of the doors to be read from
the inside and outside.

Three inch (3") high letters identifying "F A M I L Y R E S T R O O M" shall be
installed directly to out side only of the door to be read from the lobby.

Two inch (2") high letters identifying "B A B Y C H A N G I N G S T A T I O N" shall
be installed directly under “FAMILY REST ROOM” “M E N”, and "W O M E N" lettering
lobby side only.

The Contractor shall furnish and install dark bronze 16 gauge aluminum mounting
plates, to adhere letter on. Grind smooth all sharp edges and fasten in place with
vandal proof 18-8 stainless steel screws, Button Head style, Torx driver with center pin
for security.

Interior Handicap Signage: All signs required to be accessible by section 4.1
(Accessible Elements and Spaces) of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and the
Michigan Department of Labors latest Construction Codes.

Rest Room Entrance Signs: shall be wall-mounted over tile and have white letters,
pictograms (symbols), pictogram border and Grade 2 Braille, raised 1/32" off the
background. Letters shall be sans serif or simple serif. Raised characters shall be 1
1/4" (min.) to 2" (max.) high. Pictograms shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal
description placed directly below the pictogram. The symbol of accessibility border shall
be in a 6" x 6" square field. The overall size of signs shall be 8" x 8" and made of a hard
plastic. The white characters and brown background of the signs shall be a matte
finish, or other non-glare finish. Signs shall be installed on the wall adjacent to the latch
side of the door at a height of 60 inches from the finish floor to the centerline of the sign,
see detail sheet Mount signs so that a person may approach within 3 inches
                                                       SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                           SPECIALTIES – DIVISION 10

Rest Room Entrance Signs cont: of sign without encountering protruding objects or
standing within the swing of a door. Signs shall be adhered to a 1/8" x 8" x 8" aluminum
backer plate, the backer plate shall be fastened with (4) stainless steel flat head screws,
countersink flush, and anchor with lead masonry expansion anchors placed at the
corners of the signs, drill into tile grout joint not tile. The Contractor shall supply one set
of signs, installed as described, and as shown on the plans. A full set of signs shall
include two men signs and two women signs and one family room sign.

Match aluminum backer plate size to plastic sign, round corners and grind plate to size,
no not caulk around size.

Metal Shelving shall be EZ Steel Shelving, complete with 13 gauge steel brackets, 14
gauge steel uprights, 16 gauge steel shelves, galvanized and with chromate dipped
Primer, as manufactured by EZ Shelving, Inc., or approved equal. Cut out neatly as
may be required for plumbing piping. Smooth all rough edges and anchor securely.

Automatic Hand Dryers: Provide surface mounted, rapid drying electric hand dryer
Model J4-974 Airforce Hand Dryers electrostatically applied, chip resistant, white paint
finished covers; as manufactured by World Dryer, Inc., or approved equal.

The cover shall be constructed of one piece, heavy duty, and rust-resistant, rib-
reinforced, die-cast aluminum. Finish: Electrostatically applied, chip resistant, white
epoxy paint incorporated with antimicrobial additive. Nominal Size: 10.7 inches by 8.9
inches by 6.5 inches. Weight: 7 pounds. The motor shall be universal brush type
operating at 34,000 RPM, 208/230 volts. All metal parts coated according to
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. requirements. Mount dryers at heights indicated on
Drawings. Nozzle: Do NOT caulk around dryers. Mount hand dryers over ½” solid
surface materials as shown on the plans.

Mirrors: Mirrors shall be made of No. 1 quality 1/4" polished plate glass with silvering
consisting of two coats of nitrate silver, protected by a coat of solid copper deposited by
electrolysis. Mirrors shall have specially prepared silvering applied so as to remain
permanently on masonry walls when supported by epoxy. Mirrors shall be mounted
over the lavatories as shown. The mirror shall be attached to the wall by means of an
epoxy glue to be spotted on the backs of the mirrors in five places, one at each corner
and one at the center. Remove all exposed sharp edges and neatly caulk between
mirrors and ceramic wall tile with white or harmonizing colored silicone caulking, leaving
slightly concave surface, free from wrinkles and drips. Clean adjacent surfaces
immediately and leave work in clean condition. Furnish and install aluminum tile edging
all around rest room mirrors.
                                                     SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                         SPECIALTIES – DIVISION 10

Family Room Handicap Lavatory Protective Enclosure: furnish and install Truebro
Model 20" x 18" ADA compliant, wall hung, wheelchair accessible lavatory enclosure in
unisex handicap room as shown on the plans. Enclosure shall be molded impact
resistant of .093 wall thickness, stain resistant, chemical resistant Boltaron 4333
Rigiwall E. The Lav Guard shall comply with ADA article 4.19.4, ANSI A117.1, BOCA P
1203.4 and ASTM E-84. Pipe wrap will not be accepted. Similar units from Zurn or
American Standard are acceptable.

Wall-Mounted Waste Receptacle: Furnish and install Howard Towne H1N 10 gallon
capacity, perforated steel wall mounted receptacle. The receptacles shall be made of
heave gauge, powder coated galvanized, fire-safe steel. The unit shall have a see
through design, retainer bands to hold poly bags and bottom drain holes. Overall
dimensions: 24”Hx 12”W x 12”D and weigh 15 lbs. Provide a removable
locking/mounting bracket.

Baby Changing Stations: Furnish and install horizontal surface mounted HDPE baby
changing station as manufactured by Koala Corporation (800) 985-6252. Unit shall be
constructed of high-impact polyethylene plastic and shall be designed to hold a
minimum of 400 lbs. static weight. Install as per manufacturer's recommendations and
vandal proof screws. Comparable items from Compatible Industries Inc., American
Infant Care Products, or approved equal are acceptable. Unit shall be equipped with
tamper resistant mounting hardware and factory installed locks also furnish one extra
safety strap for each unit. One per rest room and one in the Family rest room.

Disappearing Stairs: Furnish and install a completely assembled and ready to install
aluminum attic stairway capably of handling 300 lbs. minimum by Memphis Folding
Stairs, Inc. or approved equal. Unit shall have a full length piano hinge continuously
supported over the full the entire width of the stair. Stairs shall have a fully adjustable
foot assembly with slip resistant foot pads, angle bracing on top of each section. Stairs
shall have a ¾” isocyanurate foam plastic sandwiched between 1.5 millimeter aluminum
foil faces, having R-value of 6. Unit shall also have a fire retardant plywood door panel,
paint all expose surfaces of closed unit and trim same as adjacent ceiling.

Lobby Floor Mats: Furnish (4) four 6’x7’decorative premier one end rounded floor
mats from WaterHog Mats. The floor mat shall be constructed of face molded
reinforced textile, solution dyed polypropylene yarn with a 3/8” high pile and have a face
weight of 36 ounces/square yard. Mat shall have special ridged design, rubber
reinforced face nubs, and 15% recycled rubber backing. Similar mats from Andersen or
USA Mats are acceptable. Shape and color to be selected by shop drawings.



                                          *****
                                                                    SARANAC REST AREA
                                                       HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

DUCT SYSTEM INSULATION

Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Description

       A. Provide mechanical insulation complete, in place, as specified herein, as shown on the
          plans and as required for the heating, ventilation and air conditioning.
       B. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment to furnish and install complete and in
          place, all the insulation as shown on the drawings, specified herein, and as required for
          a complete and operable installation.

1.02   Alternates: Insulation material and thickness other than those specified herein are
       acceptable, provided that the increased (decreased) thickness is calculated in accordance
       with Paragraph 5.10.1 of ASHRAE 90-75 (and the insulation thickness specified herein is
       used in place of the Table 5.1 thickness values). Thicknesses specified herein are based
       on an insulation material having thermal resistance in the range of 4.0 to 4.6 h x f x sq. ft.
       per BTU per inch of thickness on a flat surface at a mean temperature of 75 o F.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Material

       A. Insulate exterior surfaces of ductwork as scheduled.

       B. Insulate all heating-cooling supply, return, and exhaust air ducts with 1 inch insulation
          for their full length.

       C. Concealed Ductwork
          1. Insulate with scheduled thickness, 1 pound density flexible fiberglass blanket and
             adhere to duct with 100% coverage of fire retardant adhesive. Equal to Owens-
             Corning fiberglass Type IV Flexible Pink Duct Wrap Insulation (Faced).
          2. Exterior of insulation shall be provided with a factory applied continuous, non-
             shrinking vapor barrier of foil reinforced Kraft with 2" flange. Insulation and vapor
             barrier shall be continuous through sleeves and supports.

       D. Exposed Ductwork

          In Mechanical Equipment Room, insulation for exposed ductwork, plenums, etc., shall
          be scheduled thickness rigid fiberglass board with a nominal density of 4.0 pounds per
          cubic foot; equal to Owens-Corning Type 25. Insulation shall have a factory applied all
          service vapor barrier facing equal to Owens-Corning ASJ.

       E. Duct Insulation Schedule

          Service                                             Type and thickness of Insulation
          Return Ducts                                        1" Covering
          Exhaust Ducts                                       1-1/2" Covering
                                                                    SARANAC REST AREA
                                                       HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

DUCT SYSTEM INSULATION (Con't)

          Supply Ducts and Outside Air Duct                   1-1/2" Covering
2.02   Acceptable Manufacturers

       Similar items as manufactured by:
       1.      Johns Manville
       2.      Certain Teed Insulation
       3.      Knauf Insulation

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A. Do not apply insulation materials until tests specified in other Sections for the underlying
          equipment are completed. Remove all foreign material such as rust, scale, or dirt; and
          make sure that the surfaces are clean and dry, and keep insulation clean and dry at all
          times.

       B. Provide all adhesives, mastics, mechanical fasteners, etc.; as specified herein and as
          required. Adhesives equal to those specified, shall be provided and applied in
          accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations; and shall be as
          manufactured by Benjamin Foster, Chicago Mastic, Owens Corning, or approved equal.
           Wheat paste will not be permitted.

       C. Ductwork

          1. Concealed Ductwork Covering:

              Insulation shall be tightly adhered to ducts with 100% coverage of fire retardant
              adhesive, with all circumferential joints tightly butted, and all longitudinal joints
              overlapped a minimum of 2 inches. In addition to adhesive, secure insulation to
              sides and bottom of all duct panels larger than 24 inches with mechanical fasteners
              18 inches o.c. in each direction. Joints shall be secured with flare door staples 6
              inches o.c. All joints, staples, and mechanical fasteners shall be covered with 3-inch
              minimum width, foil-reinforced, Kraft tape securely held with 100% coverage of
              adhesive.

          2. Exposed Ductwork Covering:

              Cut, score, or miter insulation as required. All joints shall be tightly butted.
              Insulation shall be tightly adhered to all surfaces with 100% coverage of fire
              retardant adhesive. In addition, insulation shall be securely held in place with
              mechanical fasteners as required and at not more than 18 inches on centers. All
              edges, butt joints, fastener penetrations, corners, etc., shall be sealed with 3-inch
              wide or wider stripping tape of same material as facing securely held in place with
              fire retardant adhesive.
                                                                   SARANAC REST AREA
                                                      HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14


AIR DISTRIBUTION

Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Description

       Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment; fabricate, and install complete and in
       place, all the air distribution systems as shown on the drawings, specified herein, and as
       required for a complete and operable installation. The drawings are diagrammatic to show
       the general arrangement and extent of the work and shall not be scaled for measurements.
       Locate equipment and ductwork as shown, or as directed by the Engineer. Items required
       for this work include, but are not necessarily limited to:

       A. Exhaust Systems
       B. Dampers
       C. Grilles

1.02   Quality Assurance

       All material shall be new, installed in a neat and secure manner and shall meet the
       standards and practices of the local utility or other authority having jurisdiction over this
       work. Provide approved Certificate of Compliance, if available, to the Engineer.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Exhaust/Make Up Air Fans

       A. The Energy Recovery Ventilator shall be a packaged static plate enthalpic-energy
          recovery ventilator. The energy recovery cores used in these products shall be certified
          by ARI under its Standard 1060 for Energy Recovery Ventilators. ARI published
          certifications shall confirm manufacturer’s published performance for airflow, static
          pressure, temperature and total effectiveness, purge air (OACF) and exhaust air
          leakage (EATR).

          The Energy Recovery Ventilator shall be capable of transferring both sensible and latent
          energy between air streams. Latent energy transfer shall be accomplished by direct
          water vapor transfer from one air stream to the other, without exposing transfer media in
          succeeding cycles directly to the exhaust air and then to the fresh air.

          The energy-transfer element shall perform without condensing or frosting under normal
          operating conditions (defined as outside temperatures above -10 degrees F and inside
          relative humidity below 40%). Occasional extreme conditions shall not affect the usual
          function or performance of the element. No condensate drains will be allowed.

          The unit shall have the capacity to operate continuously without the need for bypass,
          recirculation, preheaters, or defrost cycles under normal operating conditions.
                                                                    SARANAC REST AREA
                                                       HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

AIR DISTRIBUTION (Con't)

          Water vapor transfer shall be through molecular transport by hydroscopic resin and shall
          not be accomplished by “porous plate” mechanisms. Exhaust and fresh airstreams shall
          at all times travel in separate passages, and airstreams shall not mix.

       B. Product Construction

          1. Fixed-plate energy-exchange element. Energy-exchange module shall be of fixed-
             plate cross-flow construction, with no moving parts.
          2. No condensate drain pans of drains shall be allowed and unit shall be capable of
             operating in winter and summer conditions without generating condensate.
          3. The unit case shall be constructed of galvanized, 20-gauge steel, with lapped
             corners.
          4. Unit shall have single-point power connection. (Contactor voltage shall be 120V)
          5. Flange components shall be provided suitable for connection of ductwork.
          6. Access doors shall provide easy access to blowers, energy transfer elements, and
             filters. Panel shall be gasketed to provide air-tight seal.
          7. Case walls and doors shall be insulted with 1” FSK high-density board insulation,
             eliminating the possibility of exposing the fresh air to glass fibers.
          8. Energy-exchangers shall be protected by a 2” nominal pleated, disposable filter.
          9. Blower motors shall be thermally protected with automatic reset, or supplied with
             starters.

          Exhaust fans shall be an inline centrifugal belt drive fan with the following mechanical
          and electrical characteristics:

              Size          1400 CFM @ 0.75" SP
              Motor         230 volt.
              Make up air fans shall be an inline centrifugal belt drive fan with the following
              mechanical and electrical characteristics:

              Size            1400 CFM @ 0.75" SP
              Motor           230 volt.
              All parts (except aluminum propeller) shall be coated with appropriate rust inhibitor
              and then acrylic epoxy finish.

       C. Furnish exhaust fans with occupancy sensor control sensors as shown on the plans.
       D. Install a hooded wall cap and paint wall cap to match exterior finish of the roof.
       E. Furnish and install back draft dampers in both the exhaust and make-up air ducts.

2.02   Duct Work

       A. Ductwork for ventilating and exhaust shall be solidly constructed of sheet metal, No. 1
          smooth finish, galvanized copper bearing steel, of not less that 22 gauge.
       B. All rectangular ducts shall be paneled for stiffening. All longitudinal joints shall be lock
          seamed. Standing seams shall be used on transverse joints where possible. All ducts
          shall be constructed tight as possible, smooth inside. Turns and bends shall have
                                                                     SARANAC REST AREA
                                                        HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

AIR DISTRIBUTION (Con't)

            inside radius not less than width or diameter of duct; where building conditions would
            prohibit this, turning vanes shall be used. Shoulder angles, when changing duct size,
            shall not be sharper than 30o to the direction of the main run. Duct dimensions shall be
            increased where required to accommodate duct linings.
       C.   Fan Connections - Between all fan openings and the duct system to which they are
            attached, both supply, return and exhaust systems, provide an approved type neoprene
            connection of deadening sound, manufactured by Ventfabrics,Inc., or equal, same to be
            secured to fans and ducts by means of flat steel band bolted on firmly to each side of
            the system.
       D.   Balancing Air system - This contractor, upon completion of this work and just before final
            acceptance, shall check and balance all air quantities as required and shown on the
            plans. The system, both air supply and return and exhaust, shall be adjusted to the
            amount of supply or exhaust and shall be done with an approved type of calibrated
            instrument such as "Alano" or "anemotherm" air meter for balancing air system. A
            schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer showing that these systems have been
            balanced to correct quantities.
       E.   Construct, brace and support ducts and air chambers in such a manner that they will not
            sag or vibrate to any perceptible extent when fans are operating at maximum speed and
            capacity.
       F.   Where ducts connect to the exhaust fan, flexible connectors, minimum 6" long, shall be
            used.
       G.   Sheet metal doors and access panels into air plenums shall be not less than 20 gauge,
            double paneled and stiffened, with turned edges and with felt or rubber gaskets for
            airtight construction. Hardware shall be heavy duty type.

2.03   Dampers

       A. Manual Dampers

            Suitable balancing dampers shall be installed in each branch duct. These are to be
            adjustable and so arranged that they can be set and fixed in position. Dampers in ducts
            that are not in accessible places shall have the rod from the damper trunnion extended
            to an accessible point and connected to a McGuinnes, Perfecto, Parker or Young
            Regulator. At all locations where access to the ducts is possible, furnish and install
            standard quadrants and locks. Shanks for dampers up to one square foot in area shall
            be 1/4" square and for dampers over one square foot in area, 3/8" square.

       B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers

            Aluminum backdraft dampers shall have sturdy steel angle frames with nonferrous
            bearings and full length spindles. Blades shall be aluminum with neoprene or felt-lines
            edges, interlocked and closing against felt or neoprene linings on frames to insure quiet
            operations. Dampers shall be arranged to open to outdoors to provide weather
            protection.
                                                                    SARANAC REST AREA
                                                       HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

AIR DISTRIBUTION (Con't)



2.04   Registers, Grilles and Diffusers

       A. Toilet room fresh air inlet and exhaust fan grille - Titus series CORE 8, #8F00G,
          aluminum perforated plate with extruded aluminum frame. Finish shall be white. Similar
          items by IGL and Barber-Colman will be acceptable.
       B. Under eve fresh air inlets - Titus series CORE 8, #8F00G, aluminum perforated plate
          with extruded aluminum frame. Provide an insect screen. Finish shall be painted to
          match soffit color. Similar items by IGL and Barber-Colman will be acceptable.
       C. Lobby, closet, janitor room, and utility room exhaust air grilles - Titus SG 1500 without
          screen, anodized extruded aluminum frame and blades. Grilles shall be painted to
          match the door color. Similar items by IGL and Barber-Colman will be acceptable.

2.05   Gable Attic Louvers with Bird Screen: Furnish and install extruded aluminum stationary
       louvers with drainable blades, as manufactured by Ruskin Manufacturing extruded
       aluminum stationary louvers with drainable blades, Model ELF375DX or as approved.
       Install in both gable ends as shown on the plans.      Frame material shall be extruded
       aluminum, alloy 6063-T5, and wall thickness: 0.081 inch nominal, depth: 4 inches. Blades:
       drainable, extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5, Wall Thickness: 0.081 inch nominal, Bird
       Screen Material: Aluminum, expanded, flattened 1/2 inch mesh x 0.063 inch intercrimp.
       Frame shall be removable and rewireable. Finish shall be electrolytically deposited anodize
       dark bronze with a minimum thickness of 0.7 mils.

2.06   Attic Fan: Attic fans shall be a sidewall propeller direct drive fan with the following
       mechanical and electrical characteristics:

              Size                    1000 CFM @ 1/4" SP
              Motor                   120 volt.

       All parts (except aluminum propeller) shall be coated with appropriate rust inhibitor and then
       acrylic epoxy finish. Furnish attic fans with thermostat control. Furnish and install back
       draft dampers.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A. Equipment shall be installed together with flexible connections (if needed) and vibration
          isolators to prevent vibration or other noise from being transmitted to the building and
          shall be free from rattles, squeaks, etc., that may cause a disturbance within the
          building.

       B. The Contractor shall make full operational tests of all mechanical equipment, controls
          and safety devices in the presence of the Engineer and make all corrections and
          adjustments necessary for a properly operating system.
                                                                   SARANAC REST AREA
                                                      HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

HEATING SYSTEM

Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Description

       Radiant Floor Heating shall include all labor, materials, equipment and services required to
       install a hydronic heating system where indicated on the plans. Examine all other portions
       of the plans for construction and conditions related to this work. The drawings are
       diagrammatic to show the general arrangement and extent of the work and shall not be
       scaled for measurements. Locate equipment and ductwork as shown, or as directed by the
       Engineer. Items required for this work include, but are not necessarily limited to:

       A.   Circulating Pumps
       B.   Geothermal Water to Water Unit
       C.   Vertical Closed Loop Geothermal Loop Field
       D.   80 Gallon Storage Tank
       E.   In-Floor Radiant System

1.02   Shop Drawings

       Shop drawings of materials, details and installations shall be submitted for approval and no
       fabrications shall be performed until approval is obtained.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Radiant Floor Heating

       A. Tubing

               1. Tubing shall be cross-linked polyethylene, 5/8" inside diameter, rated at 180 oF
                  maximum working temperature and 100 psi working pressure in accordance with
                  ASTM standard F876 and F877. The manufacturers name, temperature and
                  pressure ratings, and ASTM and DIN compliance numbers must appear on the
                  tubing.

               2. Tubing shall be cross-linked polyethylene manufactured by the "Engel Method".
                  The tubing shall have a integral barrier to limit the oxygen diffusion (DIN 4726)
                  through the tube to be no greater than .009 g/m3/day at 104 oF water
                  temperature. Independent lab test results must be available at the request of
                  owner or owners representative.

               3. The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tubing shall not be less than
                  eight times the outside diameter. Bends with a radius less than stated shall
                  require the use of a bend support device.

               4. Supply and return tubing to manifolds shall be cross-linked polyethylene tube
                  with an integral oxygen diffusion barrier. Cross-linked polyethylene tube should
                                                                 SARANAC REST AREA
                                                    HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

HEATING SYSTEM (continued)

                only be used when specifically approved by the local building inspector for
                supply and return tubing applications.

     B. Manifolds

            Manifolds shall be of cast bronze construction, manufactured of alloys to prevent
            dezincification. Manifolds shall have integral circuit balancing valves and individual
            circuit control valves (on/off). Manifolds shall be able to vent air from the system.
            Manifolds shall be provided with support brackets and tube bend supports.
            Manifolds shall be isolated from supply and return tubing with valves that are
            suitable for isolation and balancing.

     C. Tube Fittings

            1. Tube fittings shall be manufactured of dezincification resistant brass. These
               fittings must be supplied by the tube manufacturer. The tube fitting shall consist
               of a barbed insert, a suitable compression ring, and a compression nut.

            2. Tube fittings shall be compatible to the tubing material used. Fittings used with
               the cross-linked polyethylene tube shall not permit excessive oxygen
               permeation.

     D. All zone control motors and thermostats for the floor heating system shall be supplied by
        the piping manufacturer.

     E. All floor heating equipment shall be installed per manufacturers instructions and in
        accordance with all warranty requirements.

     F. Circulating Pumps

        Circulating Pumps for radiant floor heating shall be bronze with a capacity of 15 gpm
        with 18 ft. of head. Pump shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett Model No. HD3 or
        an approved equal.

     G. Controls: Tekmar 423 reset module, 335 zone manager, 441 mixing expansion module
        with 713 automatic mixing valve. Thermostats are based on (6) 077 remote indoor
        sensors & (6)-541 thermostats or approved equivalent.

        Controls for the Heating System shall be furnished as an integral part of the unit. Each
        thermostat shall be provided with a remote sensor to be located in the space served by
        the zone and thermostats are to be located at main reset module location. The
        thermostats with remote sensors shall communicate directly with the zone manager.
        The contractor shall provide and install an automated mixing control module that
        prevents the water temperature to the radiant floor tubing from exceeding 130oF. The
        mixing valve shall be directly controlled by the mixing valve module which will
        communicate with the universal outdoor reset module. The reset module will track
                                                                    SARANAC REST AREA
                                                       HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

HEATING SYSTEM (continued)

          outside temperature and inside demand to automatically adjust the supply water
          temperature as required to heat the space. The pumps shall shut down when there is no
          heat demand signal or when the outdoor air temperature is warm enough so the system
          no longer requires heat. The pumps shall run continuously when a zone is selected.
          The boiler control system shall have maximum supply temperature that can be varied so
          as to protect system components. The maximum supply temperature to the floor tubing
          shall be set at 130oF.

2.02   Water To Water Geothermal Unit

       A. The unit shall have a COP of 3.0 and an output capacity of 60,700 Btu/Hr with an
          entering source temperature of 32° F, flow rate of 21 GPM and an entering load
          temperature of 104°F.
       B. The geothermal unit shall be designed to operate with leaving water temperatures of
          30°F to 130°F.
       C. The geothermal unit shall be reversible and provide water heating and cooling at the
          demand of the user.
       D. The geothermal unit cabinet shall be manufactured of steel with durable polyester
          powder coat paint for long lasting durability and a high density weighted sound blanket
          for noise reduction while operating. Unit size shall be no larger than 32.5” deep, 22”
          wide, and 26.5” tall and shall be installed on an anti-vibration pad for reduced noise
          transfer.
       E. The geothermal unit shall have a compressor with a PSC motor that is hermetically
          sealed with overload protection and mounted on rubber vibration isolators. Compressor
          shall be a high-efficiency compliant scroll design for heat pump duty.
       F. The geothermal unit shall have a coaxial heat exchanger constructed of a steel outer
          tube, cupronickel inner tube and female NPT fittings. Heat exchanger, refrigerant
          suction lines, desuperheater coil and all water pipes shall be fully insulated to reduce
          heat loss and prevent condensation in low temperature operation.
       G. The electrical circuit shall have high and low pressure safety switches, compressor
          relay, reversing valve coil, 24V 75 VA transformer with circuit breaker and compressor
          control module with integral lockout mode and anti-short cycle protection. The unit
          controls shall be a factory installed internal controller that can be configured as the
          primary control of the unit, or configured to be controlled by an external source. The
          controller will be able to monitor all fault conditions and lockout if a fault occurs three
          times within one compressor call. The dedicated geothermal heating/cooling unit shall
          have an output that allows the staging of several units together.
       H. The refrigerant circuit shall be insulated and contain a reversing valve, thermal
          expansion valve, and high and low side access ports. The unit shall operate with R-
          410A refrigerant that helps to reduce ozone depletion.

2.03   Loopfield and Flow Center

       A. The loopfield shall be a vertical closed system installed in accordance with the
          requirement of the engineer with respect to soil condition, site condition, and climate. It
          is required to have 215’ of vertical bore per nominal ton of geothermal equipment.
                                                                  SARANAC REST AREA
                                                     HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

HEATING SYSTEM (continued)

     B. Location of all trenches and bore holes should be coordinated with local utility services,
        job site manager and engineer.
     C. Provide a complete Geothermal Loop Heat Exchanger (GLHE) as shown on the
        drawings, to couple the geothermal heat pump units specified elsewhere, to provide a
        Ground Source Closed-Loop Heat Pump System. In the event that the heat pumps
        submitted by the contractor differ from the specs of equipment specified, it will be the
        responsibility of the contractor to submit to the engineer for approval a complete
        geothermal loop design, with calculations to match the alteration of equipment the
        contractor wishes to substitute. In addition, the equipment supplier and the contractor
        shall furnish, in writing, to the engineer a “geothermal loop performance guarantee”
        stating that the heat rejection/absorption of the equipment will not exceed the
        geothermal loop design submitted. The entire loop system shall be freeze protected to
        15°F by use of an approved antifreeze solution. The percentage of antifreeze shall be
        measured by volume (gal/gal), not weight.
     D. Installers must have completed a certified training program or be a certified
        Geothermal Service Contractor (GSC) and shall have at least two years of successful
        installation experience on projects with GLHE work similar to that required for this
        project.
     E. The only acceptable method for joining pipe to be buried is by a heat fusion process.
        GLHE fabricators must have completed a heat fusion school in which each participant
        has been certified in the heat fusion procedure under direct supervision of a certified
        heat fusion trainer.
     F. Provide piping and pipe fittings in accordance with the following listing:

        The piping shall be PE3408 (high density polyethylene) with minimum cell classification
        345434C per ASTM D-3350, “Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and
        Fitting Materials.” Resistance to environmental stress cracking is critical to long life
        expectancy. Therefore, as a more stringent requirement, the piping material shall
        demonstrate zero failures after 5,000 hours under condition “C” (100% reagent at
        100°C) when tested in accordance with ASTM D-1693, “Standard Test Method for
        Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics.” A 55-year limited warranty (in
        writing) must be issued by the pipe supplier.

        Only the following standard sizes of PE3408 are acceptable:
        3/4" IPS SDR-11
        1-1/4" IPS Schedule 40
        2" IPS Schedule 40
        3" IPS SDR-11
        4" IPS SDR-11

        Pipe and fittings shall be produced by the same manufacturer from identical materials
        meeting the requirements of this specification.
     G. The antifreeze fluid must be safe, environmentally friendly, nontoxic and have excellent
        heat transfer properties. It must be based on ethanol (grain) alcohol.
     H. All vertical GLHEs shall be constructed of high density polyethylene pipe, SDR-11 or
        Schedule 40. [It must conform to the material physical property, testing, certification and
                                                                     SARANAC REST AREA
                                                        HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

HEATING SYSTEM (continued)

           listing specifications identified in Section A, “Piping.”] Each GLHE shall be closed by
           means of a single or double elbow style U-bend at the bottom of the loop. The U-bend
           shall be constructed and attached to the GLHE using the heat fusion bonding method.
           No other fusion joints are permitted on the vertical portion of the GLHE.
      I.   All vertical GLHE bore holes shall be grouted completely in conformance with the
           International Ground Source Heat Pump Association’s (IGSHPA) standards specified in
           their publication, “Proper Grouting Procedures for Ground-Source Heat Pump System,”
           and in conformance with all state and local requirements. Since settling of the grouting
           material will occur after the initial grouting, the contractor shall monitor each bore hole
           and continue adding grout as required. Contractor will be responsible for grouting of
           holes after installing loops with Cetco Geothermal Grout, or equivalent product, for
           enhanced thermal conductivity. Geothermal grout shall be mixed to obtain a minimum
           thermal conductivity of 0.88 Btu/hr/ft/F. Geothermal grout shall be mixed with silica
           sand meeting the grout manufacturer’s specifications. Grout mixing and application
           shall follow manufacture’s requirements.
     J.    Lateral Piping (Including Horizontal Loop): All lateral piping shall be constructed of high
           density, polyethylene pipe, minimum SDR-11 or Schedule 40. [It must conform to the
           material physical property, testing, certification and listing specifications in Section A,
           “Piping.”] All joints shall be made using the heat fusion joining method.
     K.    Lateral pipes shall be purchased in such lengths and installed in such a manner as to
           minimize the number of fusion joints required.
     L.    All lateral piping shall be installed at a minimum depth of four feet below final grade.
           Lateral piping supply and return lines or bundles shall be separated to minimize thermal
           interference between the two. The number of points where supply and return lines
           cross one another shall be minimized.
     M.    After connections to the vertical GLHE, each lateral shall be hydrostatically pressure
           tested. Testing shall be by water pressure at 100 psi for a minimum of 30 minutes.
           Exercise suitable safety precautions during testing to guard against injury to personnel
           near lines being tested in case of pipe system component or joint failure under pressure.
           Results of all tests shall be recorded and supplied to the engineer upon completion of
           the project or as required by the engineer.
     N.    Clean fill, free of large or sharp rocks or debris, shall be used to cover all lateral pipes.
           [If necessary, lateral trenches are to be compacted every 8" during backfilling. Refer to
           ASTM D-2321 for backfill procedures.
     O.    Open ends of all lateral pipe shall be sealed to prevent the entry of contaminants until
           final connections are made.
     P.    Flow center cabinet shall be galvanized steel with a polyester powder coat finish.
     Q.    Flow center valves shall be forged brass with 1” FPT 3-way valve used for loop flushing
           and maintenance.
     R.    Flow center shall be capable of delivering 21 GPM of flow @ 20’ of head and operate on
           1PH 230V power supplied by geothermal unit. Flow center to operate at a maximum of
           3.5 AMPS. Flow center must operate at a minimum entering fluid temperature of 20° F
           and a maximum entering fluid temperature of 130°F. Flow center must be capable of
           operating at a minimum operating pressure 5 PSI and a maximum of 145 PSI.
                                                                   SARANAC REST AREA
                                                      HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

HEATING SYSTEM (continued)




2.04   Plumbing System for Radiant Floor Heating

       The Radiant Floor Heating System shall also include, but not limited to, all necessary
       plumping required for the operation of the system. Some of these items include pipe,
       hangers, thermometers, diaphragm compression tank, drain valves, ball valves, flow switch,
       pressure reducing valve, precharged diaphragm type water tank, pressure gauge, high
       temperature aquastat switches, low water cutoff switch, circulating pumps, air purge, air
       relief valve, drains, elbows, tees, check valves, and any necessary valves required for a
       complete operating system. The contractor shall supply and install 80 gallon buffer tank and
       connect to geothermal unit as described in drawings. The buffer tank shall be 24” in
       diameter and 64” in height. Buffer tank shall be insulated to minimum of R-16 and have a
       4500 Watt electrical element for back-up purpose. See tank diagram for piping details.

       Pipe Insulation: Cover all heating system water piping (above the floor) with 3/8" thick
       vinyl covered polyethylene insulation, or approved equal. Cover all water supply valves and
       fittings with insulating cement. Finish with a white vapor barrier cement and cover with a
       pre-molded vinyl covered polyethylene jacket or approved equal.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A. The radiant tubing shall be installed 12" on center.

       B. Install all radiant tubing in a continuous uncut length with no splices.

       C. No concrete flooring or sidewalk shall be poured until the manufacturers representative
          and project engineer have given approval of the system.

       D. Coordinate the radiant tubing layout and installation with the floor mounted hardware
          (metal ladder, mechanical and electrical equipment hardware, toilet carriers, sanitary
          waste and vent piping etc.)

       E. The radiant tubing shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers
          recommendation and details and as specified.

       F. The radiant tubing system shall be charged with propylene Glycol or air to a pressure of
          60 psig for a period of 24 hours prior to encasement in the concrete. Any loss in
          pressure shall be corrected or replaced and retested.

       G. At the start up of the radiant system, the contractor will follow the manufacturer's
          recommendations for system propylene glycol and temperature balancing and shall
          deliver to the owner six (6) sets of complete records of these settings.
                                                                    SARANAC REST AREA
                                                       HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

HEATING SYSTEM (continued)


     H. Install manufacturers recommended lubricant to the glycol solution.

     I.   The vertical holes of bores shall be clean (no permanent casing) and of sufficient
          diameter to facilitate the installation of the U-tube assembly. The bores shall be
          backfilled with appropriate grout material to assure pipe contact, and the grout material
          shall not contain large, sharp, or jagged rocks or debris. Reasonable and prudent care
          shall be taken during installation and grouting in order not to crush, cut or kink the pipe.

     J    After each well is completed, a copy of the MDEQ Water Well and Pump Record shall
          be submitted to the Project Engineer.              Record shall include the GPS
          (Latitude/Longitude) coordinates for each well. A detailed drawing shall also be
          submitted referencing the well field, individual well locations and piping trenches with
          known fixed site points.

     K. The horizontal and lateral ditches for the GLHE piping may be dug with a trenching
        machine and/or backhoe. Coordinate the laying of the header piping with existing
        utilities or new mechanical and electrical utilities. The piping shall be buried a minimum
        of 48" deep. Clean out all debris from the trench before placing piping. After the piping
        is installed, tested, purged, inspected and approved, clean fill, free of large or sharp
        rocks or debris, shall be used to cover all lateral pipe.

     L. Before backfilling the trenches, all systems shall be flushed and purged of air and flow
        tested to ensure all portions of the heat exchanger are properly flowing. A portable
        temporary purging unit shall be utilized and shall consist of the following: purge pump -
        high volume and high head, open reservoir, filter assembly with by-pass, connecting
        piping and connection hoses. Using the purging unit described above, flush and purge
        each GLHE system until free of air, dirt particles and debris. A velocity of 2 ft/sec. is
        required in all pipe sections to remove the air. This flushing and purging operation shall
        be conducted with the water source heat pump piping isolated with shut off valves. After
        the GLHE is completely flushed of air and debris, open the isolation valves and permit
        circulation through the heat pump portion of the system until the entire system is flushed
        and purged. The isolation valves at each of the heat pump units are to be closed during
        this activity, or the hoses to each heat pump unit joined together to form a loop. Do not
        flush and purge through the heat pump unit.
                                                                  SARANAC REST AREA
                                                     HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

HEATING SYSTEM (continued)

The following drawings below are basic conceptual drawings that are to be
followed. Loopfield layout requirements are to be verified by project engineer.
                                                                  SARANAC REST AREA
                                                     HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

HEATING SYSTEM (continued)




Reverse return piping is required to optimize system flow efficiency and ensure equal flow is
maintained through all branch runs.
                                                                  SARANAC REST AREA
                                                     HEATING & VENTILATING - DIVISION 14

HEATING SYSTEM (continued)

Typical header layout for various sizes of loop fields. Follow diagram that matches loopfield
design.
                                                                SARANAC REST AREA
                                                             MECHANICAL - DIVISION 15
04-22-11

Scope of Work: Furnish all material, labor and equipment required to complete the work
as shown on the drawings and specified herein. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
satisfactory completion of all work, including all miscellaneous materials, and
appurtenances as required as well as coordination with other subcontractors to meet all
applicable construction codes. The drawings show the general arrangement, design and
extent of the work and are diagrammatic. They shall not be scaled for roughing-in measure-
ments.

Hydro-pneumatic Tanks: A hydro-pneumatic tank compatible with the Variable
Frequency Drive (VFD) pump controller system is to be installed. The tank shall be a
pre-pressurized diaphragm type steel tank as manufactured by AMTROL INC., Well-X-Trol
or a seamless, fiberglass reinforced tank as manufactured by STRUCTURAL FIBERS, Well
Mate Model or approved equal.

The steel tank shall consist of a pre-pressurized steel tank with a diaphragm permanently
sealed to the tank walls preventing contact of water with air in the tank. The diaphragm
shall be made of a material that imparts no odor or taste to the water. The portion of the
tank in contact with water shall be epoxy lined.

The fiberglass tank shall consist of a seamless fiberglass reinforced plastic inner shell, and
a polyetherurethane aircell bag. All construction materials shall be NSF and/or FDA
approved as applicable.

Each tank shall have a minimum volume as recommended by the VFD controller
manufacturer for use with a well pump operating at 65 gpm and be capable of supplying a
system operating pressure of 50 psi, or as approved by the Engineer.

A pressure relief valve, pressure control switch and pressure gauge (range 0# to 150#)
shall be installed inside the building on the supply line from the pump to the hydro-
pneumatic tank. (See plans for details.)

Variable Frequency Drive Controller: The VFD controller shall be configured to operate
a 3-phase well pump utilizing a single phase power source, or as approved by the
Engineer. See the Submersible Pump Special Provision for more details.

Foundations, Anchor Bolts and Supports: Grout under equipment bases so that
equipment will be level and have a uniform bearing throughout.

Furnish and install inserts, rods, steel frames, brackets and platforms required for
equipment suspended from ceilings or walls.

Sewer Lines: Sewer lines below and above grade (within the building limits) shall be PVC
                                                               SARANAC REST AREA
                                                            MECHANICAL - DIVISION 15
04-22-11

plastic pipe and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM 2665, Schedule 40. Sewer
lead lines to the sanitary disposal system shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
D3034, shall have an SDR26 (standard dimension ratio of 26) and shall extend 10 feet from
building.

Cleanouts: Cleanouts, plugs, caps and ferrules shall conform to the requirements of the
Michigan State Plumbing Code. Each urinal and water closet shall be provided with its own
cleanout.

Hot and Cold Water Piping: No piping shall be run exposed, other than in the Storage
and Utility Rooms and except where shown on the plans or as approved by the Engineer.

Cut all piping to measurements established at the project and work into place without
springing or forcing.

Support all piping to provide a rigid support and avoid undue strain or sagging. Hanger
spacing shall be in accordance with the Michigan State Plumbing Code, Section 308.

Copper (type M) piping shall be used for all water lines, and shall conform to ASTM B75,
B88, B251, and ASTM B447 as applicable.

Water supply lines for the extended water outlets shall be run from the building below grade
and extend 10 feet from the building. Supply lines shall be Polyethylene (PE)
Pressure-rated pipe in the sizes called for on the plans and shall be in accordance with
ASTM D-2239, PE 3408. The pipe shall have an SDR11 (Standard Dimension Ratio of 11).
Tracer wire shall be installed along the pipe. See the Extended Water Outlets Special
Provision for more details.

Thermostatic Mixing Valves: A thermostatic mixing valve shall be installed on the water
supply to each lavatory faucet. The valve shall be ASSE Standard 1016 listed and shall
control the temperature of the hot/cold water mixture to within 3 degrees Fahrenheit of the
desired temperature. The valve shall have 1/2-inch female NPT inlet and outlet
connections. The valve shall be of a single replaceable cartridge design to allow service or
repair of the valve without removal of the valve from the system piping or disassembly of
internal valve components.

Valves, Joints and Fittings: Valves, where possible, shall be from one manufacturer. In
general, gate valves of line size shall be used unless otherwise indicated. Globe valves
shall be used for throttling or frequent shut-off applications. Valves shall be Crane,
Walworth, Fairbanks, Nibco, Lunkenheimer or approved equal.

Place shut-off valves at each fixture, piece of equipment, and also at main branches of the
piping system when shown on the plans. Place air snifter valves where shown on the plans.
                                                                SARANAC REST AREA
                                                             MECHANICAL - DIVISION 15
04-22-11


Unions in piping 2-inch and smaller shall be an approved 125 lb union. Unions shall be
installed ahead of all apparatus and equipment and wherever else called for on the plans or
as required by the building plumbing code.

All exposed metal work in toilet rooms and lobby such as fittings, trim, faucets, escutcheons
and piping on and around fixtures shall be chrome plated brass.

Water Heater: An indirect-fired water heater with tank-in-tank design compatible with the
geothermal heat system shall be provided, complete with T&P relief valve. It shall have a
minimum 40 gallon storage capacity, a minimum R-Factor of 16, a minimum temperature
range of 110°-170° Fahrenheit, a minimum First Hour flow rate of 200 gallons at 115° F,
and a minimum Thermal Efficiency of 80%. The heater shall meet or exceed the
requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90. The water heater shall be Weil-McLain, A.O. Smith,
Bradford White, or approved equal and have a minimum ten year warranty.

Water Meter: The Contractor shall furnish and install a 2-inch water meter meeting the
requirements of AWWA Specification C-700. It shall have flange end mounting and shall
be a straight reading register recording in US Gallons. The register face shall be of center
sweep test hand-type with an index circle located near the periphery and graduated into
100 equal parts, each tenth numbered.

Service Sinks: Service sink in the Janitors Room shall be one-piece, molded high density
plastic, 24" x 24" x 10", supplied with integral strainer and trap. Service sink in the
Vendors Closet be American Standard Lakewell Model 7692.000 or Kohler Model K-6652,
22” x 20”x 12”, or approved equal, supplied with 3-inch diameter cast iron “P” trap standard
with cleanout plug and stainless steel strainer. Service sink faucets shall be American
Standard Catalog No. 8344.112 with hose end, wall brace and vacuum breaker. Similar
items by Zurn, Kohler or approved equal may be acceptable

Thermometer: Furnish and install on hot water supply (just downstream of the water
heater), a Bi-Metal Dial Thermometer with 3" dial face having a temperature range of
20oF. to 240oF.

Vent & Venting: All vent pipes and branch vents shall be graded and connected so as to
drain back to the soil or waste pipe by gravity. Vent stacks above the ceiling joints and
under the roof may be Schedule 40 PVC and shall meet ASTM 2665. They shall be
secured to the rafters with perforated galvanized strap iron, as may be required.

Air admittance valves may be used below the lavatory banks in each restroom to conserve
space. Air admittance valves shall be sized and installed in accordance with the Michigan
State Plumbing Code, Section 918.3.
                                                                 SARANAC REST AREA
                                                              MECHANICAL - DIVISION 15
04-22-11

Water Closets and Flush Valves: The ADA accessible water closet (one required) for the
Family restroom shall be American-Standard Madera #3043.102, Kohler K-4368, or
approved equal with top spud, floor outlet and elongated bowl; complete with 1.6 gal/flush
Sloan Royal #111 flushometer. The flushometer shall have a solid ring pipe support. All
non-ADA accessible water closets (10 required) shall be Kohler Wellcomme Model K-4349,
American-Standard Madera #3453.160, or approved equal. Non-ADA accessible water
closets shall be floor mount, siphon jet, with elongated rim, angle flange, 1 ½-inch rear
spud, floor outlet, and 14 ¾ -inch bowl height punched with seat post holes. The eight (8)
water closets in the accessible stalls (two in each the men’s and women’s restrooms) shall
be Kohler Highcliff Model K-4367, American-Standard Madera #3463.160, or approved
equal. ADA accessible water closets shall be floor mount, siphon jet, with elongated rim,
angle flange, 1 ½-inch rear spud floor outlet, and 17 ½ -inch bowl height punched with seat
post holes. These accessible water closets shall be furnished with1.6 gal/flush Sloan Royal
#940-1.6MBFW hydraulic flushometers (with Metal Button Fixture Wall actuator, Sloan
#HY-100-A). The ten (10) non-accessible water closets shall be furnished with 1.6 gal/flush
Sloan Royal #152-1.6L-3 flushometers (with 3-inch palm flush button). All fixtures shall be
first quality, free from chips, flaws, discoloration or warped surfaces and without craze or
other defects. Similar water closets by Kohler, American Standard or approved equal may
be acceptable. Similar valves by Delany, Zurn or approved equal may be acceptable.

Water closet seats shall be elongated, open front, heavy weight plastic and no cover as
manufactured by Olsonite, Centoco or approved equal.

Urinals: Urinals shall be Sloan Waterfree Urinal Model WES-1000 or Falcon Waterfree
Technologies Model F-1000, or approved equal, meeting ANSI/ASME A112.19.2M-1998,
A117.1 (Section 605.2) and ANSI A124.9 Standards. Urinals shall be wall mount, wall
outlet, vitreous china complete with wall brackets and sealed, locking cartridge type waste
filter rated for a minimum of 7000 uses. All fixtures shall be first quality, free from chips,
flaws, discoloration or warped surfaces and without craze or other defects. Apply silicone
caulk around the entire perimeter of each urinal.

Pressure Vacuum Breakers: Vacuum breakers shall be Febco 765 2-inch and shall be
installed a minimum of 1'-0" above the highest extended water outlet elevation. Similar
items by Toro, Century Rain Aid or approved equal may be acceptable.

Drinking Fountains: The drinking fountains shall be wall mounted, barrier free, drinking
fountains with chillers. Cabinet finish shall be brushed stainless steel; top and bubbler shall
be stainless steel. Fountains shall have push pad activation on the front and each side.
Drinking fountains shall be Oasis Model P8AC, Halsey Taylor Model HAC8FS-Q, or
approved equal.


Family Restroom Lavatory: The lavatory in the Family restroom shall be a wall mounted,
                                                               SARANAC REST AREA
                                                            MECHANICAL - DIVISION 15
04-22-11

ADA compliant American Standard Comrade Model 0124.024, Kohler Chesapeake K-1729-
ZY with K-13885 offset drain or approved equal. The lavatory shall be provided with a
protective enclosure for the plumbing, Truebro Lav-Shield Model #2018 or approved equal.

Lavatory Valves: Lavatory valves for tempered water shall be battery operated chrome
touchless metering Faucet (0.5gpm) with escutcheon and vandal resistant aerator.
Faucets shall be Technical Concepts Milano, Kohler, Delany or approved equal.

Floor Drains: All floor drains shall be Wade W-1103-G series furnished with seepage
flange and 6"x 6" square nickel brass top with vandal-proof screws. Floor Drains shall have
a N.P.T. inlet to allow the ½-inch trap primer supply line to be connected. Similar items by
Watts, Zurn, J.R. Smith or approved equal may be acceptable.

Trap Primer Valves: Trap primer valves shall be Wade 2400 (with integral vacuum
breaker). Trap primer valves shall conform to ASSE 1018. If distribution units are used,
they shall have ½-inch outlets. Similar items by MIFAB, Sioux Chief or approved equal
may be acceptable. Primer lines need not be insulated below the floor.

Shock Absorbers: Shock absorbers, if not sized, shall be as rated by the current Plumbing
and Drainage Institute Standards. Air chambers will not be allowed. Shock absorbers shall
be Wade, J.R Smith, Zurn or approved equal.

Access panels need not be provided for the shock absorbers in the urinal walls.

Hose Bibbs: Two (2) anti-siphon freezeless wall hydrants shall be provided as shown on
the plans. Wall hydrant shall be Woodford Model 65 or approved equal.

Contractor shall provide a ½-inch tee and stub feed line as shown on the plans for future
installation of jug filler assembly. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Location to be
coordinated with MDOT Statewide Maintenance. Contact Mike Green at (517) 243-1273 or
Brian Martin at (517) 322-5436.

Well Blow-Off Assembly: A single flush wall hydrant shall be provided on the exterior wall
of the Utility Room to provide a through-the-wall blow off assembly for the well line. Pipe
and valves for the blow-off shall be as detailed on the plans. The line shall have a 2 ½ -
inch NST threaded nozzle with cap and chain and exterior wall plate. The wall hydrant
connection shall be Elkhart Model 152, Model 162, Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.Model
6514, or approved equal.

Eye Wash Station Supply: A cold water line shall be plumbed near the service sink in the
janitor room with a shutoff valve for a future eye wash station. The eye wash station is not
included in this work.
                                                                  SARANAC REST AREA
                                                               MECHANICAL - DIVISION 15
04-22-11

Pipe Insulation: All water supply piping (above the floor) shall be covered with 3/8-inch
thick vinyl covered polyethylene insulation, or approved equal. Hot water lines and drinking
fountain lines shall be insulated above and below the floor. Cover all water supply valves
and fittings with insulating cement. Finish with a white vapor barrier cement and cover with
a pre-molded vinyl covered polyethylene jacket or approved equal.

Chlorination: All cold and hot water piping, including any new water service, shall be
chlorinated for a period of at least four (4) hours with all outlets bled out to assure complete
coverage of chlorine. The system shall be thoroughly flushed after chlorination. The
Plumbing Official for the area shall be notified that the system is ready to test. The test shall
be performed in the presence of the State Plumbing Official for the area.

Testing: All joints shall be tested with liquid soap to show any leakage.

Operating Test: Contractor shall operate all systems with all controls functioning for a
period of at least five (5) days and shall instruct the Engineer on operation and
maintenance of the various systems.

Adjusting: Adjust automatic controls and safety devices for correct operation of valves
and other accessories or equipment. Adjust pumps and other equipment to operate quietly
without vibration and with correct response to control devices.

Operating Instructions: Provide operating instructions, repair parts lists, equipment
manuals, equipment guarantees and automatic control diagrams.

Identification: Install colored bands on all pipe lines in accordance with an approved
identification system. Indicate the service and direction of flow and any other information
as may be directed by the Engineer. Suitably identify all valves and equipment with an
easily read stencil or a brass or stainless steel tag securely attached to the valve or
equipment to indicate its function.

Pipe Sleeves: Pipe Sleeves shall be PVC Schedule 40 pipe with 45 degree elbows and
cleanout covers installed into the floor. Pipe sleeves are to be installed for future use.

Final Inspection: Upon completion of the work, conduct an inspection of all items of work,
as called for by the Contract and make whatever corrections and adjustments deemed
necessary for a well functioning system to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
                                                                           SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                      ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Scope of Work

       Furnish all material, equipment and labor required to complete the work relating to the
       Electrical installation, as shown on the plans and specified herein. Contractor shall be
       responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work, including all miscellaneous materials,
       appurtenances, etc., as may be required.

1.02   Plans

       The plans are intended to show the general arrangement, design and extent of the work and
       are diagrammatic. They shall not be scaled for installation measurements.

1.03   Related Work Specified Elsewhere

       16111   Conduit
       16120   Wire and Cables
       16121   Wire Connections and Devices
       16134   Outlet Boxes
       16141   Wall Switches
       16145   Receptacles
       16147   Cover Plates
       16155   Motor Starters
       16160   Panelboards
       16170   Motor and Circuit Disconnects
       16420   Service Entrance
       16450   Grounding
       16501   Lamps
       16502   Ballasts and Accessories
       16510   Interior Building Lighting
       16741   Telephone & Raceway Systems
       16913   Mechanical Equipment Controls
       16930   Lighting Control Equipment
       16945   Control Switches

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Materials

       All material and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified, and all work, material
       and equipment shall meet the standards and practices of the local utility, the National
       Electric Code and the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services.


                                                                              C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                           SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                      ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Wiring Locations and Connections to Equipment

       The Contractor shall locate panels, feeders, starters, control equipment cabinets, lighting
       fixtures, convenience outlets, switches, etc., as shown on the plans, or as directed by the
       Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish and install all line switches, all starters and push
       button stations that are not an integral part of the equipment.

3.02   Grounding System

       All metal non-current carrying parts of electrical equipment shall be grounded to meet NEC
       requirements and local and state codes.

3.03   Testing of Circuits

       The Contractor shall test all circuits and make final tests in the presence of the Engineer
       when all the work is complete. The electrical installation shall be entirely free from grounds,
       opens, short circuits and function as designed. Any faulty conditions revealed in the course
       of inspection and testing shall be corrected by the Contractor before the system is accepted.

3.04   Identification

       A.     Equip each panelboard with a typewritten directory accurately indicating rooms
              and/or equipment being serviced. Use identification compatible with plans. All
              designations shall be readily identifiable without removing directory from its holder.

       B.     Identify panelboards, starters, disconnects and switches with 1" block letters,
              stenciled on outside of cover of surface panels. Panelboards shall be identified with
              panel name, voltage, phase, and feeder conductor size.

       C.     1/8" 5-ply Lamacoid Name Plates, with 1/4" white letters, may be used in lieu of
              stenciling. (Engraved or embossed nameplates or embossed plastic tape may be
              used where there is not enough space for stenciling.)




                                                                              C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                          SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                      ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       A.     Conduit and Couplings
       B.     Flexible Conduit
       C.     Non-Metallic Ducts

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Materials and Components

       A.     Conduit
              1)    Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall meet the requirements of Supplemental
                    Specification 8.25(4b) and be so identified.

              2)      Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall meet the latest revision of USASI
                      Standard for EMT zinc coated #C80.3.

              3)      Flexible metal conduit with liquid-tight connectors shall meet the requirement
                      of Standard Specification 8.25.01 C. Minimum size - 3/4".

              4)      Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit:
                      Rigid PVC, schedule 40, 90o C, UL rated.

       B.     Couplings and Connectors:
                     All steel, galvanized. Threaded for rigid galvanized steel conduit; set screw,
                     non-insulated, type for EMT; liquid-tight connectors for flexible metal conduit.

       C.     Bushings:
                    Impact resistant plastic, 105o C temperature rated. Grounding type shall be
                    insulated steel with proper ground lug.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Utilize galvanized rigid steel conduit for the following:

              1)      In concrete or below concrete floor slabs.

              2)      2" sizes or larger, except where rigid PVC is specified.

              3)      Subject to mechanical injury.

                                                                             C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                        SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                   ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT

           4)      For supporting lighting fixtures.

           5)      In the sizes as indicated on the plans.

           6)      Below grade.

     B.    Utilized electrical metallic tubing in other locations. Electrical metallic tubing may be
           used in suspended ceilings and in other dry, non-hazardous locations. The size of
           the tubing shall be as indicated on the plans or as required by the National Electrical
           Code.

     C.    Utilize flexible metallic conduit for motors, lighting fixtures and control equipment.
           Provide sufficient length of flexible conduit to avoid transmission of vibration.
           Flexible metallic conduit may be used where rigid conduit is impractical. Lengths
           shall not exceed 6 feet. Provide a grounding conductor bonded to the conduit at
           both ends. Connectors shall be approved for use with liquid tight flexible metal
           conduit.

     D.    Install conduit concealed in all areas excluding utility and janitor rooms and
           connections to motors.

     E.    Attach exposed runs of surface mounted conduit with clamps approved for the
           purpose. Do not support from mechanical piping or ductwork.

     F.    Clean out conduit before installation of conductors.

     G.    Route all conduits parallel, or perpendicular, to building lines.

     H.    Joints shall be made tight with standard couplings and corners turned with fittings,
           elbows or long radius bends.

     I.    The ends of all conduits or elbows shall be cut square and reamed.

     J.    All ends of conduits shall be provided with a bushing except at couplings or
           threaded type hub outlets.

     K.    Conduits where entering outlet or junction boxes, cabinets or any piece of electrical
           equipment, except those having threaded hubs, shall be fitted with locknuts inside
           and out and bushings. Lock-nuts shall be galvanized, with clean machine-cut
           threads and shall have notches for driving and positive gripping teeth under each
           lug.

     L.    Conduits shall be supported every five feet minimum.

                                                                            C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                         SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                    ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLES
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       Wires and Cables

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Materials

       A.     Building Wiring

              Conductors for general lighting, heating and power, including well and well pumps,
              shall consist of copper wire having 600 volt insulation suitable for operation at 75oC
              temperature in wet or dry locations.

       B.     Conductors shall be color coded, marked in accordance with NEC, and bear
              Underwriter's Laboratories label.

       C.     Conductors for direct burial in the earth shall be of a type designed and approved for
              such use.

       D.     No. 8 Conductors and larger shall be stranded.

       E.     Branch Circuit Conductors shall not be smaller than #12. In no case shall the size
              be smaller that required for a maximum voltage drop of 3 percent from panel to
              extreme outlet.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Provide copper grounding conductors and straps.
       B.     Install wire in conduit runs after concrete and masonry work is complete and after
              moisture is swabbed from conduits.
       C.     Splice only in accessible junction or outlet boxes.
       D.     All wiring in the building shall be in concealed metal raceways, except that raceways
              may be exposed in utility room and janitor room.
       E.     Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
       F.     Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.
       G.     Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
       H.     Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
       I.     Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.


                                                                             C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                       SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                   ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16121 - WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       Terminations, splices and taps.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Materials

       A.     Manufacturer and type: Thomas & Betts Corp., types as follows:
              1.    Compression terminals, color-keyed, Series 50,000
              2.    Tap connectors, color-keyed, Series 63,000
              3.    Wire connector, screw on spring action, Type PT

       B.     Other acceptable manufacturers:
              1.     Burndy
              2.     Ilsco Corporation
              3.     AMP
              4.     Ideal
              5.     3M

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Use screw on wire connector for copper conductor sizes No.-10 gauge and smaller.
               Use tool applied compression or split bolt type for conductors larger than #10 and
              protect splices with suitable electrical tape.
       B.     Size all connectors to match cable size.
       C.     Use tools recommended by vendor for applying pressure connectors.
       D.     Suitable terminal lugs that are factory installed on equipment may be used for
              terminating cables.
       E.     Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
       F.     Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no
              perceptible temperature rise.
       G.     Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger.
              Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of
              the insulation rating of conductor.
       H.     Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor
              splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
       I.     Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices
              and taps, 10 AWG


                                                                          C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                        SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                   ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16134 - OUTLET BOXES
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       Outlet boxes.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Materials

       A.     Interior Boxes: Hot dip galvanized, 1.25 oz. per sq. ft. (381 g/square meter) or
              cadmium plated, conform to UL requirements, pressed sheet steel, code gauge,
              single or multi-gang as required, blanked for conduit. Provide attached lugs for
              mounting.
       B.     Exterior Boxes: Rigid PVC "FS" type, UL rated for 90oC conductors.
       C.     For lighting: 4 in. octagon shape.
       D.     Junction boxes shall have steel covers to match boxes.
       E.     Acceptable manufacturers:
              1.      National Electric Products
              2.      General Electric Company
              3.      Appleton
              4.      Crouse-Hinds
              5.      Steel City

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Convenience outlet boxes shall be located with the long dimension vertical
              approximately 4'-0" above the finished floor unless noted otherwise on the plans.
              Exact locations shall be checked with the engineer before installation to avoid
              conflicts with plumbing, heating or other equipment.

       B.     Switch outlets shall be located approximately 4'-0" to centerline above the finished
              floor unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

       C.     Outlet boxes in masonry walls shall be set with bottom of box on course line
              wherever possible and shall be concealed in wall construction.

       D.     Outlet boxes shall meet the latest N.E.C. requirements for volume based on the
              number and size of wires and devices in the box. There shall be sufficient room for
              insulating joints, wire and bushings. For outdoor use, exterior boxes shall be used.

       E.     All unused knock-outs shall be left sealed.

                                                                           C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                          SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                     ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16134 - OUTLET BOXES

       F.    Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire
             pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.

       G.    Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished
             areas only.

       H.    Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches
             from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.

       I.    Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
             materials and methods under the Provisions of Architectural Sections.

       J.    Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar
             devices with each other.

       K.    Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas.

       L.    Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inch
             separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.

       M.    Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to
             allow for surface finish thickness.

       N.    Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

       O.    Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its
             effectiveness.

       P.    Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

3.02   Interface With Other Products

       A.    Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for products furnished under other sections.

       B.    Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters,
             benches and backsplashes.


3.03   Adjusting

       A.    Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

       B.    Install knockout closure in unused box opening.

                                                                             C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                       SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                   ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16145 - SWITCHES
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       Wall switches.

1.02   Requirements of Regulatory Agencies

       Provide UL approved devices.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Acceptable Manufacturers

       A.     Manufacturer and Type: 1221-I Series type manufactured by Hubbell, except where
              otherwise noted.
       B.     The following manufacturers may submit alternate quotations:
              1.      Arrow Hart, Inc.
              2.      General Electric Co.
              3.      Leviton
              4.      Pass & Seymour, Inc.
              5.      Bryant

2.02   Materials

       A.     120 Volt Switches: AC quiet type, toggle handle, with totally enclosed case, rated
              20 ampere, specification grade. Provide matching two pole, 3-way, and 4-way
              switches where required.
       B.     Switch with Pilot Light: Toggle handle type, with long-life neon pilot light below,
              rated at 20 ampere, 120 volts, Leviton #5336-I.
       C.     Color: Provide switches with ivory handles.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Mount switches 48 in. above floor to bottom, approximately 6" from door opening.
       B.     Coordinate switch mounting location with architectural details and elevations.
       C.     Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
       D.     Clean debris from outlet boxes.
       E.     Install switches with OFF position down.
       F.     Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.
       G.     Inspect each wiring device for defects.
       H.     Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.

                                                                          C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                          SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                     ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16145 - RECEPTACLES
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       Receptacles

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Acceptable Manufacturers

       A.     Manufacturer: Hubbell, except where otherwise noted.

       B.     The following manufacturers may submit alternate quotations:

              1.      Arrow Hart, Inc.
              2.      General Electric Co.
              3.      Leviton
              4.      Pass & Seymour, Inc.
              5.      Bryant

2.02   Materials

       A.     Standard Duplex Receptacles: 2-pole, 3-wire, full gang size, polarized, duplex,
              parallel blade, U-grounding slot, high abuse, specification grade, U.L. listed rated at
              20 amperes, 125 volts, designed for side or pressure plate back wiring.

       B.     Ground Fault Interrupter Outlet: Polarized duplex, parallel blade, U-grounding slot,
              high abuse, specification grade, U.L. listed rated 20 amperes, 125 volts, with ground
              fault protective circuitry, operable from -30o F to +150o F, test push button, reset
              push button, designed for 20 ampere feed through service.

       C.     Color: Receptacles ivory bakelite composition.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Mount receptacles vertical at 48 in. above finished floor, (unless otherwise noted).
              Install receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter.

       B.     Coordinate receptacle height with counters, display cases, electrical panels, etc.




                                                                             C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                        SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                   ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16145 - RECEPTACLES
     C.    Provide G.F.I. outlet at each location shown on the plans. Do not use one G.F.I.
           outlet to protect downstream outlets. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper
           operation.

       D.     Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.

       E.     Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

       F.     Clean debris from outlet boxes.

       G.     Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.

       H.     Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished
              areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.

       I.     Verify that each receptacle device is energized.

       J.     Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.




                                                                           C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                        SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                    ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16147 - COVER PLATES
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       Cover Plates

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Acceptable Manufacturers

       Acceptable products:

              A.      Hubbell
              B.      Arrow Hart, Inc.
              C.      General Electric Co.
              D.      Leviton
              E.      Pass & Seymour, Inc.
              F.      Bryant

2.02   Materials

       A.     Flush Mounting Plates: All wall switches and convenience outlets shall be stainless
              steel. Stainless steel covers shall be Type 302 or 304, No. 4 finish, 0.040 in. (1mm)
              thick, accurately die cut, protected with release paper.

       B.     Surface Mounted Box Plates: Bevelled, steel, formed for smooth edge to fit box.

       C.     Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Install cover plates on wiring devices.

       B.     Flush plates shall be mounted so all four edges are in continuous contact with
              finished wall.




                                                                            C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                            SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                       ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16155 - MOTOR STARTERS
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       Motor starters for electric motor driven equipment as indicated on the plans and magnetic
       motor starters for both well pumps.

1.02   Requirements of Regulatory Agencies

       Provide motor starters of the appropriate NEMA size for motor served. For units not using
       NAME rating use equivalent NEMA size.

1.03   Submittal

       Submit product data sheets indicating physical and electrical characteristics.


Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Acceptable Manufacturers

       A.     Manufacturer and Type: Square D Company Classes 2510, 8536, 8538, and 8539,
              NEMA Type 1 for indoor locations and NEMA Type 3R for exterior locations.

       B.      Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

              1.      Siemens ITE
              2.      Allen Bradley
              3.      Cutler Hammer
              4.      General Electric Co.
              5.      Westinghouse Electric Corporation

2.02   Manual Motor Starters

       Fractional Horsepower Manual Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A
       manually operated, 1 pole, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors,
       with thermal overload unit, red pilot light, lock-off facility, and toggle operator. Provide one
       pole for 120 volt motors, 2 pole for 240 volt single phase motors.

2.03   Magnetic Motor Starters

       A.     Magnetic Motor Starters: AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for
              induction motors rated in horsepower.
       B.     Full Voltage Starting: Non-reversing type.

                                                                               C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                          SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                     ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16155 - MOTOR STARTERS
     C.    Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.
     D.    Size: Provide size as shown on Drawings or as required by the National Electrical
           Code and the full load current rating of the motor.
     E.    Overload Relay: Provide starters with two melting alloy overload relays.
     F.    Enclosure: Provide NEMA Type 1 for indoor locations and NEMA Type 3R for
           exterior locations.
     G.    Combination Motor Starters: Combine motor starters with non-fusible switch
           disconnect in common enclosure.
     H.    Auxiliary Contacts: Provide two field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in
           contact.
     I.    Indicating Lights: Provide Pilot light in cover, red transformer type.
     J.    Selector Switches: Provide reset button, and Hand-Off-Automatic switch in cover,
           field convertible to Off/Auto or Start/Stop push button, unless other devices are
           indicated on the drawings. Verify control switch requirements from plans.
     K.    Control Power Transformers: Provide fused control transformer with 120 volt output
           of sufficient capacity, 100 VA minimum, to handle operating coil and associated
           controls. Transformer shall have both primary and secondary fusing.

2.04   Controller Overcurrent Protection and Disconnecting Means

       A.     Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: Provide quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter
              enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent
              opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.

       B.     Fusible Switch Assemblies: Provide quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter
              enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent
              opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
              Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate Class RK5 fuses.

       Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     In finished areas, mount motor starters flush and install suitable cover plates.
       B.     Install heaters, motor circuit protectors, and fuses that are correlated with full load
              nameplate current of motors provided.
       C.     Set overload devices to suit motors provided.
       D.     Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure door identifying motor
              served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and
              voltage/phase rating.




                                                                             C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                        SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                    ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16160 - PANELBOARDS
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       Circuit breaker panelboards.

1.02   Requirements of Regulatory Agencies

       Construct panelboards to NEMA and UL standards and provide UL labels.

1.03   Submittal

       Submit product data sheets indicating physical and electrical characteristics.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Acceptable Manufacturers

       A.     Westinghouse type PRL-1

       B.     Siemens Sentron type S1

       C.     Square D type NQOD

2.02   Construction

       A.     Lighting panels shall be circuit breaker panel boards and shall be labeled suitable
              for use as service equipment. The panel boards shall be of the sizes as shown on
              the plans and with circuits as indicated. Cabinet for any panel having more than 29
              pole spaces shall be at least 6" deep and 20" wide.

       B.     Single Phase panels shall be 120/240 volts AC, 3 wire, solid neutral design with
              sequence style bussing, full capacity neutral, copper equipment grounding bar and
              main breaker.

       C.     The box shall be of painted or galvanized sheet steel of code gauge in accordance
              with the requirements of NEC. Hinged doors shall be furnished with flush type
              catches.
       D.     The interior of the box shall be furnished with circuit breakers of the bolt-on type
              using single-pole or common trip, multi-pole, as indicated. Circuit breakers shall be
              Westinghouse Type AB De-ion, Square D QOB, Siemens BL, or an approved equal,
              with thermal-magnetic trip. Breaker handle positions shall indicate "on" and "off"
              conditions. One pole breakers rated 15 and 20 amps shall be U.L. listed as "SWD"
              rated.

                                                                            C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                         SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                    ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16160 - PANELBOARDS

       E.     Branch circuits shall be arranged on the panel buses so as to obtain an approximate
              load balance. Main breakers shall be provided and sized as shown on the plans.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Provide mounting brackets, buss bar, breaker stabs, and filler pieces for unused
              spaces.

       B.     Prepare and affix typewritten directory to inside cover of panelboard indicating loads
              controlled by each circuit. Locate in metal framed directory. Revise directory to
              reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.

       C.     Mount on, or in, walls with top of box as shown on the plans or at 72" above floor.
              Install panelboards taller than 6 ft with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor.

       D.     Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in
              the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other.
              Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

       E.     Using permanent marker, write on the inside of the door of each branch panelboard
              the following information:

                      -Panel from which the branch panel is fed.
                      -Number of poles and circuit breaker size.
                      -Feeder conductor and conduit size.

              Sample: "MDP2, 3P200/F200A, 4#3/0, 2" C".

       F.     Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment,
              anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections
              for circuit breakers.




                                                                             C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                        SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                    ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16170 - MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       A.     Motor disconnects.

       B.     Circuit disconnects.

1.02   Requirements of Regulatory Agencies

       A.     Conform to National Electrical Code and to applicable inspection authority.

       B.     Construct disconnect switches to NEMA and UL standards and provide UL labels.

1.03   Submittal

       Submit product data sheets indicating physical and electrical characteristics.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Acceptable Manufacturers

       A.     Westinghouse

       B.     Siemens Sentron

       C.     Square D

       D.     General Electric

2.02   Single Phase Motor Disconnect Switches

       A.     Motor disconnect switches shall be 3 wire (2 blades and fuseholder, 1 solid neutral),
              fused safety switches, quick make, quick break, load interrupter enclosed knife
              switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover
              with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Provide size as shown
              on plans or as required by code. Provide fuse clips designed to accommodate
              Class R fuses.

       B.     The fuse shall be sized for each motor application.

       C.     Manufacturer and type: Class 3110 manufactured by Square D or and approved
              equal.


                                                                            C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                           SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                      ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16170 - MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS
     D.    Provide a NEMA Type 1 enclosure for interior locations and a NEMA Type 3R
           enclosure for wet or damp (exterior) locations.

2.03   Single Phase Circuit Disconnect Switches

       A.      Circuit disconnect switches shall be 3 wire (2 blades and fuseholder, 1 solid neutral),
               fused safety switches, quick make, quick break, load interrupter enclosed knife
               switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover
               with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Provide size as shown
               on plans or as required by code.

       B.      The cartridge fuse shall be sized as shown on the plans.

       C.      Manufacturer and type: Class 3110 manufactured by Square D or and approved
               equal.

       D.      Provide a NEMA Type 1 enclosure for interior locations and a NEMA Type 3R
               enclosure for wet or damp (exterior) locations.

2.04   Components

       A.      Motor and circuit disconnects shall be horsepower rated and shall bear an
               Underwriters' Laboratory label.

       B.      Circuit disconnects used as main disconnecting means shall be labeled "Suitable for
               use as service Equipment".

       C.      Single Phase Disconnect Switches: Single pole manual motor starter with pilot light.

2.05   Fuses

       A.      Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: ANSI/UL 198E, Class RK5; dual element, current
               limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 250 volt.

       B.      Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.      Install motor and circuit disconnect as recommended by manufacturer and as
               required by the National Electric Code.

       B.      Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.

                                                                              C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                         SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                      ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16420 - SERVICE ENTRANCE
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       A.     Provide and install service entrance equipment and accessories and install service
              entrance equipment supplied by the utility Company.

       B.     Coordinate connection with electric utility company, as necessary to interface
              installation.

1.02   Reference Standards

       Service equipment and accessories shall be U.L. listed and labeled, and shall be identified,
       "Suitable for Use as Service Equipment".

Part 2 - PRODUCTS


2.01   Materials and Components

       A.     Service Entrance Conduits and pulling elbows within 6' of building.

       B.     Single-phase watt-hour meter socket will be provided by the Utility Company and
              installed by the Contractor.

       C.     Current transformer cabinet as required by the Utility Company.


Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Place service-entrance equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment
              manufacturer's written instructions and the specifications required by the Utility
              Company.

       B.     Single-phase watt-hour meter and transformer pad will be installed by the Utility
              Company.

       C.     Install single-phase watt-hour meter socket or socket, and current transformer
              cabinet in accordance with the specifications required by the Utility Company.

       D.     Install fuses, if any, in service-entrance equipment.


                                                                            C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                           SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                      ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16420 - SERVICE ENTRANCE
     E.    Provide equipment bonding and grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a
           permanent and effective ground.

       F.     Adjust any operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

       G.     Install conduits from meter enclosure to within 6 feet of the building. The Contractor
              shall provide a junction box if the 4 inch conduit will not fit into the meter enclosure.

       H.     Paint the exterior service equipment, including the meter enclosure, conduits,
              fittings, current transformer cabinet, etc., to match the dark bronze enamel color of
              the trim.


3.02   Testing

       Upon completion of all installation work (service entrance and circuitry), energize circuitry,
       and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirement.




                                                                               C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                          SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                     ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       Power system grounding.

1.02   Requirements of Regulatory Agencies

       Install complete grounding system in accordance with National Electrical Code.

1.03   Tests

       Measure ground grid resistance with earth ground test meter and install additional ground
       rods and conductors as required until resistance to ground complies with National Electrical
       Code.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Ground Rods

       3/4 inch by 10 feet copper clad steel.

2.02   Miscellaneous Materials

       U.L. labeled and approved for the purpose intended.

2.03   Conductors

       Copper

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Power System Grounding

       A.      Circuit Grounding: Provide grounding bushings, grounding studs, grounding
               jumpers, pullboxes, and panelboards.


       B.      Bonding Jumpers: Provide Green insulated conductor, size to correlate with
               overcurrent device protecting the circuit, attach to grounding bushings on conduit, to
               lugs on boxes and other enclosures. Connection to neutral only at service neutral
               bar.



                                                                              C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                        SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                   ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING
     C.    Bonding Wires: Install bonding wire in non-metallic and flexible conduit connected
           at source end to panelboard equipment ground bar and at load end to enclosure.

3.02   Examination

       Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.

3.03   Installation

       A.     Drive rod electrodes such that the top is 3'-0" minimum below grade. Install
              additional rod electrodes spaced no closer than 6' apart as required to achieve
              specified resistance to ground.

       B.     Provide properly sized bonding jumpers for water meters, conduit and raceway
              expansion fittings to meet Regulatory Requirements.

       C.     Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.

3.04   Field Quality Control

       A.     Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness
              and proper installation.

       B.     Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform
              testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using
              the fall- of-potential method




                                                                           C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                       SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                  ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16501 - LAMPS
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       Lamps and lamp installation.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Acceptable Products

       A.     General Electric Co.
       B.     Sylvania Electric Co.
       C.     Westinghouse

2.02   Incandescent Lamps

       130 volt, wattage as shown on plans.

2.03   High Intensity Discharge Lamps

       A.     Metal halide lamps shall be standard or super metalarc type, phosphor coated or
              clear as shown on plans.

       B.     High pressure sodium lamps shall be clear or phosphor coated, in wattage as shown
              on plans.

2.03   Compact Fluorescent Lamps

       Lamp wattage shall be as shown on plans. Lamps shall be triple tube compact
       fluorescent, 4 pin electronic.


Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Install lamps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

       B.     Replace all burned out lamps at time of final acceptance.

       C.     Replace all high intensity discharge lamps and compact fluorescent lamps that fail
              within three (3) months of final acceptance.



                                                                          C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                         SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                    ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16502 - BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       Provide and install required ballasts.

1.02   Requirements of Regulatory Agencies

       Provide ballasts that meet standards of an electrical testing laboratory and the Certified
       Ballasts Manufacturers' Association. Ballasts containing P.C.B. materials are not permitted.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   High Intensity Discharge Ballasts

       A.     Ballasts: Voltage as per plans, single lamp of the constant wattage high power
              factor type. Provide best sound rating available.
       B.     Ballasts shall be encased and potted, or linear, wherever possible.
       C.     Ballasts used for recessed HID fixtures shall have integral thermal protection.
       D.     Provide in-line fuseholder, with fuse, Bussman GMF or equal.
       E.     Select exterior ballasts for reliable starting to -20 oF (-29 oC).

2.02   LED Driver

       A. Provide universal voltage driver that accommodates input voltages from 120 to 277 volts
          AC at 60Hz and a power factor of greater than 0.9 at 120V input. The driver shall have
          integral thermal protection.
       B. The unit shall have a cast aluminum heat sink integrated directly with the housing which
          provides superior thermal management to ensure the long life of the LED. The unit shall
          have a replaceable PC board with quick connector mounts connecting directly to the
          heat sink.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Provide ballasts of compatible design to lamps specified.
       B.     Mount high intensity discharge ballasts on rubber grommets to reduce noise
              transmission.




                                                                            C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                           SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                      ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16510 - INTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       This section includes supply and installation of luminaries, supports and accessories.

1.02   Submittal

       Submit cuts of each fixture type and product data. Product data shall include photometric
       data prepared by and independent testing laboratory.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Materials

       A.     Luminaries shall be of type and manufacture as shown on the plans.
       B.     Provide integral thermal protection for all recessed HID, fluorescent, and
              incandescent luminaries.
       C.     All light fixtures, housing, channels, reflectors and door frames shall be painted after
              fabrication.

2.02   Acceptable Manufacturers

       Similar items as manufactured by:

       1.     Mid-West Chandelier Co.
       2.     Daybrite/Benjamin
       3.     Guth
       4.     Keystone, or approved equal, will be acceptable.

2.03   Emergency Egress Lighting and "Exit" Signs:

       A.     Emergency lighting and "Exit" sign shall be a combined unit. The unit shall be 20
              gauge steel with black finish. The exit sign shall illuminated by long life LED
              modules. The unit shall be provided with a stencil single face with red letters. The
              unit shall be self powered by nickel cadmium batteries to provide continuous
              illumination for a period of 1 1/2 hours in the event of a power outage. The unit shall
              be provided with two 6 volt, 7.2 Watt Par 36 style emergency lighting heads. The
              emergency lighting and "exit" sign shall be by Sure-Lites model # UNH-1-
              SRBSDHL-70 or approved equal.




                                                                              C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                         SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                     ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16510 - INTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
     B.    The exterior emergency light shall be die cast aluminum housing with black finish.
           The unit shall be self powered by nickel cadmium batteries to provide continuous
           illumination for a period of 11/2 hours in the event of a power outage. The unit shall
           be provided with two 12 volt, 12 Watt MR 16 lamps. The unit shall have an
           operating temperature range from -31 to 122 oF. The emergency light shall be Sure-
           Lites model # UEL1 BK SD or approved equal.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Supports

       A.     Support luminaries directly from building framing structure or as detailed on the
              plans.
       B.     Provide all equipment and material necessary to support luminaries.

3.02   Recessed Luminaries

       A.     Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below, to gain access to socket
              assembly or prewired fixture box.
       B.     Connect recessed luminaire to boxes with flexible conduit and fixture wire.
       C.     Recessed light fixtures shall be adjusted so that there is no light leakage around the
              outside of the frame.
       D.     Install recessed luminaires using accessories and fire stopping materials to meet
              regulatory requirements for fire rating.

3.03   Cleaning and Alignment

       A.     Align luminaries and clean diffusers prior to final acceptance. Cleaning, if required,
              shall be done in accordance with the luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.
       B.     Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
       C.     Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
       D.     Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
       E.     Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.04   Testing

       After all fixtures and lamps are installed, the Contractor shall make lighting tests in the
       presence of the Engineer. Any defects in control or operation found at this time shall be
       corrected by the Contractor at his expense.




                                                                             C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                         SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                      ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16741 - TELEPHONE AND RACEWAY SYSTEMS
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       Telephone Raceway system

1.02   Description of System

       Provide conduit and boxes to form empty raceway systems. The Contractor shall have the
       Telephone Company install the telephone system including all wiring, pay phones and
       terminal boxes.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

       A.     Conduit: Minimum size 3/4". Refer to section 16111.

       B.     Conduit Couplings: Compression-type for EMT and threaded-type for rigid
              galvanized steel conduit.

       C.     Outlet boxes: 4" square with single gang raised cover. Refer to Section 16134.

       D.     Cover Plates: Blank, cover to match other device plates. Refer to Section 16147.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Install all conduit to outlets shown on the plans.

       B.     Each run of conduit shall contain not more than two 90 degree bends. Minimum
              radii for bends shall be 9-1/2" for 3/4" conduit. Avoid the use of conduit fittings.

       C.     Provide a 4" X 4" pullbox for every two outlet boxes.

       D.     Place TELEPHONE labels on all pullboxes.

       E.     Provide nylon pull cord in each conduit run.

       F.     Provide blank cover plates for all unused outlet boxes.

       G.     Provide 4' X 4' X 3/4" plywood board in utility room for telephone terminal block.

       H.     Provide conduit runs from terminal block to each room with outlets.


                                                                            C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                         SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                    ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16913 - MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLS
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Work Included

       A.     Exhaust Fans
       B.     Heating Units
       C.     Hand Dryers
       D.     Circulating Pump
       E.     Water Heater
       F      Sewage Pumps
       G.     Well Pump

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Exhaust Fans/Make Up Air Fans/Attic Fans

       Provide all labor and material necessary to connect the exhaust fans, make up air fans and
       attic fans provided and installed under Division 14. Provide and install occupancy sensors,
       power packs, relays, timers, thermostats, humidity controllers, and fusible disconnect
       switches where indicated on the plans and specified herein. Provide conduit and cable
       necessary to connect the occupancy sensors, power packs, relays, timers, disconnect
       switches, exhaust fans and make up air fans to make an operational unit. The exhaust fans
       and make up air fans shall operate at the same time as controlled by the occupancy sensor.
       The Contractor shall provide the necessary controls and wiring required to operate the fans.
       The Contractor shall provide and install a disconnect switch next to each energy recovery
       ventilator. Control wiring shall be installed in 1/2" conduit.

2.02   Heating Unit

       Provide all labor and material necessary to connect the heating unit. Provide all labor and
       material necessary to connect the circulating pumps, thermostats, etc., necessary to provide
       a complete operating unit. Thermostat circuit shall be installed in 3/4" conduit. Each
       thermostat shall be provided with a lockable cover. Provide and install a fusible disconnect
       and all wiring accessories to make a complete operating unit.

2.03   Hand Dryers

       Provide all labor and material necessary to connect the 240 volt, single phase, 6.5 amp,
       60Hz, 1100 watt heater, hand dryers.

2.04   Circulating Pumps

       Provide all labor and material necessary to connect the circulating pumps provided and
       installed under Division 14 for the hot water heating system. Provide and install a manual

                                                                            C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                       SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                   ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16913 - MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLS
     disconnect switch as specified herein. Provide conduit and cable necessary to connect the
     switch and circulating pump.

2.05   Water Heater

       Provide all labor and material necessary to connect the water heater circulating pump.
       Provide and install a disconnect switch and all wiring accessories to make a complete
       operating unit.

2.06   Sewage Pumps

       Provide all labor and material necessary to connect the 120/240 volt, single phase sewage
       pumps. Provide and install a circuit breaker in the proposed panelboard large enough to
       handle the full load current of the proposed pumps. Provide conduit and cable necessary to
       make the sewage pumps a complete operating system.

2.07   Well Pump

       Provide and install a circuit breaker for each pump in the panelboard. Provide conduit and
       cable necessary to connect the pressure switch for the well pump. The contractor shall be
       responsible to size the circuit breaker to match the horse power size of the well pump.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       Confirm all requirements with Mechanical Equipment contractors before starting work.
       Cooperate with Mechanical Equipment contractors in installation of all wiring.

3.02   Testing

       All control equipment shall be tested by the Contractor for operation to assure that the
       connections are correct and that all interlocking equipment operates as intended. If
       operation is faulty, the Contractor shall make all necessary changes to correct faulty
       condition. Motors shall be tested for correct rotation and corrected if necessary.




                                                                          C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                             SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                        ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16930 - LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Description

       A.      Provide automatic control for interior and/or exterior lighting at the locations shown
               on the plans.

       B.      Furnish all labor, material and equipment to install and make operational the
               following electrical work; complete and in place:

               1.      Lighting contactor and photocell control.

               2.      Hand-Off-Auto switches

1.02   Submittal

       Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instruction, and maintenance and
       repair data.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Acceptable Manufactures


       Products of the following manufacturers are approved for use:

       A.      Photocell controls - Tork, Paragon or Intermatic.

       B.      Lighting contactors - Square D, Westinghouse, Siemens-ITE, R.C.O.C., or an
               approved equal.

2.02   Photocell Control

       The control shall have an operating voltage between 105 and 135 volts and capable of
       carrying 10 amperes continuously. The photoelectric control shall be of the type employing
       a hermetically sealed cadmium sulfide cell to operate an A.C. relay and shall be complete
       with a three prong twist-lock plug and socket which conforms to U.L. Specification 498 and
       shall be weatherproof and suitable for a temperature range of -30o F to 158o F. Control
       shall be fail safe so that the load will remain on in case of cell failure. The control shall also
       have a lightning arrester. The foot-candle operating levels of the photoelectric control shall
       be in the range of 1.5 to 4 for the "Turn On," and of 5 to 10 for the "Turn Off". A time delay
       shall be built into the control to prevent false operation due to lightning.



                                                                                C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                       SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                   ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16930 - LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
2.03 Hand-Off-Auto Switch

       A.     Hand-Off-Automatic switch, 20 ampere, 120 volt, in surface 4" square box.

       B.     Cover plate shall be labeled "Hand-Off-Auto".

2.04   Lighting Contactor

       The Contractor shall supply two lighting control unit. Each unit shall consist of a 4-pole
       lighting contactor rated for 600 volts, 60 amperes load per pole, 120 volt coil, remotely
       actuated by a photoelectric control, and installed in a NEMA type 1 enclosure. A manual
       selector switch will provide On-Off-Automatic setting for system servicing.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Install components     as   shown    on   the   plans   and    per   manufacturer's
              recommendations.

       B.     Mount all components in a workmanlike manner, accessible for maintenance and
              protected from damage.

       C.     The photoelectric control shall be mounted on the side of the roof extension.




                                                                            C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                                       SARANAC REST AREA

                                                                 ELECTRICAL - DIVISION 16

SECTION 16945 - CONTROL SWITCHES
Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01   Description

       A.     Provide automatic control for exhaust fans as shown on the plans.

       B.     Furnish all labor, material and equipment to install and make operational the
              following electrical work; complete and in place:

              1.      Occupancy sensors.
              2.      Manual by-pass switches.

1.02   Submittals- Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instruction, and
       maintenance and repair data.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01   Acceptable manufacturer's

       Products of the following manufacturers are approved for use.
       Occupancy sensor/power pack – Tork or Leviton.

2.02   Occupancy Sensors

       A.     Occupancy sensor: Ceiling mounted combination infrared and ultrasonic monitoring
              sensor with 360 degree, 1500sqft minimum coverage. The unit shall operate at
              24VDC and at a frequency of 32 kHz.

       B.     Power pack: 120 VAC, 60Hz input voltage. 24 VDC 100mA output voltage.
              Shall contain a 120 VAC, 20 Amp relay.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.01   Installation

       A.     Install occupancy sensors and timers as shown on the plans and per manufacturer's
              recommendations.

       B.     Mount sensors and power packs in workmanlike manner, accessible for
              maintenance and programming of different cycles.




                                                                         C.S.34043 / 101616A
                                                              SARANAC REST AREA BUILDING
                                                             BASIS OF PAYMENT – DIVISION 20


Method of Measurement and Basis of Payment:

The pay item, Rest Area Building, will be measured as a quantity of one Lump Sum and
paid for at the unit price of one Lump Sum. The limits of this pay item shall be
considered to be to the exterior side of the enclosing walls of the building plus nine feet
four inches all around building perimeter unless shown otherwise on the drawings.

The contract amount for this work will be payment in full for furnishing all materials,
labor, equipment and incidental items as required to excavate and prepare the building
site, construct footings, foundation walls, floor slabs, masonry walls, wood framing and
roofing; install doors, windows, glass, hardware, shelving, specialty items and
miscellaneous carpentry work; install ceramic tile, gypsum board ceilings, insulation and
painting work, and install all plumbing, mechanical, heating, ventilating and electrical
work, as may be required, to complete the pay item as shown on the drawings and as
specified within this proposal and as may be called for in the Michigan Department of
Transportation 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction.

The cost of work indicated as "incidental to building," where shown on the drawings,
shall be included in this pay item.

The completed work as measured for Rest Area Building, which shall include all
material, equipment, and labor required to complete the work will be paid for at the
contract unit price for the following pay item (Pay Item):

Contract Item (Pay Item)                                                                              Pay Unit

Rest Area Building    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . Lump Sum

Rest Area Building will be measured at the contract unit price LS (Lump Sum), which
shall be payment in full for the above described item.
                            NOTICE TO BIDDERS - INQUIRY


All inquiries concerning the plans and proposal for this project are to be directed to:


                                     Lynn Lynwood
                                           Name

                                   Project Manager
                                            Title

                               lynwoodl@michigan.gov
                                      E-mail Address

                                    (517) 373-0026
                                          Phone


All inquiries must be made by E-mail through the electronic proposal system at
MDOT’s e-Proposal website – www.michigan.gov/mdot-eprop . Telephone inquiries
will not be answered. To be able to process and distribute an addendum, if required, all
inquiries shall be made at least seven (7) calendar days before the letting. Inquiries
made after this date will be considered by MDOT, but will not require a response.

Inquiries made by E-mail must include the following information:

       Proposal Item Number
       Contract ID
       Name of Inquiring Person
       Company Name
       Phone and E-mail address
       Detailed question(s) with reference to proposal page and plan sheet number

Other employees of MDOT have been instructed to direct all inquiries to the person
mentioned above.



2/11/2009

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:196
posted:8/2/2011
language:English
pages:261